Home

OpenEx User`s Guide

1. 334 signal snippets 323 325 stimulation n se eenen 315 sweep basic eessees 306 sweep with end checking 307 oo sectioned deeded eve tinees 304 trigger secondary 305 cleaning the project susssss 57 condition TOOD nr a 109 configuring export seesssss 278 CONSUUCHS i i enne eder A 63 301 controls OpenContorller 115 modifiers essen 116 visualization tools 115 359 OpenEx User s Guide D data export iaa ai 267 export configuration 278 OXPOMING DRE 278 OVerView ee 267 previewing data esessss 275 selecting data 270 271 data generating constructs 80 choosing a data construct 66 OVerView ee 80 type 1 asynchronous scalar data 66 67 80 317 type 2 data buffer 66 67 80 318 type 3 data list eene 66 67 80 321 type 4 signal snippets 66 67 71 80 323 signal snippets with spike sorting 66 67 71 80 325 type 5 continuous waveform 66 67 80 327 data tables creating a 163 formulas x ta ep Ed 165 delays iunii tert t 106 Device Navigator
2. Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Data Source Select pg 188 Behavior pg 196 Channel Selector pg 188 Refresh Control pg 190 Scaling pg 190 X Axis Setup pg 191 Y Axis Setup pg 192 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 188 4 Selecta valid target for the control and make any other property setting changes as needed To select the target l Click the look up button Bl in the Data Target box The Select Target dialog box opens 2 Inthe target hierarchy expand the Stores tree and select the correct Store name such as a snippet Store or a plot decimated Store 151 OpenEx User s Guide 152 Select Target Server Local x Target Ea um Devices H E PA5 1 H E Ampl HB e Stores Xa Tick EM Ay PD ALY Wave t223 pick 4 3 45 H Controls E EY Master Parameters Sac Channel Sus SortCode SaD Device Server Cancel IL To select the Threshold Target 1 Click the look up button El in the Threshold Target box The Select Target dialog box opens 2 Inthe target hierarchy expand the Devices tree and select the correct Device name that is the Device running a circuit which includes the signal snippet with spike sorting data construct 3 Expand the Scalars tree and select the parameter tag that will serve as the target for the threshold To set the target for all channels select the tag
3. n Orientation Vertical Label Position Right Bottom Orientation Horizontal Label Position Left Top Off On 4 4 Polling Parameter Group Modifier Control Polling Parameters Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Read Back Active Select the check box to set the control to read back the current value If the control access a value that might be changed such as another control selecting this check boxes ensures that the appearance of the control reflects the current value Visualization Control Polling Parameters Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets OpenController does not directly access parameter tags or data Stores Instead OpenController polls the Workbench for all parameter tags and Stores The more it polls the Workbench the greater the load it places on both applications Workbench to serve up the data and Controller to take the data and display it Plot Updating Select an updating method from a drop down list Choices include high load medium load and low load This setting determines how plots are updated as it relates to the demand on the system High load places the greatest demand on the system All data acquired since the last update is used to update the plot allo
4. stim sgWavel Sek O SigGen Control The SigGen control is a partial implementation of the SigGen stimulus system It allows users to move about the SGI SigGen Index to determine the signal properties The toggle switch to the right allows the user to select the next or previous SGI If users want to save information about the SigGen parameter controls the best way would be to generate a spreadsheet with the SigGen variables and SGI index and save that so that it can be read by the DataTable format see Data Tables in the OpenController Reference page 163 The outputs from the data table can be set up to store the parameter variables in an asynchronous scalar format and used as epoch events Only one SigGen Engine control can be added to a single OpenController file If multiple SigGen Engine controls are requires the user must create individuals OpenController files for each control For a detailed description of how to use SigGenRP please refer to the SigGenRP manual To learn more about SigGenRP call TDT at 386 462 9622 179 OpenEx User s Guide 180 SigGen Signals are generated on the PC and then loaded to and played from the SerSource component see the RPvdsEx Help The following circuit construct must be added to the RPvdsEx circuit In most cases the SigGen file will be used with a sweep based stimulus protocol The information below assumes that the circuit construct is part of a circuit that includes
5. seesseeesesss 182 example 5 etel 183 OVerView ee 182 logarithmic gauge esesese 128 Cheating 5 iE 130 OVOIVIOW raisni isinan iaa 128 M master mode control 162 creating iie aie 162 OVerView eeeessseeeeeee nee 118 162 master parameters 116 123 messages window seeeeeee 86 N naming conventions tags 301 numeric display seeesessss 131 O OpenBrowser sese 267 exporting data eseeeeeee 278 OVerView iiae iaaa a t aeaa aaa nens 267 WOrKkSpace rasiaan ar 267 OpenController sssssssss 115 Design mode sees 120 dialog boxes eeeeeee 121 Modifiers oriei iieri iin ai iay 116 OVerView eusssssssseseeeeneerern nennen 115 Run mode eee thes 125 targets ecu ree 116 123 182 visualization tools 115 WORKSPACE etes 119 OpenEx overview The Client Server Environment 7 OpenProject ssssseeeeses 49 creating eo e i ne 51 54 importing appliactions 56 OVelIVIGW esee e ETTE 49 working with data tanks 55 OpenScope 24 oid 221 dialog boxes 228 OVEIVICW M aii ii ai 221 workspace 226 OpenWorkbench
6. OpenWorkbench Control WorkBench RPvdsEx 1 Controller 1 Select any one device on which to run this example and click its gray icon in the navigator This will display the device configuration in the main part of the window 23 OpenEx User s Guide 24 zix File Setup Device Stores Control View Help 24 xl r RCO Circuit File T EE ion sese Circuit Notes RX8 Multi I O Processor Es Click the Browse button m to the right of the File Name box to browse to and select the Tutorial rcx file you created earlier You will be prompted to rename the Device Click OK to accept the default name You have now created a device configuration and assigned it to the device The configuration is saved automatically as part of the WorkBench file At this point OpenWorkbench automatically reads the compiled circuit file rcx finds any data Stores included in the file configures data storage parameters and populates an editable Storage Specification table as shown below In this example the default Tick Store is generated by the CoreSweepControl macro and the Demo Store by the Stream Store 1 4Ch macro Storage Specification oe eee a Tick Type 3 Scaler List s blocks of 1 floats Demo Type 5 Cont Waveform 244141 25K blocks of 2048 floats In the Storage Specification table data storage informatio
7. seeeeeeeees 84 Devices configuring 84 94 98 E CPOCNS cei oet ret e e Reg 82 OVerView seesssssssesseeerenennrenennnnnn 82 selecting in OpenBrowser 271 360 using with OpenScope 224 CIN OMS ics cic eode tie ER ee Ras Ease Pan 86 exporting data eeeeeseees 278 configuring 278 exporting 278 OpenBrowser overview 267 previewing data seseessss 275 selecting data 270 271 F file names ssssseseeeene 52 THAMES s occ diee tibi PEE ae 178 creating eese 179 OV6eIVIOeW ensconce eene 178 G QUAGES iii eene erant 128 l importing applications 56 initializing tags sees 100 In put DOX ie e ee ent 143 creating in ee ioc etta 143 OVOIVIOW cesses enne 143 K KNODS c 148 creating iterom 149 OVOIVIOW ceeeeeseeeeeeenee enne nnns 148 L launch settings eessseses 54 led caption oie cett me 133 Creatirig ioc cen te Ens 134 OVOIVIOW eeeeeseeeeseeeenee nennen 133 led indicator aieiai 133 Creating niae ied 133 OVOrVI W 4e ordo aaar ane aa Saa 133 linear guages eee 128 Cheating e niei tte nete gen 129 OVGIVIOW iiit cti aerae tap teseees 128 linking controls
8. Settings groups include Common pg 260 Data Source pg 263 Behavior pg 258 Multi View pg 256 Refresh Control pg 257 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 256 Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group In the Refresh Epoch Name box select an epoch or indexed event This must be selected to update the plot In the Max Value box enter a number at least as large as the maximum activity number of spikes anticipated Click OK OpenScope Reference The Activity plot is configured for viewing combined data for all channels The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse When you animate or track data the plot will look similar to this Snip Snip Combined Data Activity Plot Combined Data Activity Plot with Activity Near Minimum Value with Activity Near Maximum Value After a combined data activity plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for multi channel viewing To modify an activity plot to view multiple channels of data 1 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box 2 Select the Multi View Enabled check box 3 Inthe Num Views box enter the total number of views required to see all available channels of data in the multi view This number will typically be the number of channels of data acquired By default channels will be dis
9. 1 14 0 1 15 0 Tone LinGate Ch 1 Amp 1 Tri 10 Shft 0 StEnable 3 Pes Cti Closed 1 16 0 Freq 1000 M oPhse 0 oRst Run The gated signal out is created using the Tone and LinGate components Tone frequency and level are controlled by a list of variables see following diagram The gate opens when the StEnable line is set high see the Basic Stimulation control construct List of Levels and Frequencies 1 9 0 Se Gerad ua NECN SerSource O9 Tonelev gt ont Lp oRst 0 jS mao c MTM Index 0 4 oData j N 4 LevTable 1 12 0 Size 1000 LINES NOSE Index 0 4 P Data j N FreqTable 5 322 Levels and frequencies are loaded into memory buffers from data tables A SourceFile component or parameter tag would also work The Reset line is generated from the trigger construct and resets the list after each block is recorded The StimGo line is generated from the TTLDelay2 component of the stimulus timing construct This produces a single pulse to move the memory buffer to the next list before the next tone The ToneFreq and ToneLev lines go to the Tone component and the scalar list Stores Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference The oxList data construct in this example consists of a time SX stamp value and sFreq list Note that as with a continuous 5 h g ag Root Freq waveform const
10. Find Err Store PDec Idling Store LFPs Idling Clear Device Amp1 Idling Device PAS 1 Idling Tank Tank Idling Status Messages f E Sauna Loaded Data Storage _c TDT OpenEx Tanks DEMOTANK2 A The Messages window displays status information and error messages Ready 79 OpenEx User s Guide Record Mode gt Understanding OpenEx Data Stores 80 OpenEx experiments can acquire and store various types of data in a single data tank For example an experiment might acquire both spike waveforms and the scalar values of a stimulus variable Each type of data to be acquired during an experiment is called a Store Each Store is defined by a data construct within the compiled circuit file When a compiled circuit file is assigned to a selected device the Store information including data type and number of channels is displayed in the storage specification table Data constructs are groups of components within a circuit that provide information to OpenWorkbench on how to store data to the tank OpenEx recognizes five distinct data constructs but all data can be categorized into three basic data types scalar values discrete waveforms and continuous waveforms Scalar Values Scalar events are typically things such as temperature PH or spike rate Scalar events that are marked as epochs in OpenEx allow users to sort and visualize data that is associated with a part
11. Pile Histogram Raster Feature Chart Activity 2 Click Scroll The scroll plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the scroll plot displayed Setup Properties for Scroll Plot Ed Settings groups include Common pg 262 Data Source pg 263 Behavior pg 260 seen in 2s F Refresh Control pg 257 Source Channel o tC Scaling pg 257 Scroll Sections 10 X Axis Setup pg 258 Multi View Enabled k Y Axis Setup pg 258 Z Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 onfine plotting data in cell Plotting margin percentage o E e 7 Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Parameter Group Common 3 Enter the desired channel number in the Source Channel box Channel information is available in the corresponding OpenWorkbench file 4 Enter the desired number of scrolls or data segments to be displayed 5 Click OK 239 OpenEx User s Guide 240 The scroll plot is configured for viewing a single channel The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse When you animate or track data the plot will look something like this 50 After a single channel scroll plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for multi channel viewing To modify a scroll plot to view multiple channels of data
12. iCompare zCdDone zCdCount K 8 Test GE Used in circuits for basic condition based control of stimulus or acquisition when end checking is required End checking can be used to initiate some action at the end of the condition loop Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will use a condition must include some form of condition control construct When this construct is used OpenWorkbench protocol settings can be used to stop the protocol when the condition loop is done The zCdPeriod parameter tag defines the period of the condition and the zCdCount parameter tag defines the number of conditions Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference The current condition number is compared to the total number of conditions zCdCount to determine when the condition loop is complete When this occurs the output value is set high and this flags OpenWorkbench through the zCdDone parameter tag to indicate that the last condition has been reached Using the Standby on Stop check box and the Stop When Done check box under Condition Loop the protocol can be set to Idle check boxed cleared or Standby check box selected mode when the zCdDone parameter tag value is set high The zCdNum parameter tag is an optional tag that points to the current condition number When zCdNum is used OpenWorkbench will display the value on the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Note The z
13. 3 Click the Browse button m to the right of the File Name box to browse to and select the RPvdsEx file you created earlier You will be prompted to rename the Device Click OK to accept the default name The configuration is saved automatically as part of the WorkBench file Notice that in addition to the Tick store added by the CoreSweepControl macro our pooled store is listed as a single 32 channel store Wave Storage Specification So NETT TN c E 1 Store Wave Wave Type 5 Cont Waveform 24414 1 25K blocks of 2048 floats Store Tick Tick Type 3 Scaler List s Single blocks of 1 floats a E a a si 4 Click the File menu and click DataTank 5 Configure an existing DataTank or create a new DataTank 41 OpenEx User s Guide Setup is complete and the Workbench controls are enabled Running the OpenEx Project OpenWorkbench displays the pooled stores as one store entity despite the fact that the data is being processed on two separate DSPs This keeps the plot simple and easy to visualize To run the project l Click the Record button 2 Click the RS Autoscale icon at the top of the plot to scale the display Your project should now appear similar to the illustration below with the timing and sweep number of Onset epoch Tick shown across the top of the plot and the streaming channels Demo channels 1 32 displaying the demo signal OpenWorkbench File Setup De
14. The plot length or number of points is set in the compiled circuit file by the data construct Changing the amount of data viewed requires changing the block size in the oxStream component Creating a Chart Plot To quickly create a single chart plot 1 4 Click the Controls menu point to Plots Graphs and click Chart Plot The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group W Setup Properties for ChartPlot xj Settings groups include Targets pg 216 SewerNme otrAu s Caption Borde C sowe tase H E Centon Tent Pl Period 100 B Mutoumw Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Data Source Set pg 188 Behavior pg 194 Channel Selector pg 188 Multi View pg 189 Colors pg 188 Refresh Control pg 190 Scaling pg 190 X Axis Setup pg 191 Y Axis Setup pg 192 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 a ha a Ly i el If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being sto
15. E po B Channel Selector pg 188 Multi View pg 189 Cloud Points 1000 EE Colors pg 188 Fes Refresh Control pg 190 Pesk 2 Scaling pg 190 X Axis Setup pg 191 EU OMEN Y Axis Setup pg 192 NumCoumns Appearance pg 193 By SortCode coi eid 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box Margins pg 189 Filtering pg 189 If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController is running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 5 Click the E button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target dialog box 6 Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target The source target should be an OpenWorkbench Store 7 Enter the desired channel in the Target Channel box 8 Setthe Cloud Points to 100 This will cause the screen to display the 100 most recent points 9 Setthe X axis feature Total Amplitude Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time or Area 10 Set the Y axis feature Total Amplitude Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time or Area 11 Select the Category Coloring either by SortCode or by Channel 12 Click OK A feature plot is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar In the example below a sort spike plot generates so
16. Note that duplicate buddy epocs are harder to detect since the default setting in OpenWorkbench does not show buddy Epocs To disable a buddy Epoc Store select Show All Fields from the Storage Specification dialog box This will display all stores and allow all stores to be disabled Set the Mode of the Store to Disable RZ device fails to run a circuit in OpenWorkbench Occurs when the Synchronize sampling clocks check box is checked when using the RZ2 or RZ5 The RZ devices do not support sample clock synchronization a project will fail to run if this option is selected in OpenWorkbench Uncheck the Synchronize sampling clocks check box in the OpenWorkbench Preferences dialog box to run the circuit Tank or zTime errors are generated when switching between Preview and Record mode in OpenEx When OpenEx changes from Preview mode to Record mode or visa versa the circuit is not halted During this switch it is possible that some components might not be reset to the proper state i e timing components or store related components such as a buffer write enable This will cause Tank or zTime errors Switch to Idle Mode before switching from Preview to Record mode 351 OpenEx User s Guide 352 Memory allocation failure Occurs when attempting to set the number of channels or buffer size of a storage component to a value larger than the size of available memory on the DSP Verify that your circuit operates within the limits of your dev
17. Schmitt2 dPN1 0 zOtDur nHi 1000 zOtDelay 9 N2 1 nEnab 1 Uses Used in circuits where the user will control the timing delay or duration of some other circuit or device Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used for this other occurrence must include an other timing control construct Description This construct allows the user to control delay and duration of an alternate timing control option Details The OtFire line is generated by the sweep control construct The OtEnable line Hop will control gates for turning a timed event on and off The zOtDelay parameter tag defines the length of the delay for the start of the timed event relative to the beginning of a condition or sweep and the zOtDur parameter tag defines the duration of the event Note The zOtDelay and zOtDur parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered 315 OpenEx User s Guide Data Storage 316 When it is necessary to use a non macro data construct the user must take extra care to understand all the details of data construct design Circuit headers within each data construct contain all the necessary information for OpenWorkbench to be able to retrieve the data from the hardware and store it in a data tank on the computer s hard drive Headers such as OxSnippet and OxStream are the link between OpenWorkbench and the
18. Opens the Polling and Performance dialog allowing users to set how often OpenWorkbench polls devices for new data Opens the Triggers and Start Stop Timing dialog Opens the Sweep Loop dialog for access to sweep loop settings Opens the Condition Loop dialog for access to condition loop settings Opens the Stimulation Timing dialog where users can enable stimulation timing settings Opens the Acquisition Timing dialog where users can enable acquisition timing settings 91 OpenEx User s Guide 92 Timing and control settings are carried out through parameter tags that are included in various circuit constructs included in the compiled circuit file complied circuit running on the System 3 hardware This approach allows the user to make adjustments to the experimental protocol without redesigning the circuits each time a change is desired For more information about control circuit constructs see the Circuit Construct Reference page 111 Note To save changes to a file that is part of an OpenEx project save the project OpenWorkbench Device Menu Important select the desired device in the Device Navigator before using the Device menu commands Assign RCO Opens a Set compiled circuit file dialog box where users can browse to a compiled circuit file and assign the file to the selected device Rename Opens the Rename Device dialog allowing users to enter a meaningful name for the selected device The device name is us
19. CA Eee opa ED Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter 0 in the Source Channel box to ensure that all channels are available for viewing Enter the desired number of scrolls or data segments to be displayed Select the Multi View Enabled check box In the Num Views box enter the total number of views required to see all available channels of data in the multi view This number will typically be the number of channels of data acquired By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Enter the number of columns to display in the Num Columns box Leave this value set to 1 to see one channel per row Click OK After a multi channel scroll plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for viewing a range of channels To modify a scroll plot to view a range of channels l 2 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter the total number of channels of data to be viewed in the Num Views box By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 To display multiple channels beginning with another channel modify the index offset To modify the index offset value click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View In the View Index Offset box enter the number of channels to offset For example to begin viewing from channel 5 enter an Index Offset value of 4 The plot will begin with channel 5 and display the next sequential chan
20. Click an icon to make the corresponding application the active top window Drag the divider to change the relative sizes of the docked and floating areas To attach or float an application drag its icon across the divider To close an application without closing OpenProject right click its icon and click Close on the shortcut menu To delete an application right click its icon and click Remove on the shortcut menu OpenProject Reference Creating a Project Work on any OpenEx experiment begins with creating a project To create a project 1 Launch OpenProject 2 Inthe OpenProject window click the OpenProject menu and click New Project 3 Inthe OpenProject Configuration window In the Project Name box type a project name b Inthe File box type a complete path for or browse to the location where you want the project folder to be created All project files will be stored in the new folder c Click the View Edit button below the Description box d Inthe View Edit Description dialog box click the Edit check box and type a description in the text edit area then click OK to return to the OpenProject Configuration window 4 Double click an application icon to add the application to the next row in the Launch Details list Repeat for each application that will be associated with the project 5 Inthe Mode cell for each added row that contains an OpenController or OpenScope application select the launch mode See A
21. Smart The scale of the plot is automatically adjusted to ensure values can be shown on the plot only during the first 3 seconds Up Scale Hist When Auto Scale is used this value sets the number of points above the Y axis range that the signal must reach before scaling will occur Down Scale Hist When Auto Scale is used this value sets the number of points below half of the Y axis range a signal must fall before scaling will occur SigGen Specs Parameter Group SigGen File Select the SigGen file to use with the SigGen control Maximum SGI Enter the desired maximum SGI Minimum SGI Enter the desired minimum SGI 190 OpenController Reference Switch Positions Parameter Group Position Labels Enter the labels to appear for each switch position separated by a comma Position Values Enter the value for each switch position separated by a comma Key Arrow Step Size Enter the number of positions to move when pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys on the keyboard Key Page Step Size Enter the number of positions to move when pressing the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys on the keyboard Sections Parameter Group Section Count Enter the desired number of section for the arc Up to five sections can be defined and distinguished by color Section Color 1 Select a color for the first section If the Section Count equals 1 then the Section Color 1 will be applied to the entire arc If the Section Count is greater than 1 then S
22. T 10 190s The current time stamp I I i Moves the indicator back by time stamps Moves the indicator forward by time stamps Scale Controls Expands scale in small steps gt K lt b Shrinks scale in small steps Lk Expands scale in large steps b Shrinks scale in large steps Timeline by Events Lote h 3 Tick The name of the event displayed on the corresponding line Moves the indicator back by events D The current event value lt gt Moves the indicator forward by events Eum 277 OpenEx User s Guide Data Export Exporting Tank Data The primary function of OpenBrowser is to export data from the tank to other data formats OpenBrowser can export to several common file formats ASCII NEX and PLX The standard ASCII format allows users to export data in a format readable by most statistical and graphic packages as well as Microsoft Excel spreadsheets OpenBrowser can also export directly to the NEX format for import to NeuroExplorer M or the PLX format for use with Plexon s Offline Sorter Note The NEV export function is no longer supported Export From the File Menu The File menu provides the following three choices for exporting data e Export Current Row Exports the currently selected row e Export Selected Rows Exports multiple selected rows e Export All Rows Exports all rows containing data Before data can be exported using these commands it must be select
23. h Click Save Repeat for each row to be exported To save time complete the export configuration during the data selection process That way if you use copy and paste to add rows the export configuration will also be copied Be sure to use one or more of the Append File Name By check boxes to ensure that each row ill have a unique file name If exporting only selected rows select the rows to export and click Export Selected Rows on the File menu If exporting all rows click Export All Rows on the File menu Review the messages in the Export Status dialog box and click OK Export to a Single File 1 When exporting to a single file ensure that the Multi File check box in cell A3 of the Data Selection Table window is not checked If exporting a single row select the row and click Export Current Row on the File menu If exporting only selected rows select the rows to export and click Export Selected Rows on the File menu If exporting all rows click Export All Rows on the File menu In the Data Export Format Configuration dialog box ensure that ASCII is selected in the File Type box Click the B button to the right of the Output File Name box The Open dialog box is displayed Browse to the desired location for the data file When using OpenBrowser within OpenProject the default location will be the UserFiles folder for the current project Type a file name in the File Name box and click Open Modify any other s
24. sWave The AqDone line sets the RSFlipFlop high when the acquisition ends While polling OpenWorkbench will detect the sWave high It will then acquire and store the buffered variable dWave and the associated time stamp Once the data is acquired the RSFlipFlop is reset by the handshake protocol Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference 1 17 0 iTime gt Latch 4 wave IND CU The Latch buffer uses the Time line from the clock generating construct and the AqFire line to time stamp the start of the acquired buffer Type 3 Data List oxList About the oxList component Tag Root Tag Root identifies the base name of the construct All parameter Data Form Float tags in the circuit that use the base name will be associated with the Channels 0 oxList component Data_Form is the format of the data The data type can be float or integer both are 32 bit Channels is the number of channels associated with the list Uses The data list construct is used when storing scalar data that can arrive at rates greater than the polling rate of OpenWorkbench Examples of data lists include sweep numbers stimulus parameters and digital input values Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used to generate a stimulus using the list must include this construct Description A data list involves two buffers one for the data and one for the associated time stamps A timi
25. 122 lll Setup Properties for Knob x IM TESTI TACS E ETE Common m Au Caption 7 Pos Display Visible Label Precision io ER Cancel While all properties dialog boxes look and behave in a similar fashion the settings available depend upon the control being modified Control settings are grouped into parameter groups The properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the selected control displayed To display the settings available in another group click the Parameter Group value box at the top of the dialog box and select the group from the list IM TESTS CHR PIT HM Common Appearance Target Settings When settings such as Source Target must be set using the name of a target a Lookup button BI is located to the right of the value box Clicking the Lookup button opens the Select Target dialog box OpenController Reference Select Target Server Local x Target P5 1 Alten i Devices Bim PA5_1 Scalars gt Alten Buffers Soft Trigger Ampl ee Stores ME Controls amp Master Parameters e TUO CN In the Select Target dialog box a list of available targets in the current OpenWorkbench experiment is displayed Using the Select Target Dialog Box Possible targets are displayed in an expandable hierarchy Potential targets are grouped into the four types devices stores controls and master parameters
26. 216 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Appearance pg 192 Behavior pg 195 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 5 Click the m button in the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box 6 Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target 7 Click OK A basic value input is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar About Switches Switches are used to toggle a variable between user specified values There are three types of switches the Switch Slider the Switch Button and the Momentary Button Users click a button or drag a slider to toggle the value sent to a parameter tag The Switch button and Momentary button have two values while the slider button can have multiple values Clicking a Switch button toggles between the two values Clicking a Momentary button turns the control on for a user specified length of time On zm Slide Switch 144 Reset M Switch Momentary Button OpenController Reference Creating a Switch Button To quickly create a switch button 1 Click the Control
27. Continuous waveforms are acquired without interruption from the beginning to the end of the acquisition block Acquired data has a fixed number of samples per second which is based on the sampling frequency of the device and the decimation factor of the acquired signal The Continuous Waveform construct has several features that differentiate it from other data types First the construct does not have its own time stamp All data types are defined relative to the start of the block If there is any disruption of the acquired signal the data tank will generate errors about storing data to a data block For example if a user wanted to acquire a large block of data only when a particular event occurred they should use a Data Buffer and not a Continuous Waveform Second streamed data requires only one sync for all channels This is because the data acquisition is synchronous across all channels Continuous acquired data comes in three formats Plot decimated data the maximum and minimum of a block of data is determined and stored as a single 32 bit word Data in this format allows users to visualize the maximum noise floor and spike activity of an incoming signal however it is not a true representation of the acquired signal Continuous undecimated data signals that are acquired at the sampling rate of the RPvdsEx circuit The acquired signal in this format should be streamed at a sample rate that will be below the maximum transfer rate of the h
28. Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the knob Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Initialize Value Type a value to be used as an initial value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load Position Display Visible When the Position Display Visible check box is selected the current position value is displayed at the center of the knob Scale Max Enter the maximum value to be displayed for the knob 201 OpenEx User s Guide 202 Scale Min Enter the minimum value to be displayed for the knob Label Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point for value labels on the knob Led Caption Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Source Target Select or type the name of the source target When an OpenWorkbench configuratio
29. For example SNIP 16 The designated Store will be stored in the data tank using the SNIP Store ID beginning with channel 17 Caution Before assigning a Store Alias ensure that the data type such as integer or float is the same for both Stores See Using an Alias page 98 for more information Click to enable a Secondary Tag for data storage See Secondary Tags Dialog Box page 101 for more information Select Not Strobe ONset Strobe or OFFset Strobe from a drop down list When ONset or OFFset Strobe is selected events are automatically indexed by TTank as they are stored creating an epoch ONset Strobe Events are time stamped relative to the onset of the sweep OFFset Strobe Events are time stamped relative to the offset of the sweep or condition See About Epoch Events page 82 for more information 97 OpenEx User s Guide Buddy Epoch Enter the name of the relevant buddy Store The buddy epoch only needs to be set on one of the two buddy epoch rows in the Storage Specification table The buddy epoch is typically created by declaring the Offset strobe Store as the buddy epoch in the Buddy Epoch cell in the Onset strobe Store s row Buddy epochs are used to create epochs that are not continuous See About Epoch Events page 82 for more information SortCode Displays whether or not a store is configured to assign sort codes See Type 4 Signal Snippets page 323 for more information HandShake Indicates whether a
30. Note The Clean Running Applications applet does not load if users attempt to run OpenWorkbench while OpenProject or another OpenWorkbench file is running OpenWorkbench will not open and a message is displayed indicating that another instance of OpenWorkbench is running Quit Tips Tricks and Technical Information Optimizing Performance for High Data Transfer Rate Operation When operating OpenEx at higher data rates generally 16 channels or more measures should be taken to improve overall system performance and efficiency The system is optimized via modifications to the OpenEx project and its Stores and by terminating unnecessary applications running on the host PC The following list of guidelines can be used to optimize system performance OpenEx 1 In OpenWorkbench set the Cache Delay preference to 6 0 seconds and ensure the Flush read when overload preference is NOT enabled To check or modify these values click File Preferences in the OpenWorkbench window 2 Turn off all unnecessary scrolling plots within Workbench To turn off individual right click the plot and click Hide 3 Run each device or compiled circuit file in your OpenEx project at the lowest acceptable overall sample clock rate For example if you re collecting EEG type signals you should set the device sample rate to no more that 6 kHz 4 Ensure a reasonable sample rate is being used for each Store in your project and use 16 or
31. Notice that Soft 1 is set as the handshake trigger in the oxScalar component If multiple triggered scalar constructs with handshaking were used in the circuit a different software trigger would be used for each of them Additional data values can be associated with this scalar and may also be stored to the tank These values are called secondary tags See Secondary Tags page 69 for more information oxScalar Tag Root Sweep Handshake Soft 1 Channels 0 1 16 0 1 6 0 1 y h x RSFlipHop sSweep 5 Latch pei tSweep 1 14 0 REE 1 10 0 b N Src Soft fL Counter wf dSweep Base 0 Phse 0 Step 1 Rst Run Type 2 Data Buffer About the oxBuffer component xBuffer beens Tag_Root identifies the base name of the construct All parameter tags Tag_Root in the circuit that use the base name will be associated with the Buffer_Size 32 oxBuffer component Data_Form Float Dec_Factor 1 Buffer_Size indicates the number of points in the data buffer This can Handshake Soft 1 Channels D be a fixed value however in many cases the buffer size may be dependent on the timing construct Then it is convenient to use a parameter tag to specify the buffer size This is done by setting Buffer Size to 0 in the oxBuffer and using a parameter tag with the prefix n to specify the size of the buffer Data Form is the format of the data The data type can be float 32 bit integer 32 bit short 16 bit integer
32. Test Spike MC Wa 000002 Signal Out 0002 32 channels Add two MCzHopIn components to the workspace Click the Components menu click Multi_Processor and click MCzHopIn Click OK and click the workspace to place the component To set the name for the MCzHopIn components double click the component click the Name text box and type Demo for both components Enter 16 in the nChan text box to set the number of channels to 16 for both MCzHopIn components Enter 17 in the ChanSel text box to set the first channel to 17 on the second MCzHopIn component Setting the ChanSel parameter to 17 starts the index for the MCzHopln to 17 Since it is configured to use 16 channels this corresponds to channels 17 32 or the same range of the secondary store macro Connect both MCzHopIn components outputs to the Store inputs for each Stream Store MC macro The MCzHopIn with a ChanSel value of 17 should be connected to the second store macro You may have to resize the DspAssign window to fit the MCzHoplIn component To double check this look at the macro parameter summary the second store macro will have Wave 17 32 labeled for the store information 39 OpenEx User s Guide 40 15 16 Your circuit should look similar to the one pictured below CoreSweepControl Stream_Store_MC SweepNum Demo Store nChan 16 e a SweepDone Chan 16 amp ChanSel 1 Store Wave f f6 Float 24414 1Hz Primar
33. Units Text Enter the unit s text to be added to the display Text Alignment Select an alignment type for value and units text to determine the position of text within the control s display window Choices are Center Left and Right Inner Border Style Select a bevel style to control the three dimensional appearance of interior borders of the control Choices are None Raised and Lowered Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point The precision value should be less than the Number Digits value to display the desired precision Behavior Parameter Group Chart Plot Behavior Parameters Time Span Set the time range in seconds and according to the time stamp to be displayed on the X axis 194 OpenController Reference Data Table Behavior Parameters Ordering Scheme Select an ordering scheme Choices are Manual Sequential Random and Sync Tag Manual ordering controlled by clicking row numbers Sequential if no rows are selected then all rows will be sent sequentially If rows are selected then selected rows will be sent sequentially Random if no rows are selected then all rows will be sent randomly If rows are selected then selected rows will be sent randomly until all selected rows and repeats are done Sync Tag the value of the synchronization target controls which row is sent For example if the sync tag equals one then the first data row row six will be sent Synchroniz
34. a scaling factor that scales the signal to the correct range and a gain factor that sets the units mV uV Because Offline Sorter and Wave Tracker handle streamed data and spike data differently users must set separate scaling factors and gain settings for each type of data Once these values have been set OpenBrowser automatically ensures that streamed data and spike data are exported correctly Before beginning the export process users should Ensure that block size for each waveform is less than 256 Data that will be exported for use with Offline Sorter or Wave Tracker should have a block size in the OpenEx Header of less than 256 samples 2 Determine if the PLX data will be used in NeuroExplorer The PLX export configuration settings include an Export epoch events as plx strobe events check box If the data will be viewed in NeuroExplorer M this check box must be selected If NeuroExplorer will not be used the check box may be left cleared 3 Determine the highest absolute value in the data set The highest value is used to calculate the scaling factor for export It is an absolute number and can be approximated An approximate value for the highest number can be determined at a glance when viewing the data set in the OpenBrowser preview plot OpenBrowser Reference Simply refresh the data then view the scale values Because the plot scales automatically the maximum scale value is a good approximation of the maxim
35. controls below are organized using ntrols menu and are logically grouped on this menu The the Controls menu groupings Group auus Type Numeric Displays Value Watch 7 Segment Display Gauges Status Indicators Value Input Switches Sliders Knobs Linear Gauge Logarithmic Gauge Led Indicator Led Caption Input Box Switch Button Slide Switch Knob Slider 127 OpenEx User s Guide Plots Graphs Scope Pile Plot Chart Plot Scrolling Plot Feature Plot Tables Scripting Data Table VBScript Miscellaneous Graphic Frame Advanced Controls Master Mode Control SigGen Engine Biquad Coefficient Generator Snippet Sort Control Scrolling Threshold Control Visualization Tools 128 About Gauges A gauge displays real time changes to a variable Gauges provide an excellent way to determine if parameter properties are within the experimental bounds For example a gauge could show spike activity spikes per second RMS root mean square noise on a channel or the calibrated intensity of a stimulus The advantage of using a gauge rather than a digital display is that the gauge can be color coded to indicate when the parameter is within a reasonable zone During an experiment the precise value may be less important than whether it is below or above a certain value RMS In this example the control is configured to show the RMS Root Mean Square noise of the acquisition channel along with color coding to ind
36. one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode OpenScope Reference Feature Common Parameters Source Name Select the data event Store name from the currently selected tank Source Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number To view multiple channels set to 0 and enable multi view Cloud Points Set the minimum number of points to display The maximum number of cloud points will be twice the value set The plot will refresh when the maximum number is reached X Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Y Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When multi view is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Histogram Common Parameters Source Name Select the data event Store name from the currently selected tank Source Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data e
37. r OFeMin 3 channel or group of sorted spikes The spike rate is calculated by integrating the OFcReturn 0 spike activity over time A low pass filter is used to integrate the spike rate and FeFeed 0 also acts to interpolate the spike rate between spike events For a more complete description of the InstRate component see the RPvdsEx help When to Use the Instantaneous Rate The InstRate allows end users to visualize changes in spike activity in response to stimuli and may be the primary information saved to the data tank or disk InstRate can also be used anytime a real time measure of the spike activity is required such as when the spike rate is used to control external devices gauge the quality of a signal or examine spike activity in real time How to Store View the Data Instantaneous rate data can be stored in one of two formats either as a list value that occurs at discrete epochs in the acquisition system or as a continuous decimated stream Either data format can be viewed in real time through OpenController using an appropriate visualization tool InstRate Construct 1 4 0 1 6 0 4 N d InstRate 4 Biquad lt FireRate 4 1 8 0 gt P SortCode 0 m OnBIQ 2 UseFall 1 ButCoef 4 s Coef SortMatch 0 ae gt Delay FcFact 0 2 Gain 1 FcMin 3 recu BNBiq 2 FcFeed 0 Typo y bEnab Yes b The minimum components necessary to use the InstRate include the InstRate the ButCoef and the Biqu
38. sss 79 OAE aA EAN EE E isind 79 SEVER 22 ce d cers aassaretassaiifacasdteesasiocine ce etects 7 WOrkspace 79 P perlod cr iet deti tede 108 plots OpenSoope ssssss 221 ACV ick e Ee od EE 253 adding 221 Chiari cet ai ets 251 TATUNG oed A etis 248 histograms ii 241 modifying sese 222 PU i tati te ette 235 VASTE m vtec cdl iind aiaia 244 SCrolliss to st ak E a 238 selecting data ssesusssss 235 OpenEx User s Guide CY ictus en cete secu e eod ctis ceat 247 plots and graphs OpenController 135 creating a feature plot 141 creating a scrolling plot 140 creating chart plots 139 creating pile plots 136 creating scope plots 138 OVOIVIOW eeeeesssseeee nennen trennen nnns 135 polling rate ei etie 105 R RCO Files 5 tette 84 94 98 removing files 59 S sampling rate ssseeeeee 98 scripting in OpenController creating a VB script control 167 debugging IPE T 174 NMN aa nette 174 Viu E P E A E 169 secondary tags ssseeeeee 101 SigGen Engine control 179 creatirig zio te eo 180 OVOIVIOW 2 eek eret ei tbi eed eng 179 slide switch sees 144 creating iiie ere Meenas 14
39. 1 Channel Selector Visible Select the check box to display a channel selector as part of the control The channel selector is a slider that can be used to control which channel of data is used to animate a single view plot By default the channel selector options include channels one through eight The user can modify the number of channels or offset value in the Channel Selector parameter group Auto Threshold S N Factor Select a choice from the drop down menu to determine the signal to noise factor that will be used to set the threshold when the auto threshold feature is used Auto sets the threshold based on any spike activity that is above the noise floor Even if no spikes occur the control will calculate a threshold that will acquire some signals above the threshold 2 1 through 5 1 selects a fixed ratio that generates a threshold that is x times greater then the noise floor Auto Threshold Effort Select low medium or high to determine how large a data block will be acquired before the threshold is calculated High uses the largest block taking the longest time and small uses the smallest block to calculate the threshold the quickest Auto Threshold Polarity Select Either Positive Only or Negative Only to determine if the threshold will look for positive going signals negative signals or signals in either direction A fixed polarity can be use to separate different waveforms Scroll Sections Selects the number of scroll secti
40. 193 OpenEx User s Guide Pointer Width Select a value to adjust the pointer width Track Style Select display styles for the slide switch track Choices are Box Line Bevel Raised Bevel Lowered Indicators Visible When the check box is selected indicators on the slide switch are visible Indicator Size Select a value to adjust the Indicator size Indicator Color Select a color value from a color palette for the Indicator color Switch Momentary Button Appearance Parameters Button Text Font Color Select a color value for the button text from a color palette Auto Led Size When the check box is selected the button s LED graphic will adjust to the size of the button Button Text Type text for the button display name Button Text Alignment Select an alignment type for text to determine the position of the button text Choices are Top and Bottom Button Text Margin Select a value to adjust the button text margin Indicator Alignment Select an alignment type for the LED indicator to determine its position Choices are Top and Bottom Left Top and Right Indicator Height Select a value to adjust the LED indicator height Indicator Margin Select a value to adjust the LED indicator margin Indicator Width Select a value to adjust the LED indicator width Value Watch Appearance Parameters Font Color Select a color value for the font from a color palette Background Color Select a background color from a color palette
41. 2 0 Error message Cannot add tank No error to report or Cannot delete tank No error to report is displayed when attempting to add or delete tanks from OpenWorkbench if the user does not have administrator privileges Functionality changed in version 2 0 Version 1 5 and 1 52 The Threshold Scaling Factor in OpenController s Scrolling Threshold Control may spontaneously reset to 0 This occurs whenever settings in the Behavior parameter group are modified or even viewed in the Setup Parameters dialog box Avoid opening the Behavior parameter group Most behavior parameters that users will need to modify can be modified in the Common parameter group Fixed in version 1 54 The signal in OpenController s Snippet Sort Controls might disappear unexpectedly The green threshold marker will be set to the 0 position Attempting to move the marker will cause it to disappear This occurs because the Y Axis Units Factor has reset to 0 This can occur spontaneously whenever the Y Axis Setup parameter groups is modified or even viewed in the Setup Parameters dialog box Avoid opening the Y Axis Setup parameter group in the Snippet Sort Control Parameters in other parameter groups can be modified without problems Fixed in version 1 54 Version 1 1 Recording to multiple tanks at the same time causes Tank Server errors The protocol appears to run without data loss initially but Tank Server errors are generated repeatedly after the protocol is
42. 4 mark of the buffer buffer size is determined by defining a value that equals 1 4 of the size of the buffer including the time stamp and sort code when the sort code needs to be based on all of the time voltage windows that the waveform passes through when more than four time voltage windows are used four windows will generate 2 or 16 distinct sort codes Circuit Design Reference FindSpike The FindSpike component differs from the SortSpike components in two significant characteristics FindSpike does not allow online spike sorting and it does not use a fixed voltage threshold for spike discrimination Users who require online spike sorting should use one of the SortSpike components If online spike sorting is not required FindSpike can be used and has some advantages for acquiring candidate spikes FindSpike detects spikes based on their deviation from the noise of the system The noise floor of the signal is determined by calculating the RMS of the last x number of milliseconds tau If the noise floor of the signal changes over the acquisition period FindSpike will track the changes and compensate for variations in the noise floor As long as the signal to noise ratio between the noise floor and the spikes remains constant or relatively so the candidate spikes should be easily acquired In contrast the SortSpike components use a fixed voltage threshold If the noise floor changes even if the signal to noise ratio of the spi
43. A MultiLatch component can be used for multiple asynchronous scalar values A SerStore component can be used for lists and data buffers Latch Uses Each compiled circuit file that will be used to acquire asynchronous scalar values from a single secondary tag must include a latch construct Description This construct provides a way to store one secondary tag value latched to data tags in the primary triggered scalar construct Details The latch component stores a value when a trigger pulse is sent high then low Each trigger event will store a new value The latch is not reset once read that is set to zero Using a Latch to store a scalar value as a secondary tag oxScalar Tag Root Tick Handshake None Channels 0 1 1 0 115 0 ind h i PulseTrain2 iTime Latch lt _ lt tTick nPer 24414 POT rg 0 nPulse 1 1HzTick fdTick Enab Yes 1 7 0 PLate 0 Gain 3 gt Latch y gt dGain In the above circuit two scalar values are stored Tick and Gain Tick is the primary Store so it includes an oxScalar circuit header and tags for the data dTick and time stamp tTick Gain is the secondary Store It only requires a latched value for the data The data is called dGain here for consistency but any name could be used Notice that the data values for both Stores are latched at the same time by the 1 HzTick pulse this is essential for secondary tags to work correctly To store Gain no cir
44. Border Style Select a style for the inner border Choice include None Raised and Lowered Background Color Select a color for the gauge background from a color palette Arc Start Enter the position in degrees for the starting position of the arc display Arc Range Enter the range in degrees for the arc display For example 90 degrees for a quarter circle arc Logarithmic Gauge Layout Parameters Offset X Enter a value for the X offset of gauge from the frame right bottom Offset Y Enter a value for the Y offset of gauge from the frame right bottom Inner Border Style Select a style for the inner border Choice include None Raised and Lowered Background Color Select a color for the gauge background from a color palette Arc Start Enter the position in degrees for the starting position of the arc display Arc Range Enter the range in degrees for the arc display For example 90 degrees for a quarter circle arc Slide Switch Layout Parameters Orientation Select Vertical or Horizontal orientation OpenController Reference Label Position Select Right Bottom or Left Top label position If the slide switch orientation is vertical Right Bottom places the value labels at the below the slide track and Left Top places the value labels below the slide track If the orientation is horizontal Right Bottom places the value labels at the right of the slide track and Left Top places the labels at the left of the slide track
45. Buffer Ead List Type 3 Data List At Snippet Type 4 Signal Snippets ANE Stream Type 5 Continuous Waveform 4f Controls Under controls the possible targets are grouped first by control name i then by the setting group Control names correspond to the value in the My Name setting and the groups correspond to the parameter groups in the property setting dialog box for that control The value type for a setting is indicated by its icon The user must select a target of an appropriate type for the data that will be read 123 whole number 1 23 integer number gr check box RGB Color drop down list 124 OpenController Reference k Master Parameters Under Master Parameters there are three standard targets master channel master sort code and master device These targets allow the user to update key groups of parameter tags with a single control Rac master channel Note updates all controls in the same OpenController instance where the Target Channel 1 Appears as Channel in the target parameter in the parameters dialog box Bas master sort code Not Implemented Bun master device Not Implemented Using Run Mode Run mode initializes the control client application OpenController and allows it to access the memory map of the hardware generated in OpenWorkbench Because several control sets can be open at a time it is important to ensure that only one or two are accessing the OpenWorkbench memory map When multiple OpenCon
46. Chart plots in OpenController and OpenScope can only be used with scalar or snippet data Using stream or buffer data may cause OpenController OpenScope to crash or display data improperly First noted in 1 1 If epoch events occur infrequently the event might be missed by OpenEx polling and as a result the Store will not appear in the OpenScope or Open Browser timelines or events list The data is acquired and can be accessed by manually typing in the event name in Scope or Browser For more information see Tech Note 0116 Offset Strobe epochs events that exist in the tank data do not automatically appear in the OpenScope timeline You can add the event to the timeline manually by dragging it from the Event list to the timeline First noted in 1 1 When using oxBuffers or oxSnippets with large block sizes greater than 5000 some blocks do not appear in OpenScope and OpenBrowser However data is stored in the tank and can be exported Smaller block sizes should be used whenever possible First noted in 1 0 Error message Trouble saving data to tank is displayed if no data has been saved to tank for an extended period of time approximately ten seconds To avoid this problem a Pulse Train can be used to generate a pulse to be stored once per second First noted in 1 0 You can only have 100 tanks registered in TankMon at one time Removing a tank from the monitor does not delete it however in version 1 57 and below tanks cannot be
47. Continuous Waveform oxStream Tag Name Store Description Sampling Rate Num Channel OpenWorkbench Reference In general Store IDs should begin with alpha characters that is letters a z and A Z Store IDs must NOT begin with any of the following characters yh lt gt I a space or any number 0 to 9 The user must ensure that Store IDs are not duplicated If data from multiple sources is stored using the same Store ID data may be lost This is also true of stores on multiple devices Each data Store is associated with a tag name that is used in each associated parameter tag for that data construct This quickly identifies a group of associated parameters that will be stored to the data tank during an experiment Note a slash at the end of a tag name indicates that it has been set as either an onset or V offset epoch Data type and block size The effective sampling rate See Setting the Sampling Rate page 98 for more information Number of channels of data acquired by the Store Additional Fields On the Stores menu click Show All Fields to show the following columns Alias Secondary Tag Strobe Type Enter the name of an existing Store followed by a channel offset value to use that Store Name as an alias for the currently selected Store The channel offset value ensures data in the aliased Store s is not superimposed The Store name and offset must be separated by a comma
48. Date Modified J G3 Tanks A0206_Block 1 Tbk TBK File 8 3 2006 9 55 AM 3 B A0z06 Ej A0206_Block 1 Tdx TDX File 8 3 2006 9 55 AM T E A0206_Block 1 tev TEV File 8 3 2006 9 55 AM a Block 2 4 5 A0206 Block 1 tsq T5G File 8 3 2006 9 55 AM Block 3 4 B ao306 Bl DemoTankz xi You can create new tanks or open existing tanks in the Data Storage dialog box available from the Data Tank command on the File menu in OpenWorkbench Legacy Tanks OpenEx 2 0 supports the legacy DataTank structure used in earlier versions of OpenEx but strongly recommends using the more manageable and portable DataTank structure that is the default format in the current release The legacy tank structure does not provide easy access to add move or delete individual blocks within the tank from Windows Explorer Registering Tanks If a tank will be accessed across a network it must be added to the windows registry Tanks can be registered or unregistered with a single click from the Data Storage dialog within OpenWorkbench or from TankMon Note there is a limit to the number of tanks that can be registered at one time 83 OpenEx User s Guide Workspace Basics Using the Device Navigator The Device Navigator provides a drag and drop interface for configuring the devices in your system On launch OpenWorkbench automatically detects all TDT programmable hardware modules that are powered on and connected to the PC and generates a system diagr
49. Each level of the hierarchy can be collapsed or expanded by clicking the expand or collapse symbol to the left of the level Em Devices Under devices possible targets are grouped by device and are further divided into scalars or buffers The data type of a target is indicated by the color of the target s icon The user must select a target of an appropriate type for the data that will be read Target names for targets found under a Device in the hierarchy include the device name much like a path to the target If devices are named sequentially such as Ampl Amp2 Amp3 users can select the same target across multiple devices by modifying the target name to replace the number found in the last position of a device name with an asterisk such as Amp HPfreq Scalars float Blue e integer Teal logic i e 0 1 Green 123 OpenEx User s Guide Buffers oO data pink m coefficients purple Shan Channel Number Scalars and buffers that are followed by a tilde include multiple channels The user can expand them to show and select the channels Users can select the multi channel target such as sEA rather than a single channel in some cases such as using multi view plots Note coefficients are typically used in spike sorting and filter coefficients amp Stores The Store type corresponds to the data construct type and is indicated by it s icon Mr Scalar Type 1 Triggered Scalar f Buffer Type 2 Data
50. Enable line from the zTrigB starts the plot decimation component PlotDec 16 The PlotDec16 finds the maximum and minimum value from a set of 32 points and then stores the data as two 16 bit integers in a 32 bit word for later decompression Every 32 samples a strobe signal is sent to the SerStore component to store the data Note that the size parameter of the SerStore components should always be an even multiple of the block size defined in the OxStream component While the protocol is running OpenWorkbench polls the Store to see if the block size has increased by 256 points Once it has the data is stored as 512 floating point values Note that the there is only one sPD since both Stores will download the same number of points Secondary Tag Constructs Several constructs exist for implementing secondary tags in OpenEx without the aid of macros See Secondary Tags page 69 for more information about secondary tags 328 Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference Secondary tag constructs can be used to implement secondary tags when using non macro data storage The secondary tag construct is implemented by first selecting a data construct component for the primary store Additional secondary Stores can be made into secondary tags which do not require circuit headers and only need constructs for saving the data There are three common constructs used with secondary tags A Latch component can be used for asynchronous scalar values
51. For example if the user attempts to open an export file with more than 248 data samples in Microsoft Excel which is limited to 256 cells in a row the excess samples will be discarded and Excel will generate a File not loaded completely message Note that the reason the maximum number is 248 is that at least six columns out of the 256 are used for other information such as block event time stamps and so forth If more than six columns are used before the data columns then there will be fewer columns available for data See also Number of data subsections page 280 for more information Significant Digits number of digits saved for each value starting with the first non zero digit This parameter is applied to time stamps as well as data Hide Title hides the first row with the column descriptions Raw Data Only saves only the signal data and discards all of the other details like tank name block name event time sampling frequency and number of points Output File Name allows the user to browse to and set the location and name for the output file s 279 OpenEx User s Guide 280 Append File Name By appends the block event channel number and or row number of the exported data to the output file name This is very useful when the Multi File option is selected Number of data subsections used to divide the data samples into subsections By default each data set is stored in a single row with the tank name block na
52. Freq 6 Bl 500 7 2 Bl 900 8 B1 1500 9 2 Bl 1800 OpenController Reference VBScriptEx About VBScriptEx The VBScriptEx control provides a powerful way to add real time logic to control stimulus parameters based on input from multi channel digital inputs It comes with a light IDE Integrated Development Environment for source code editing and debugging It supports the standard VBScript language as well as extended functions providing screen output flow control and access to OpenEx data target or other controls Only one script control can be added to a single OpenController file The script control provides an editor for source code editing line numbering and syntax highlighting The tool buttons on top of the editor provide two groups of functions standard file operations and debugging operations Standard file operations include creating new scripts opening and saving a script files Debugging operations include running stopping debugging and stepping through a script adding and removing breakpoints and opening the variable watch dialog Using the legacy VBScript control The legacy VBScript control requires the VB script dll s and the VB script debugger Microsoft does not allow TDT to distribute the Microsoft Script Debugger VB script debugger It is currently available for download from the Microsoft Website at http microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyId 2F465 BEO 94FD 4569 B3C4 DFFDF19CCD99 amp displayl
53. LS 93 9997 Cached Events 2 nLoop 1600000 iwr 200097 iRd 100 Processed Event 1 iRd 200096 nCached 2 LS 94 9997 Processed Event 2 iRd 200097 nCached 1 LS 94 9997 Cached Events 2 nLoop 1600000 iwr 300098 iRd 200f Processed Event 1 iRd 300097 nCached 2 LS 95 9997 Processed Event 2 iRd 300098 nCached 1 L5 96 9997 Select the Debug Active check box to see detailed information about tank activity Accessing a Tank on Another PC The TTank server stores and access data in the DataTank The tank can be accessed across a network providing the flexibility to accommodate a variety of lab set ups and work styles If the user simply wants to store tank data on a networked computer mapping the network drive on the local computer provides a simple solution If the user requires simultaneous access to a data tank from more than one computer issues with each computers security settings must be addressed Store tank data across a network To use a network resource to store tank data map the network drive where the tank is to be stored After creating the tank on the networked computer and registering the tank on the local PC the user will be able to access the data as if it were stored on the local PC To map network drives on your computer go to My Computer and select Tools gt Map Network Drive A dialog will help you connect to a shared network folder and assign a drive letter to the connection Allow simultaneous access to a data tank fro
54. Offline Sorter Recommended value is 1 Values can be from 1 to 32 Spike Scaling Factor Floating Point to uV used with Gain to scale spike data for viewing in Offline Sorter Gain for continuous waveform used with Scaling Factor to scale continuous data for viewing in Offline Sorter Recommended value is 1 Values can be from 1 to 32 Stream Scaling Factor Floating Point to uV used with Gain to scale continuous data for viewing in Offline Sorter Comment 256 character comment line Output File Name allows the user to browse to a network or local folder and saves the file with a set name Note See Exporting to PLX page 284 for detailed information on using PLX Export Specific Settings OpenBrowser Reference Append File Name By allows the user to select to automatically add the block event channel number and or row number of the exported data to the saved file name This is very useful when the Multi File option is selected NEX Export Specific Settings Quant Factor mV per LSB Sets the millivolt range for the Least Significant Bit of the NEX format The default value has been set to insure that the data is exported correctly Changing the default settings can cause data to be read incorrectly by NeuroExplorer M Scaling Factor to convert Tank Data to uV Not used Comment 256 character comment line Append Event Name by Channel allows the user to select to automatically add the channel number to the e
55. Refresh on Change Select the check box to refresh the plot when the scalar value associated with the defined refresh epoch changes This setting can be used with the range settings to create a range in which the plot will be refreshed on change Refresh Period Set a time value for the refresh period in seconds Scaling Parameter Group X Y Axis Range Type a value to set the range for the X Y axis X Y Axis Symmetry Select the check box to ensure that a symmetrical X Y axis range will be displayed This is ideal for signals that are expected to be symmetrical Auto Scale The plot can be set to automatically scale during animation to ensure that the data can always be viewed in a convenient scale None Auto Scale is turned off Active The scale of the plot is automatically adjusted to ensure all values can be shown on the plot Smart The scale of the plot is automatically adjusted to ensure values can be shown on the plot only during the first 3 seconds Up Scale Hist When Auto Scale is used this value sets the number of points above the Y axis range that the signal must reach before scaling will occur Down Scale Hist When Auto Scale is used this value sets the number of points below half of the Y axis range a signal must fall before scaling will occur 257 OpenEx User s Guide X Axis Setup Parameter Group Show X Labels Select the check box to display a unit label for the x axis Clear the check box to h
56. Select Tank dialog window and select Show Legacy Tanks To select a tank in the list single click the tank name To select an unregistered Legacy tank right click in the Select Tank dialog window and click Find Legacy Tank to navigate to the desired tank Epochs can be added to the table in the empty header cells indicated by ellipses and a single epoch can be used as a time reference by selecting the Tref check box for the epoch column See Using Epochs as a Time Reference Once the first data selection row has been configured in the Data Selection Table additional rows with the same configuration can be added by copying and pasting the row to a blank row After the row has been copied change the block or event name as needed To change a cell value first delete the cell s current value then right click the cell to open a list of possible blocks or events Shorthand characters can also be used to simplify setting up multiple rows See Using Shorthand Characters for Data Selection page 272 for more information Tip When using copy and paste to add multiple rows of data configure the first row for export first When it is copied and pasted the export configuration will also be included Be sure to check one or more of the Append File Name By check boxes to ensure that multiple rows saved to multiple files will have unique names See the Data Export book for more information on configuring data for export Adding Rows To add a row click
57. The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group 133 OpenEx User s Guide 134 8 Esti 7 Xf Settings groups include Common pg 202 Target s pg 217 C semer Nane oer Capon Border pe 187 Oo E C Tase Crame Value Control pg 218 a Appearance pg 193 E E OnO Twreshoia 05 on If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench Click the Bl button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target In the On Off Threshold box type the threshold If the value change is greater than the threshold the indicator will be toggled off or on Click OK A basic led indicator is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Creating a Led Caption To quickly create a led caption 1 Click the Controls menu poi
58. This process replaces an existing application file in a project Keep in mind that importing a file into an existing application instance removes the file previously assigned to that application instance from the project Importing RPvdsEx Files When an OpenWorkbench file is imported standard RPvdsEx files used by the OpenWorkbench file will be imported automatically A corresponding RPvdsEx file is also imported automatically when a compiled circuit file is assigned to the Project s OpenWorkbench file To import an RPvdsEx file that is not assigned to an OpenWorkbench file users must open the desired file from within the RPvdsEx application and save it as part of the project OpenProject Reference Menus and Dialog Boxes OpenProject Menu The OpenProject menu is available from the menu bar or by right clicking the permanent applications area Some menu choices are only available when a project is open New Project Load Project Close Project Save Project Save As Unlock Project Data Tank Configure Project Add Component Clean Project Preference Recently Used Files Exit Opens the OpenProject Configuration window Opens the Open Project File dialog box so that an existing OpenProject file can be opened Closes the current project Saves the current OpenProject file and all project application files Saves a copy of the current project with a new name in a user selected location Unlocks a locked pro
59. a client server environment That means you can pick and choose the applications you need to build and run your experiment In this tutorial you will be building the project from the ground up To design the processing chain that controls the processor you will use RPvdsEx the circuit design interface To design the experiment and to handle communication between the OpenEx environment and the hardware you ll need OpenWorkbench Finally to design the real time filter controls you will use OpenController Creating the Project 12 To help you manage multiple applications and the files associated with them each experiment is created as a project You can quickly create the project and generate all of the files associated with it using OpenProject You can then access all of the project files by loading a single OpenProject wsp file Note Ensure that your TDT system is connected to the PC and turned on before creating the project To run OpenProject e Double click the OpenProject is launched and you are ready to open an existing project or create a new one OpenProject icon on your desktop OpenEx Tutorials To create a new project 1 In the OpenProject window click the OpenProject menu and click New Project OpenProject Configuration X Project Mame SENSA cies File Location C TDT Openex MyProjects Description FX I4 View Edit Applications gt Launch Details ie Sc ees WorkBench Brow
60. a sweep or condition construct and that the construct is controlled by an OpenWorkbench protocol that uses sweep settings It is possible to use SigGen circuits in other circuits and OpenWorkbench protocols however the circuit control must be designed by the end user sgRamNpts1 _ 1 1 0 1 SerSource gt Ch 1 SEXE OD a _ORst 0 1 2 0 oSwEmabe yea Index 0 lt P gt Data J sgWavelt 6 sgPlayindex1 sgRamNpts1 parameter tag determines the size of the buffer sgWavel parameter tag loads the SigGen file to the SerSource component Sweep resets the buffer before the start of the next stimulus This should be changed to condition if condition control settings are used rather than sweep control settings in the OpenWorkbench protocol SwEnable plays out the signal from a sweep based protocol This should be changed to CoEnable if condition control settings are used rather than sweep control settings in the OpenWorkbench protocol Creating a SigGen Engine Control The description below creates a SigGen control and a Slider Switch that selects the proper SGI index 1 Click the Controls menu point to Advanced Controls and click SigGen Control The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box Th
61. a threshold settings for spike detection can be modified in real time Parameter variables that are stored in the tank such as stimulus parameters can be accessed through associated parameter tags If the tags are also associated with an OpenWorkbench Store the stimulus parameters are modified through the control and saved through the Store automatically Modifiers can also send values to other controls For example changing the value of a filter with a modifier such as a slider can also pass the new value to a visualization control such as a numeric display This allows a user to monitor and modify the display properties of several controls and parameters through a single control Understanding Targets 116 A target points to the location of the data being read or the location to which a value will be written This location might be an OpenWorkbench Store a parameter tag within a compiled circuit file running on a device or another control setting Targets are defined in the properties dialog box for each control OpenController Reference Types of Targets Common Uses Parameter Setting Store or data buffer Visualizing data in a plot Data Target Parameter tag Visualizing data in a visualization Source Target control Writing value from a modifier control Primary Target Control settings Reading a value from another control Source Target Writing a value to another control Primary Target In some controls the Alternate Target
62. actual data Additional columns may be added before data columns to store information such as subsections epoch events The first row contains header information describing the data stored in each column such as BLOCK EVENT TIME and so forth for each column OpenBrowser Reference Export to Multiple Files 1 2 When exporting to multiple files ensure that the Multi File check box in cell A3 of the Data Selection Table window is checked Configure each row for export To configure a row for export Click the Exp Config button for the desired row b In the Data Export Format Configuration dialog box ensure that ASCII is selected in the File Type box c Name the export file Click the B button to the right of the Output File Name box The Open dialog box is displayed d Browse to the desired file location When using OpenBrowser within OpenProject the default location will be the UserFiles folder for the current project e Type a file name in the File Name box and click Open You can type individual names for each row file or use the same base file name for all rows files If you use a base name be sure to use the Append File Name by check boxes If two or more rows attempt to write to exactly the same file data will be overwritten f If desired select one or more of the Append File Name By check boxes to include block channel event or row information in the file name g Modify any other settings as desired
63. be displayed after the decimal point for value labels found on the control Major Tick Count Enter the number of major tick marks to display on the control The Show Major Ticks check box must be selected before major tick marks become visible Minor Tick Count Enter the number of minor tick marks to display between two major tick marks on the control The Show Major Ticks and Show Minor Ticks check boxes must be selected before minor tick marks become visible Tick Label Margin Enter the number of pixels of space desired between labels and the tick arc Minor Tick Alignment Select an alignment style for minor tick marks Choices are Inside Center and Outside Inside positions tick marks closer to the slider bar and Outside positions tick marks closer the labels Target Parameter Group Biquad Coefficient Generator Control Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path Repaint Target on Update Not used Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Coef Target Select the parameter tag associated with the gt Coef line in the Biquad component Delay Line Target Select the parameter tag associated with the gt Delay line Target Channel Enter the channel number 215 OpenEx User s Guide 216 Data Table
64. by check boxes to include block channel event or row information in the file name 287 OpenEx User s Guide g Modify any other settings as desired h Click Save 3 Repeat for each row to be exported To save time complete the export configuration during the data selection process That way if you use copy and paste to add rows the export configuration will also be copied Be sure to use one or more of the Append File Name by check boxes to ensure that each row ill have a unique file name 4 If exporting only selected rows select the rows to export and click Export Selected Rows on the File menu 5 If exporting all rows click Export All Rows on the File menu 6 Review the messages in the Export Status dialog box and click OK Export to a Single File 1 When exporting to a single file ensure that the Multi File check box in cell A3 of the Data Selection Table window is not checked 2 If exporting a single row select the row and click Export Current Row on the File menu 3 Ifexporting only selected rows select the rows to export and click Export Selected Rows on the File menu 4 If exporting all rows click Export All Rows on the File menu 5 Inthe Data Export Format Configuration dialog box ensure that NEX is selected in the File Type box 6 Click the B button to the right of the Output File Name box The Open dialog box is displayed 7 Browse to the desired location for the data file When using OpenBrowser
65. ca Fa The Stream Store MC2 macro is supported Store Wave Float 24414 1Hz only by multiprocessor devices such as the RX5 Data Rate 381 5 kBytes Sec and RZ2 and is an extremely efficient data storage macro Cycle usages for saving data are reduced by saving streamed data from all channels as one collective stream instead of parsing individual channels Visualization in OpenController is not supported since individual channels are not separated until the data is stored to the tank Uses Stream Store macros are used to store streaming raw filtered or decimated waveforms Async Stream Store macros are used to store streaming raw filtered or decimated waveforms through an asynchronous enable at a specified sample rate Description Stream Store macros accept floating point data streams for storage at a specified sample rate Depending on the Store Format parameter setting one of five data formats will be used for storage 32 bit floating point 32 bit integer 16 bit integer Short 8 bit integer Byte or 32 bit integer for plot decimation Async Stream Store macros are similar to the Stream Store macros but allow storage to be triggered asynchronously through an enable Circuit Design Reference OpenController Constructs Biquad Filtering Biquad filtering can be implemented using one of the filtering macros available in RPvdsEx HP LP Filter 1Ch HP LP Filter 4Ch and HP LP Filter MC macros pass floating point data throug
66. can be expressed as Hs SF 1e 6 2048 G 5 lt 2048 Export to Multiple Files 1 When exporting to multiple files ensure that the Multi File check box in cell A3 of the Data Selection Table window is checked 2 Configure each row for export To configure a row for export a Click the Exp Config button for the desired row b In the Data Export Format Configuration dialog box ensure that PLX is selected in the File Type box c Enterthe appropriate gain and scaling factor for the data type being exported in the current row d Name the export file Click the B button to the right of the Output File Name box The Open dialog box is displayed e Browse to the desired file location When using OpenBrowser within OpenProject the default location will be the UserFiles folder for the current project 285 OpenEx User s Guide 286 f Type a file name in the File Name box and click Open You can type individual names for each row file or use the same base file name for all rows files If you use a base name be sure to use the Append File Name by check boxes If two or more rows attempt to write to exactly the same file data will be overwritten g If desired select one or more of the Append File Name by check boxes to include block channel event or row information in the file name h Modify any other settings as desired i Click Save 3 Repeat for each row to be exported To save time complete the expo
67. changes OpenController includes several plots similar to those available in Open Scope For example the scope pile plot can be used to visualize data such as spike activity and streamed or decimated data While OpenController plots are limited in functionality and can only be used to visualize the data as it is acquired the real time nature of these plots is a distinct advantage for real time experimental control OpenScope acquires data from the tank and may have a delay of up to 3 seconds between acquisition and display In OpenController the Store information is acquired directly from OpenWorkbench so that changes in a modifier can be viewed immediately This allows a better match between stimulus presentation and data acquisition About Modifiers Modifiers are controls that can be used to control the properties of a circuit or other controls Most often modifiers are used along with visualization controls and modifications are made in response to data visualized from one of the available plots Modifiers can change circuit parameters that are not part of an OpenWorkbench Store such as filter settings thresholds for spike detection and stimulus parameters Modifiers can also change properties of other controls For example a modifier can change what data channel is displayed by a visualization control Parameters that may be modified using controls might or might not be saved to the tank Parameters that are not stored in the tank such as
68. channels or offset value in the Channel Selector parameter group 209 OpenEx User s Guide 210 Training Sample Size Enter a value to determine the maximum number of samples used to sort spikes using more spikes an increased sample size allows individual units to be separated more effectively and rare units are more likely to be detected However if unit activity is low using a large sample size can take an inordinately long time Maximum Training Time Enter a value in seconds to set an upper limit on the auto sort process If the training sample size is not reached in the maximum training time the sort is based on the existing sample size Allow Unsorted Group Select the check box to allow unsorted spikes Pile Depth Set the number of traces that will be displayed Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Switch Button Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Primary Target Select or type the name of the primary destination target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button J to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The target should generally be the devic
69. chosen Choosing a Spike Component OpenEx supports four spike acquisition components typically implemented through a Spike Store data saving macro Users can select which component or processor type is used in the macros set up properties The SortSpike2 component should be appropriate for most spike discrimination and spike sorting applications However there may be rare instances where choosing one of the other available spike components could provide better performance TDT strongly recommends using the SortSpike2 whenever possible All four components can be used with the Scrolling Threshold control for spike discrimination However FindSpike cannot be used with the Signal Snippet Control for online spike sorting This section provides a table for comparison of the four spike detection components followed by discussion of how they differ and when to use them 71 OpenEx User s Guide The following table compares the different processor types their uses and specifications I Issue re Threshold pp Windowing poo Biphasic Spikes po Spike Sorting e Time Stamp po Time Stamp Position Buffer Description __ When To Use ce When Not To Use 72 FindSpike value between two RMS windows peak of spike centered in buffer yes none yes center of buffer buffer size is determined by defining a value that equals the total size of buffer inc
70. collected Idle Changes the system to Idle mode In Idle mode devices are not loaded and are not running Standby Changes the system from Record or Preview modes to Standby mode In Standby mode devices are loaded and running but signals are not being acquired and saved to disk Preview Changes the system to Preview mode and displays the Plot window In Preview mode data is saved to a temporary block in the tank Run Changes the system to Record mode and displays the Plot window In Run mode devices are loaded and running and data is saved to the tank Reset Hardware Resets the connected System 3 hardware OpenWorkbench View Menu The commands on the view menu allow the user to toggle various display options Device Navigator Toggles display of Device Navigator Control Panel Toggles display of Control Panel Message Window Toggles Display of Message Window Plot Window Toggles Display of the Plot Window OpenWorkbench Help Menu The command on the help menu displays version information About Toggles display of OpenWorkbench version information OpenWorkbench 93 OpenEx User s Guide Configuring an Experiment Configuring a Device Assigning a Compiled Circuit File 94 The RCO circuit file area of the OpenWorkbench main window allows users to configure each device in the system by selecting a compiled circuit file designed for use with OpenEx or other TDT applications The System 3 real time processing modules are
71. complex tasks Filtering signal input and signal output can easily be distributed between DSPs simply re routing the signals to different DSPs Distributing data storage however requires splitting chunks of channels from a multi channel data stream for processing on separate DSPs Store Pooling simplifies this process and ensures that all the channels are stored as a single Data Store in the Data Tank In this tutorial you will 1 Create an OpenEx project 2 Design a processing chain to utilize store pooling and generate a compiled circuit file rcx format 3 Build the OpenWorkbench experiment 4 Visualize and store data using OpenEx The project in this tutorial will acquire and store 32 channels of simulated data and display the acquired data streams in real time Storage will be divided across two separate DSP processors Keep an eye out for key OpenEx concepts These concepts are extremely important when using OpenEx The Device This tutorial requires the use of a high performance device such as an RXn or RZn processor The OpenEx Applications In this tutorial you will be building the project from the ground up To design the processing chain that will implement store pooling you will use RPvdsEx To design the experiment and to handle communication between the OpenEx environment and the hardware you ll need OpenWorkbench 33 OpenEx User s Guide Creating the Project B Double click the 2 Double click th
72. created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Plots and Graphs About Plots and Graphs OpenController plots and graphs are used to visualize data in real time Plots and graphs differ from other controls in that the Source Target must be an OpenWorkbench Store Plots and graphs can be used in conjunction with controls that modify parameters so that changes in the data that might result from modifying a parameter such as a filter or threshold settings can be viewed with out delays There are four standard types of plots and graphs available in OpenController Scope Pile Chart Scrolling and Feature Scope and Pile Plots The Scope Pile plot acts like a triggered oscilloscope When an event such as a set time trigger or epoch event occurs the waveform data is displayed in the graph If the waveform is small 100 points the values can be plotted on top of each other pile so that a quick comparison can be done The user can set the depth of the pile For very large waveforms 2100 points setting the pile depth to one displays a single continuous waveform Chart Plot The Chart plot displays time stamped values The data streams across the graph either continuously or synced to an external event The chart plot is excellent for viewing the distribution 135 OpenEx User s Guide 136 of time stamped events such as w
73. delay after OpenEx is put into Idle or Standby mode before the zBusA trigger is turned off For example if zTrgA Off is set to 200 then after clicking Idle or Standby OpenEx will wait 200 ms before turning off the zBusA trigger Circuit Halt Specifies a time in milliseconds to delay between turning off the zBusA trigger and halting the circuit For example if the zTrgA Off delay is 200 ms and the Circuit Halt delay is 600 ms then after clicking Idle or Standby OpenEx will wait 200 ms before turning off the zBusA trigger and after that another 600 ms will pass before the circuit is halted 107 OpenEx User s Guide 108 Sweep Loop These settings are available from the OpenWorkbench Setup menu Sweep Loop X v Enabled Count 1 1 For lots Period 1000 ms 0 Handshake Cancel Stop When Done zTrgB Action on Done None gons The settings under Sweep Loop Issue Trigger can only be used if sweep control Enable Button circuit constructs are included in the compiled circuit file specified for each device that will use the sweep loop A sweep loop controls stimulus presentation and or acquisition The Sweep Loop settings allow the user to control aspects of the sweep as part of a protocol The setting under Sweep Loop can only be used if sweep control circuit constructs are included in the compiled circuit file specified for each device that will use the sweep loop An Ope
74. desired time span This might be set to the length of a stimulus for example In the Time Span box the time span can be fixed by the user or left OpenScope Reference set to 0 to respect the TRef duration If the epoch is a stimulus this will allow you to see how waveform times are distributed from the start of the stimulus In the Bin Width box enter the bin width The bin width should relate to the distribution pattern of the time stamped signals For a PSTH this might mean that the bin width should be a couple of milliseconds for patterns of evoked potentials it could be much larger Click OK The histogram plot is configured for viewing a single channel The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse When you animate or track data the plot will look similar to this After a single channel histogram plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for multi channel viewing To modify a histogram plot to view multiple channels of data 1 2 3 4 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter 0 in the Source Channel box to ensure that all channels are available for viewing Select the Multi View Enabled check box In the Num Views box enter the total number of views required to see all available channels of data in the multi view This number will typically be the number of channels of data acquired By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Enter the n
75. dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target 7 Ifthe source target is a Store with multiple channels enter the channel number in the Target Channel box 8 Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point in the Precision box 9 Click OK A basic value watch is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar About Status Indicators Status indicators can be used to indicate when the level of a signal is greater than a certain value These indicators flash when the value change exceeds an On Off threshold set by the user Similar to a gauge the status indicator allows users to identify a potentially important issue For example the indicator can be set to flash if the processing power of the system exceeds a certain level There are two types of indicators the Led Indicator and the Led Caption 4 Biti i Check Led Indicator Led Caption The led indicator resembles a typical round LED light with a text caption to the side With a led caption the caption text is part of the flashing display Creating a Led Indicator To quickly create a led indicator 1 Click the Controls menu point to Status Indicators and click Led Indicator The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control
76. display all channels Set to a valid channel number to display a single channel of data Source Name X Axis Define the Event ID for the X Axis of the plot Click Bl to display a list of available event IDs Cloud Points Set the minimum number of cloud points to display The maximum number of cloud points will be twice the value set The plot will refresh when the maximum number is reached Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When multi view is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Data Source Parameter Group Shared Data Source Parameters Source Name Define the Event ID Store Name for the plot Click Bl to display a list of available event IDs Source Channel Set to 0 to display all channels Set to a valid channel number to display a single channel of data Sorting Code Set to 0 if a sort parameter has not been defined or will not be used Set to a valid sort number to display a single sort Enabled Clear the check box to disable the data definition for the plot XY Plot Data Source Parameters Source Name Y Axis Define the
77. format such as float integer or double nSize number of samples per acquired event Fs sampling frequency and the time stamp value of the first event OpenScope Reference The Toolbar and Menus The OpenScope Toolbar The toolbar provides buttons for the most common commands ef a e E e e je New Opens a new OpenScope file Open Opens an existing OpenScope file Save Saves the current OpenScope file Cut Cuts the selected plot or plots Copy Copies the selected plot or plots Paste Pastes the most recently cut or copied plot or plots Paste New Type Pastes a new plot type from the most recently cut or copied plot About Displays version and copyright information for OpenScope OpenScope File Menu Some Items on the OpenScope File menu are not available when running in OpenProject Note To save changes to a file that is part of an OpenEx project save the project New Open Save Save As Data Source Recently Used Files Exit Opens a new OpenScope file Opens the Open dialog box so that an existing OpenScope file can be opened Saves the current OpenScope file with the current name If the file has not previously been saved the Save As dialog box opens Opens the Save As dialog box so that the OpenScope file can be saved with a new name Opens the Tank Select dialog box This Tank Select dialog box is similar to the Tank Select window and allows the user to select data add or remove
78. grid area 4 Rep Rem N FT 268 3 Right click cell C5 to open the Select Target dialog box 4 Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target for the data values that will be entered in column C 163 OpenEx User s Guide select Target Server tocal ae Target RP2t1 dToneFreq Scalars A aEA dTicker HPFreq LPFreq MonChan MonGain sEA sPD sTick sTicker sWave tTicker 2CycUse zSwCount Suena zl ses Server 5 Click OK 6 Click cell C6 and enter the desired data value for the target selected in cell C5 Note values in the Data Table are displayed with a precision of 1 However the actual value is retained For example a value of 0 0001 is displayed as 0 0 but 1 0001 will be passed to the target 7 To move to cell C7 press the DOWN ARROW key 8 Enter the remaining data values in the subsequent cells in column C 9 Enter the desired number of repetitions for each value in the corresponding cell in column A RP2 1 dToneFreq 100 0 200 0 400 0 800 0 1600 0 A basic data table control is created The user can add additional targets in subsequent columns By default the Ordering Scheme is manual and the user controls the order in which table entries are utilized by click
79. in the Enter the object names to select field Click Check Names verify spelling then click OK Make sure the group names Administrators Everyone and tankuser are all present and all have Local and remote access permission If any group names are missing click Add to enter the group name as before Turn off the windows firewall From the Control Panel click Windows Firewall and select Off From the Control panel click Administrative Tools then Component Services Expand Component Services Computers My Computer DCOM Config you can click No if you are asked to record a registry value at this point Right click TTankEng and select Properties On the Identity tab make sure that The Interactive User is the account selected to run this application 10 Reboot the server computer TTank Reference Client computer 1 To test the communication link attempt to ping the server computer from the client computer From a DOS command prompt on the client computer type ping and then the server computer name Distribute the user name tankuser and password tttuser to the client computer by adding a registry entry in the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software TDT TTank EnumSevers From the Start Menu click Run type regedit and click OK b Expand HKEY_LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE TDT TTank Right click on the EnumServers folder and select New String Value c Enter the server name for Value Name and enter the username an
80. index 1 The logical number of a hardware device The zBUSmon application shows the logical number of all programmable devices in the workstation Multiple devices of the same type such as two RP2s must have different index values Devices of different types can have the same index value 2 A number assigned to an RPvdsEx component within a circuit that indicates its position in the processing chain that is the order in which components will be executed master polling rate the rate at which OpenWorkbench polls devices for new data A high polling rate means that data is read more rapidly However a high polling rate decreases system efficiency P parameter tag a specialized helper component within a circuit that allows users to modify parameter values through OpenEx or other software control By utilizing these tags users can control the experiment in real time plot decimated data a form of decimation where only the maximum and minimum values are stored for each chunk of data e g 64 samples Data in this format allows users to visualize the maximum noise floor and spike activity of an incoming signal however it is nota true Glossary representation of the acquired signal It is used to get an approximation for real time plotting without requiring the transfer of a large amount of data Preview an OpenWorkbench protocol mode in which data is saved to a temporary block in the tank This mode allows the user to view data in OpenC
81. indexsoe lt sSweep gt Data i SE tSweep pee SO pee es SimpCount SerStore DReset 73 ORS 0 Size 1000 r Enable 1 Reset 3 PO Rt 0 Ee amp gt Data 1 7 0 SU put QUE ee CEA N Frequency 3 9 SerStore dSweep b Size 1000 r 9WrEnab 1 N Index 0 gt Data d TE dFreq In this circuit Sweep is the primary Store It includes an oxList circuit header and buffers SerStore for storing its data dSweep and time stamps tSweep The sync parameter sSweep is also necessary for the data list Freq is the secondary Store It only requires a buffer for the data The data is called dFreq here for consistency but any name could be used No circuit header time stamps or sync tag are required for the secondary Store The essential part is that the values of Freq are stored at exactly the same time as the values of Sweep All of the SerStores have the SwFire hop connected to their write enable port So every time a sweep fires each buffer will store a single value Simply add dFreq as a secondary tag of Sweep in the OpenWorkbench Stores settings 331 OpenEx User s Guide Instantaneous Rate Construct About Instantaneous Spike Rates 1 8 0 1 InstRate lt sa 1 CIE The InstRate component is particularly useful for OpenEx users acquiring SE extracellular spike data SorMatch 0 The InstRate continuously measures the spike activity from an electrode DFcFact 0 2
82. label X Axis Units Factor Define a multiplication factor to convert x axis units to valid value for units label X Axis Offset Define the starting value for the x axis 191 OpenEx User s Guide Y Axis Setup Parameter Group Show Y Labels Select the check box to display a unit label for the y axis Clear the check box to hide the y axis label Y Axis Units Set name for units that will appear as part of the plot label Y Axis Units Factor Define a multiplication factor to convert y axis units to valid value for units label Appearance Parameter Group 192 7 Segment Display Appearance Parameters LED Color Select a color for the segments of the numeric display from a color palette Background Color Select a color for the background of the numeric display from a color palette Show Off Segments Select the check box to display shadow images of segments that are not in use Show Off Segments check box selected Show Off Segments check box cleared Input Box Appearance Parameters Alignment Select an alignment type for value and units text to determine the position of text within the control s display window Choices are Center Left and Right Font Color Select a color value and units text from a color palette Background Color Select a background color from a color palette Max Length Type a value to set the maximum number of characters that can be input Units Text Enter the unit s text to be added t
83. m Single Axis Multi Channel Viewing Channels in View g zi Hidden Cha m Color Mode By Channel By Sort Code Set To Users can change settings related to the time span and tracking of the window in the Data Monitor Setup To view data monitor settings for the plot click the Data Monitor button on the plot toolbar 88 OpenWorkbench Reference Data Monitor Setup Time Span Control Span Set the span sec of the plot window History Determine how much plot history will be stored for viewing purposes Note how the memory requirements change as these settings are adjusted Tracking Mode Reference Epoc If a reference epoch is used the left side of the Plot Window will always coincide with the start of the reference epoch Time Axis Overlap Set the amount of the time axis that is repeated when the plot rolls over For example if the span is 10 seconds and Time Axis Overlap is set to 50 the plot will show seconds 0 10 5 15 etc Time Display Mode Set the display units of the time axis More Settings Press Shift Ctrl and double click the dialog box to display additional settings for the plot appearance such as background color and labels 89 OpenEx User s Guide OpenWorkbench Preferences 90 This dialog box is available from the File menu Workbench Preferences xi Reset hardware on launch Default verbose messaging Synchronize sampli
84. macros are compatible with TDT s single Store nChan 4 ZZ a processor devices The Block_Store_MC macro is supported only THgger Rising Edge PM MER devices such as the RX5 and Store Bick 4Ch 100Floats 24414 1Hz Uses Block Store macros are used to store snippet data but do not include any spike detection or sorting Description Block Store macros store snippets in relation to a trigger giving the user the option to shift storage in relation to the trigger They will accept floating or fixed point data for block storage at a specified sample rate The number of points saved block width can also be set by the user Circuit Design Reference Spike Store macros R The Spike Store 1 4Ch macro is compatible Spike Store MC with TDT s single processor devices Store nChan 4 z The Spike Store MC macro is supported only ea by multiprocessor devices such as the RX5 and Store Snip using FindSpike 32pts Uses Spike Store macros are used to store data snippets such as spike waveforms and incorporate several methods of threshold detection and spike sorting Description Spike snippet width and spike detection and sorting method Processor Type are defined in the setup properties Thresholding and sorting are controlled by the user through OpenController using the Scrolling Threshold and Snippet Sort controls The macro provides the necessary controller targets parameter tags depending on the Processor Type
85. means that data is read more rapidly However a high polling rate decreases system efficiency System 3 devices circumvent one of the main problems with Windows based control of hardware Windows does not give users precise control over when an event occurs The System 3 devices run in real time and circuits running on each device allow users to precisely control acquisition and presentation parameters To change the master polling rate click the indicator red dot and drag around the arc to the desired position The position value is displayed in the center of the knob Target bus loading Specify the percentage zBus capacity to be used for transferring data from the zBus to the PC for data storage The remaining capacity is reserved for other tasks including serving data to OpenController The default setting is 5096 and is recommended for projects that use OpenController If insufficient resources are available OpenController may respond slowly or lock up For projects that do not use OpenController such as streaming data to disk this value can be increased to provide more resources for data storage Action on data overload Specify the action taken whenever OpenWorkbench determines that the current data saving rate is overloading the system The default setting is None Suspend Plotting All storage plots in OpenWorkbench will be suspended for the duration of the overload Suspend Saving suspends data storage to the tank for the d
86. menu point to Switches and click Slide Switch 2 Click the grid to position the control 0n SS att 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box 4 Click the Browse button E in the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box 5 In the Target Select dialog box click the expand icon next to Devices click the expand icon next to Tutorial click the expand icon next to Scalars and click FiltHP OpenEx Tutorials Select Target Server Local Target Tutorial FitHP E Devices De 4 amp Tutorial El Scalars e M FiltLP nitScript8 6 Click OK to return to the properties dialog and enter or select the following settings Caption Text Amp HP Auto Caption Clear the check box Initialize Value 2 Initialize Mode Init On Load Position Labels 2 3 4 5 10 30 Position Values 2 3 4 5 10 30 x OOOO oea O E 4 C mewewe di Cancel 7 Click OK The slider switch is created The slider can now be used to change highpass filter settings in real time during an experiment Next you ll create a slide switch for the lowpass filter setting 29 OpenEx User s Guide 30 To create the lowpass filter setting slider l 2 9 eon an Click the Controls menu point to Switches and click Slide Switch Click the grid to position the control Double click the control to display the properties dialog box Click the
87. name of their choice OpenController Reference Nomenclature for Controls gt The greater than sign is used with primary or alternate targets and sends a value to another control parameter setting lt The less than sign is used with source targets or control parameter settings and acquires a value from another controller parameter device Target A period separates the device or control from the variable it modifies For example deviceX Filter would modify the Filter parameter tag on trol T t ita deviceX controlX Target Channel would modify the Target Channel parameter setting in the Target parameter group for controIX The asterisk is a wild card designator that can be added to device names or parameters For example if a compiled circuit file is mirrored that is the same compiled circuit file is loaded onto multiple devices and the devices are named in standard form such as acq1 acq2 then the designation acq Filter would modify the Filter parameter tag on all Devices whose names begin with acq Linking Controls To link controls simply open the OpenWorkbench configuration file then Open OpenController and create each control in the control set as needed In the target box for the linked control enter a path or use the Select Target Dialog to browse to the desired setting for another control in the same control set Example Linking a Slider and a 7 Segment Display Typically a modifier and a visualization control
88. number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Data Table Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Caption Text Type caption text to display on the control The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Clear the check box to use a user defined caption Ordering Scheme Select an ordering scheme Choices are Manual Sequential Random and Sync Tag Manual ordering controlled by clicking row numbers Sequential if no rows are selected then all rows will be sent sequentially If rows are selected then selected rows will be sent sequentially Random if no rows are selected then all rows will be sent randomly If rows are selected then selected rows will be sent randomly until all selected rows and repeats are done Sync Tag the value of the synchronization target controls which row is sent For example if the sync tag equals one then the first data row row six will be sent Synchronization Type Select a synchronization type Choices are None On Tag Change and On Tag True None no synchronization rows are sent one after another till done On Tag Change the table will be synchronized with the synchronization target and values are sent whenever the synch
89. of condition construct This construct allows the user to define the condition period and the maximum number of conditions generated during the experimental block through protocol settings in OpenWorkbench The Enable and Reset lines are generated by the triggering construct The CdFire line Hop pulses for a single sample to start each condition and is generally sent to a stimulus or acquisition control construct The zCdPeriod parameter tag defines the period of the condition and the zCdCount parameter tag defines the number of conditions The condition count will be infinite when the count is set to 1 in OpenWorkbench The zCdNum parameter tag is an optional tag that points to the current condition number When zCdNum is used OpenWorkbench will display the value on the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Because there is no end checking the Stop When Done and Standby on Stop protocol settings can not be used with this construct Note The zCdPeriod and zCdCount parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Condition Control with End Checking End checking is also provided with Asynchronous Next Condition Control Nesting Control with End Tracking zCdPeriod 1 12 0 zCdCount i Uses Description Details PulseTrain2 gt nPer 25000 me st Run PLate 0 PCount 0 6 zCdNum 1 14 0
90. or cx files OpenProject organizes all project files in a single directory tree named at its root for the project Optionally local copies of circuit files are kept in a special RCOCircuits directory and applications that use and edit these files will by default navigate to this dedicated directory This makes keeping track of your associated RPvdsEx circuits a more reasonable task and allows you to customize the circuits running in one configuration without corrupting the circuit s operation in another configuration When applications are run under OpenProject their associated file load save functions are disabled and handled automatically by OpenProject Entire projects can be moved copied and renamed easily with the project management tools available in OpenProject 49 OpenEx User s Guide About the OpenProject Window The OpenProject Window is a tall narrow window that appears to the left of OpenEx applications when they are opened or run as part of a project The window displays icons for each application included in a project and allows the user to quickly navigate between applications The window display is divided into two areas The upper area displays icons for applications that are docked attached to the OpenProject window The lower area displays icons for applications that are floating not attached Docked Applications Area Floating Applications Area 50 EIE ixi OpenProject Using the OpenProject window
91. or RAI16PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires sorts and stores candidate spikes across multiple recording sites up to four channels Provides real time control of spike discrimination and sorting and includes automatic threshold detection and sorting Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects Extracellular SP0501 SP0501 wsp or StdProjects Extracellular S PM0501 SPM0501 wsp Standard Hardware RX5 5 5 DSP Pentusa Base Station and two RA16PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Sorts and acquires 32 channels of neural spike data LFPs are also stored for all channels Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects Extracellular SP0502 SP0502 wsp or StdProjects Extracellular S PM0502 SPM0502 wsp Standard Hardware RX5 5 5 DSP Pentusa Base Station and four RAI6PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Sorts and acquires 64 channels of neural spike data Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects Extracellular S PM0503 SPM0503 wsp Standard Hardware RX5 Pentusa Base Station and RA16PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires 16 channels of data and stores the values as 32 bit floating point numbers Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects Extracellular S PM0507 S PM0507 wsp Standard Hardware RZ5 BioAmp processor and two RA16PA Medusa PreAmps Overview Sorts and acquires 32 channels of neural spike data LFPs are also stored for all 32 channels 44 OpenEx Tutorials Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects Extracellular S PM0802 S PM0802 wsp Standard Hardware RZ2 BioAmp processor and a PZ2 pr
92. or byte 8 bit integer Dec Factor is the decimation factor If the data is reduced either through a Plot16dec or through changes in the time slice then a decimation factor other than one should be used HandShake indicates whether a software trigger will be used for the handshake The handshake is a communication procedure between the application and the compiled circuit file A flag is set high to indicate the data has been acquired The application acquires the data and time stamp and then resets the flag for the next stimulus Uses Description Details Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference If the handshake value is set to None OpenWorkbench polls for a change in the time stamp parameter tag and then stores the data when the time value changes Channels is the number of channels associated with the buffer The data buffer construct is used when storing a block of data points that are not continuously streaming Examples of data buffers include signal averages for evoked potentials and fixed duration blocks of acquired data such as one second worth of data after each stimulus Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used to acquire a data buffer must include this construct With a data buffer a waveform and associated time stamp are stored to the data tank Each time a block of data is acquired into the buffer the time stamp value should be latched so that it contains the time of t
93. pg 190 Sections pg 191 io Are Range 30 je Seale Maximum 100 Label Precision o 8 T 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 5 Click the m button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target dialog box 6 Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target 7 Ifthe source target is a Store with multiple channels enter the channel number in the Target Channel box 8 Inthe Scale Minimum box enter the minimum value for gauge values that will be displayed 9 Inthe Scale Maximum box enter the maximum value for gauge values that will be displayed 10 Click OK A basic linear gauge is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar 129 OpenEx User s Guide Creating a Logarithmic Gauge To quickly create a logarithmic gauge 1 Click the Controls menu point to Gauges and click Logarithmic Gauge The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dial
94. property name in the format ControlName PropertyName For example to write to the Value property of a value watch named Watch use gt Watch Value Default Control Target When the script control is used to communicate with other controls within the same OpenController file it can also use the default control target This is a subset of the control target using the default target value Some controls have default target values such as the value watch s Value property The default value comes into play if no value is specified For example gt Watch is equivalent to gt Watch Value The following table lists a description of extended functions 169 OpenEx User s Guide Prototype case insensitive Returns Clear Void Print String text Void Note If using the Legacy version of VBScript this method is Print String text Println String text Void Quit Void Sleep int msec Void Read String target Variant value 170 Description Clears the text from the Immediate tab Outputs the value of an expression to the Immediate tab Example Dim nVal sValn nVal 1 sVal Hello Print_ nVal 1 Print_ sVal amp World Output 2Hello World Outputs the value of an expression followed by a new line to the Immediate tab Example Dim nVal sValn nVal 1 sVal Hello PrintlIn nVal 1 PrintIn sVal amp World Output 2 Hello World Halts execution of the VB Script Susp
95. relationship between OpenEx clients and servers and further discussion of each role follows Local k Wl Local Networ System 3 C USB or GBit OpenController OpenWorkbench P Server un OpenScope Application Matlab Basic s TTank Delphi Labview Server OpenBrowser Tank Monitor Storage Files on CJ Clients OpenEx Client Server Diagram ge System 3 is the flexible hardware platform accessed through the OpenWorkbench application System 3 real time processors are programmed via compiled circuit files designed using TDT s RPvdsEx software and assigned loaded and run by the OpenWorkbench hardware server OpenWorkbench serves double duty as both a client application and a hardware server All communication with the System 3 hardware occurs through OpenWorkbench By working directly in OpenWorkbench the user can provide instructions about the experimental protocol to the hardware Client programs such as OpenController or applications developed with OpenDeveloper may also be used to request information about the hardware or pass instructions to the hardware through OpenWorkbench OpenEx User s Guide TTank is the database server and can store and provide data to many applications in real time during an experiment or offline for post hoc analysis of data OpenWorkbench provides acquired data and instructions about storage to TTank Data is stored in files on the computer where TTank is running Clien
96. second peak and the X axis is the voltage of the first peak the X axis and Y axis features can be selected from a drop down list in the Setup Properties dialog box By generating multiple feature plots each with different XY characteristics it is possible to differentiate several spike types This information can then be used to do offline or online spike sorting To quickly create a feature plot for a single channel of the selected data 1 Drag a data event from the Tank Select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens OpenScope Reference Select Plot Type Pile Histogram Cancel Raster Scroll LJ iG E iw EJ wee LJ Chart Activity Click Feature The feature plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the feature plot displayed Wil Setup Properties for Feature Plot xj C Sowce Name 77 Source Channel io Cloud Points 1000 ow Settings groups include Common pg 261 Data Source pg 263 Behavior pg 258 Multi View pg 256 Refresh Control pg 257 Scaling pg 257 X Axis Setup pg 258 Y Axis Setup pg 258 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 256 Filtering pg 256 Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Enter the desired channel number in the Source Cha
97. server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench Click the Eu button in the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target In the Scale Minimum box enter the minimum value for the knob In the Scale Maximum box enter the maximum value for the knob BO o 2s xcu Specify the desired precision in the Label Precision box 10 Click OK A basic knob is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Spike Discrimination and Sorting 150 About Spike Discrimination and Sorting With OpenController users can automatically set spike discrimination thresholds and sort spikes in real time The automated features of the Snippet Sort controls allow users to quickly assess unit activity across multiple channels without resorting to a tedious process of manually setting the threshold and then sorting spikes for each channel on a high channel count system Once the system has set the threshold and done spike sorting users can assess the quality of the process and manually modify the threshold and sort windows The Scrolling Threshold control implements control of the threshold level for discriminations and Snippet Sort implements time voltage window sorting OpenController Reference Creating a Scrolling Threshold C
98. show the sign Unchecked hide the sign Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point The precision value should be less than the Number Digits value to display the desired precision 211 OpenEx User s Guide 212 Knob Layout Parameters Offset X X offset of knob from the frame top left Offset Y X offset of knob from the frame top left Rotation Start Enter a value in degrees for the starting point of the rotation Rotation Max Enter a value in degrees for the ending point of the rotation Pos Display Visible Checked show the current value on the knob Unchecked do not show the current value on the knob Pos Display Unit Type the unit of the value controlled by the knob Units are displayed with the current value The Pos Display Visible check box must be selected Pos Display Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point for the current value Linear Gauge Layout Parameters Gauge Size Enter a value for the gauge size Auto Size must be cleared for the gauge size to be used Auto Size Checked gauge size is automatically changed with the frame size Unchecked gauge size is fixed even though the frame size is changed Gauge size should be set in the Gauge Size box Offset X Enter a value for the X offset of gauge from the frame right bottom Offset Y Enter a value for the Y offset of gauge from the frame right bottom Inner
99. software trigger will be used for the handshake See Type 1 Triggered Scalar page 317 and Type 2 Data Buffer page 318 for more information Using an Alias When the Store Alias name is used to call up data in client applications such as OpenBrowser and OpenScope the retrieved data will include the data for the Store by that name along with the data for any Stores for which it has been selected as the Store Alias This allows the user to call up data from several Stores such as data from multiple devices used in multi channel acquisition and look at it as if it were a single data Store The Store Alias feature enables users to access multiple Stores using a single Store name Caution Before assigning a Store Alias ensure that the data type such as integer or float is the same for both Stores Each Store can be assigned only one Store Alias In the Store Alias box the user can enter the name of an existing Store followed by a channel offset number to assign the Store as an alias for the current Store When the Store Alias name is used to call up data in client applications such as OpenBrowser and OpenScope the retrieved data will include the data for the Store by that name along with the data for any Stores for which it has been selected as the Store Alias This allows the user to call up data from several Stores such as data from multiple devices used in multi channel acquisition and look at it as if it were a single data Store Cau
100. span is set to 60 seconds this button will scroll back in 60 second chunks A Scroll back increments of span 10 Scroll forward increments of span 10 Scroll forward by plot window width Auto Scale Data Monitor Setup launched dialog Refresh e agak v Additional commands for scaling shifting or moving plots are available from a right click shortcut menu 87 OpenEx User s Guide Auto scale Auto Scale Scale the display so that it best fits in the available subplot area Scale up ree Scale Up Down Incrementally scales the display up or down No shift No Shift Removes any offset that was placed on the display in the Shift up subplot window mm Shift Up Down Shifts the display up or down in the subplot window Move up EIER Move Up Down Moves the subplot up or down in the Plot Window view Make larger Make Makes the available subplot area larger or smaller The other Make smaller larger smaller plots are resized accordingly Hide Hide UnHide Makes the available subplot area larger or smaller The other UnHide gt plots are resized accordingly Users can change the plot type modify the number of channels viewed and choose to color traces by channel or sort code in the Display Options dialog To modify the display options double click the desired sub plot Display Options for Snip r Plot Type Time Bar Time Signal Data Point Waveform Segment Histogram
101. stamp for the signal The position of the discriminator does not affect the position of the waveform in the buffer Because SortSpike and FindSpike use the peak of the signal as the center variation in signal amplitude do to the ambient background noise may shift the true peak of the waveform This jitter will cause minor variation in the time stamp of the signal and may affect the acquired signal since the position of the waveform is dependent on the peak signal The noisier the signal the greater the effect The time stamp and position for of the waveform for SortSpike2 is dependent on the time of the threshold crossing for the signal This has two effects on the positioning of the signal in the buffer First signals that differ in shape may have their peaks at different positions in the buffer If it is important for the time stamp to be relative to the peak of a waveform then it may be necessary to calculate a new time stamp offline Second changing the position of the discriminator will affect the positioning of a signal in the buffer For example setting the signal to noise of the threshold relatively low 1 2 1 shifts the time stamp to an earlier point since the signal crosses the threshold earlier and shifts the peak to a later point As the position of the threshold becomes closer to that of the peak the time stamp for SortSpike and SortSpike2 become more similar In addition SortSpike2 allows users to set a bimodal threshold This al
102. stopped Fixed in version 1 5 In OpenScope the XY plot does not display the first plotted point Fixed in version 1 5 OpenWorkbench will always use the sample rate defined in the compiled circuit file rco even if the Use sample rate from RCO file box on the Devices property sheet is cleared Each time you need to run a circuit at a different sample rate change the sample rate in the circuit file rpd then recompile the RPvdsEx file rco Fixed in version 1 5 Currently only one SigGen Engine control can be used in each instance of OpenController A second one cannot be added even if the existing control is deleted If a SigGen Engine control is deleted restart OpenController before attempting to add a new SigGen Engine control Restarting should allow you to add a single SigGen Engine control The limitation of one SigGen Engine control per Controller remains but the anomaly associated with adding and deleting the controls has been fixed in version 1 5 If a tank name contains spaces or if the directory path to a tank contains spaces then the tank may be named improperly appear in a different location or fail to function correctly Fixed in version 1 5 349 OpenEx User s Guide 350 Version 1 0 Error message Cannot Close there are active COM clients Must close all instances of Open Controller is displayed when closing OpenWorkbench In this version OpenWorkbench launches applications correctly but can not close a
103. text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Select the check box to display an automatically generated caption for the plot The auto caption is generated using the Store name Clear the check box to hide the auto caption The auto caption should be hidden if no caption is desired or if a user defined caption should be used Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets 205 OpenEx User s Guide 206 Channel Selector Visible Select the check box to display a channel selector as part of the control The channel selector is a slider that can be used to control which channel of data is used to animate a single view plot By default the channel selector options include channels one through eight The user can modify the number of channels or offset value in the Channel Selector parameter group Pile Depth Set the number of traces that will be displayed Set the Pile Depth to 1 to create a scope plot Multi View Enabled Select the check box to view each channel or sort code of data in an individual plot Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be s
104. the OpenController settings in window containing this control are set to Stop Choice are None Idle and Standby Delay to run secs Enter a value in seconds to delay implementation of Mode on Run setting Delay to stop secs Enter a value in seconds to delay implementation of Mode on Stop setting OpenController Reference Momentary Button Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Primary Target Select or type the name of the primary destination target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The target should generally be the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form dddd parTag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together and the target is the source the target name will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift When the target is the destination the target name will be a lesser than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname
105. the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Note The zCdCount and zCdDone parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Basic Nesting Control zSwPeriod 1 15 0 E PulseTrain2s amp SwFie p nPer 25000 1 13 0 nPulse 8 zCdPeriod E DEnable PEnab Yes PulseTrain2 p gt ORst Run zCdCoun Paot PCount 0 6 4 zSwNum Enable 3 zSwCount 4 nPer 25000 nPulse 8 x Sweep Nested in Condition Uses Used in circuits where both conditions and sweeps are used for either stimulation or acquisition and the count and period for both sweeps and conditions are known Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will use a sweep nested in a condition must include some form of nesting control construct Description This is the simplest form of nesting Each condition automatically fires the sweeps The user must make sure the length of the sweeps does not exceed the length of each condition period When this construct is used OpenWorkbench protocol settings can be used to define the sweep and condition period and the maximum number of sweeps and conditions Details The zCdPeriod parameter tag defines the period of the condition and the zCdCount parameter tag defines the number of conditions The zSwPeriod parameter tag defi
106. the Edit menu and click Insert Rows Deleting Rows To delete selected rows click the Edit menu and click Delete Rows To select a row click the row number Use the SHIFT or CTRL keys to select multiple rows Controlling the Data View Area After a tank block number and event have been associated with the row the user can click on Refresh to view the data in the View area Configuring Data for Export The Exp Config buttons for each row provide easy access to the Data Format Export Configuration dialog box After a row has been configured for export the text on the Exp Config button changes from gray to blue When exporting more than one row use the Multi File check box to determine if each row of data will be exported to a separate file or if all data will be exported to one single file Using Shorthand Characters for Data Selection A series of shorthand characters can be used to speed up data selection in the Data Selection Table Indicates that the value in the cell above will be used for this cell For A example placing a caret in a cell in the TANK column will cause the row to acquire data from the tank named in the row above 272 OpenBrowser Reference Ay Used with BLOCK CHAN and SORT cells It will increment the BLOCK CHAN or SORT number by one relative to the cell above it Used with TIME CHAN SORT and epoch cells Channels that are greater gt than the cell value are viewed and exported For example gt
107. the OpenProject located below the adjustable pane divider can be used to launch and navigate between applications that are not attached to the OpenProject window To launch a floating application 1 Right click the Floating Applications area of the OpenProject window 2 Pointto Launch in Float Mode and click the application to launch Changing Launch Settings 54 After a project has been created the project description and launch settings can be modified by re opening the OpenProject Configuration window To open the OpenProject Configuration window 1 Right click the Applications area of the OpenProject window 2 Click Config Project Or Click Config Project on the OpenProject menu OpenProject Reference Stop Making Local Copies of RPvdsEx Files By default OpenProject stores a copy of all files associated with a project including RPvdsEx circuit files in the project folder To stop making local copies of RPvdsEx circuit files 1 Right click the Applications area of the OpenProject window 2 Click Preferences 3 Onthe Project RCO Files tab of the OpenProject Preferences dialog box clear the Keep local copy of RPvds circuits check box To make the current setting the default for all new projects gt Select the Save As Default check box in the OpenProject Preferences dialog box Working with Data Tanks in OpenProject When working in OpenEx all data is stored to an OpenEx data tank Each tank may contai
108. the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The target should generally be the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form dddd parTag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together and the target is the source the target name will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift OpenController Reference When the target is the destination the target name will be a lesser than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the input box Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Initialize Value Type a value to be used as an initi
109. the Setup Properties dialog box Enter the total number of channels of data to be viewed in the Num Views box By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 To display multiple channels beginning with another channel modify the index offset To modify the index offset value click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View In the View Index Offset box enter the number of channels to offset 237 OpenEx User s Guide lll Setup Properties for Pile Plot x I TESTIS CB HIE HB Multi View Y Multi View Enabled Num Views NumColumns 2 View Index Offset 5 Show View Index on For example to begin viewing from channel 6 enter an Index Offset value of 5 The plot will begin with channel 6 and display the next sequential channels to equal the number entered in the Num Views box Click OK When you animate or track data the plot will look similar to this Creating Scroll Plots 238 Scroll plots provide a useful means of looking at continuous data Data is presented in segments called scrolls Looking at one scroll after another gives an effect similar to an oscilloscope or EKG In a scroll plot the Y axis is voltage and the X axis is the record size To quickly create a scroll plot for single channel of the selected data Drag a data event from the Tank Select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens OpenScope Reference Select Plot Type Cancel
110. the available choices to determine how often they will be prompted to begin a new data tank for the project When the Auto Name Tank check box is selected the prompt will include a suggested name that consists of the project name an incremented number code and a date This helps to ensure that tanks will be kept at a manageable size and may be used to help keep experiment data organized daily by recording session or by OpenProject session Save as Default should also be selected to retain the setting for the next OpenProject session 59 OpenEx User s Guide 60 Circuit Design Reference In the Circuit Design reference you will find Information about RPvdsEx macros and basic circuit design for OpenEx 61 OpenEx User s Guide 62 Circuit Design Reference Circuit Design Overview Circuits can be modified or designed from within OpenProject by adding an instance of the RPvdsEx application RPvdsEx is the latest version of TDT s RP Visual Design Studio RPvdsEx allows the user to modify existing RPD RPX or RCX files and create compiled circuit files for use with OpenWorkbench Note All files created or modified in RPvdsEx are saved in the RCX format and might not be compatible with earlier versions of RPvdsEx Before modifying a circuit file be sure to work through the Getting Started with OpenEx Tutorial found on page 9 and review Tips for Modifying Circuits found on page 339 OpenEx Circuit Design TDT s System
111. the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form dddd parTag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together and the target is the source the target name will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift When the target is the destination the target name will be a lesser than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g lt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Initialize Value Type a value to be used as an initial value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from t
112. the toolbar to run the control The Scrolling Threshold control is animated with scrolling waveform data and a threshold marker green line is displayed for spike discrimination To set the threshold automatically e Right click the plot and click Auto Threshold or Auto Threshold All on the shortcut menu 154 OpenController Reference PDec 1 Refresh Auto Threshold Auto Threshold All Auto Threshold sets a threshold for the current channel Auto Threshold All sets a threshold for all channels with the target defined in the control s properties The auto thresholding feature acquires information about the signal to noise ratio of the signal and based on the size of the signal determines an optimal threshold that will detects any signal activity above the noise floor If the spike size is large then the threshold will be set higher than if the spike size is small A fixed signal to noise level can be set by modifying the control s Behavior parameters The direction of the threshold discriminator depends on the specified Threshold Target Typically the target is the Threshold parameter of a SortSpike2 component and by default the threshold is unidirectional and will be adjusted based on values A bidirectional threshold can be specified by modifying the Use Sign parameter of the SortSpike2 component When needed the threshold can also be set or adjusted manually See Using the Scrolling Threshold and Snippe
113. time span can be shortened or expanded by pressing and holding the SHIFT key and dragging right or left with the mouse Select the Multi View Enabled check box In the Num Views box enter the total number of views required to see all available channels of data in the multi view This number will typically be the number of channels of data acquired By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Enter the number of columns to display in the Num Columns box Leave this value set to 1 to see one channel per row Click OK OpenScope Reference When you animate or track data the plot will look like similar to this After a multi channel chart plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for viewing a range of channels To modify a chart plot to view a range of channels l 2 3 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter the total number of channels of data to be viewed in the Num Views box By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 To display multiple channels beginning with another channel modify the index offset To modify the index offset value click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View In the View Index Offset box enter the number of channels to offset For example to begin viewing from channel 5 enter an Index Offset value of 4 The plot will begin with channel 5 and display the next sequential channels to equal the numbe
114. to view multiple channels of data 1 2 3 6 7 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter 0 in the Source Channel box to ensure that all channels are available for viewing In the Raster Rows box enter the desired number of rows to be displayed Enter 1 to view one row per channel for a clear comparison across channels for a single event value Select the Multi View Enabled check box In the Num Views box enter the total number of views required to see all available channels of data in the multi view This number will typically be the number of channels of data acquired By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Enter the number of columns to display in the Num Columns box Click OK To modify a raster plot to view a range of channels l 2 3 7 Double click the plot to display the Setup Plot dialog box Enter the total number of channels of data to be viewed in the Num Views box By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 To display multiple channels beginning with another channel modify the index offset To modify the index offset value click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View In the View Index Offset box enter the number of channels to offset For example to begin viewing from channel 5 enter an Index Offset value of 4 The plot will begin with channel 5 and display the next sequential channels to equal the number entere
115. used OpenWorkbench protocol settings can be used to determine what action occurs when the sweep and condition loops are done Using the Standby on Stop check box and the Stop When Done check box for the condition loop the protocol can be set to Idle Standby on Stop check boxed cleared or Standby Standby on Stop check box selected mode when the zCdDone parameter tag value is set high The zCdPeriod parameter tag defines the period of the condition and the zCdCount parameter tag defines the number of conditions The zCdCount parameter feeds into the iCompare component within the condition loop which counts the number of pulses generated When this reaches the iCompare K value the output value is set high and this flags OpenWorkbench through the zCdDone parameter tag to indicate that the last condition has been reached The zSwPeriod parameter tag defines the period of the sweep and the zSwCount parameter tag defines the number of sweeps 313 OpenEx User s Guide The NextCond line can be connected to the final iCompare to automatically increment on the end of each set of sweeps The NextCond line could also be connected to a secondary trigger construct to allow manual or computer control of the next condition A trigger ZTrgB can also be generated and controlled by the user via the zSwDone parameter tag Control of the trigger is based on settings found under ZTrgB Action on Done The zSwNum and zCdNum parameter tags are option
116. used when the script directs the output to other controls To run a script click the Run button on the title tool bar To stop click the Stop button on the title tool bar Both the compilation and runtime errors are reported The location of the error is highlighted during runtime Error free VBScript will run automatically whenever the OpenController file is set to run Debugging VBScriptEx control scripts The Interactive mode triggers the script debugger and provides some useful debugging tools Debugging can be performed using the debugging tool buttons the associated accelerate keys or by right clicking anywhere on the IDE and selecting the corresponding command from the dialog pop up menu S Browse Object Allows you to browse the library s object list including methods and their parameters return types gt Start Resume F5 runs the script to completion or resumes a paused script ll Pause Esc pauses the execution of the script End stops the execution of the script Eu Toggle Break F9 inserts or removes a breakpoint on the line where the cursor is positioned If a breakpoint is inserted on a non executable statement the debugger will step to the first available executable statement after the breakpoint gd Evaluate Expression Shift F9 Shows the value of the cursors currently selected expression in the Immediate messages dialog window D Show Current Statement Returns the cursor to the currently highlight
117. used when they are not registered Users can not register or unregister tanks without administrator privileges When deleting blocks from a tank in OpenBrowser the deletions are not saved Unable to open tank Tank does not exist error message is displayed when attempting to open a tank with a name 32 characters long or longer or a path name 100 characters long or longer When trying to delete a large block in OpenScope using the Tank Select window a server busy error will appear OpenEx 2 0 uses a new data tank structure that is not supported by Windows 2000 or earlier operating systems The new version allows users to manage tanks and individual block using Windows Explorer If OpenWorkbench detects more than one Store by the same name a duplicate store error multiple stores have the same name is reported and OpenWorkbench will not run until the duplicate store s name has been changed or the duplicate store has been disabled See tech note 0271 Known Anomalies Resolved Anomalies Version 1 57 After WindowsXP Service Pack 2 or Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 is installed OpenContoller can no longer access OpenWorkbench New security settings included in these service packs affect the performance of client server applications See Tech Note 0134 Windows Service Pack 2 or Tech Note 0175 Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 for step by step instructions for using this service pack with OpenEx Fixed in version
118. waveforms or data being acquired by the device They give Workbench and TTankEngine information about the waveforms and what kind of data to expect at what rate in what form and so forth If there is a mismatch between the attributes of the signal specified by the header and the actual data being transferred to the PC then OpenWorkbench will generate timing errors So it is important to use the correct parameters in these headers Circuit headers are a special type of processing component In RPvdsEx they are grouped in the OpenEx Headers components category There are five data generating constructs that can be used with OpenEx and each one requires a different type of circuit header The five data constructs used in OpenEx are Type 1 Triggered Scalar uses the oxScalar circuit header Type 2 Data Buffer uses the oxBuffer circuit header Type 3 Data List uses the oxList circuit header Type 4 Signal Snippet with and without spike sorting uses the oxSnippet circuit header Type 5 Continuous Waveform uses the oxStream circuit header The circuit headers for each data type contain different pieces of information However all of them include a tag root The tag root is a name that will be used by OpenWorkbench to access the data time stamps and other information associated with the data construct All of the data constructs require a parameter tag to access the data To do this OpenWorkbench will look for a parameter tag with th
119. will be applied None The color set in the Trace Color value box will be applied to all traces By Channel The color of traces will be automatically assigned by channel By Sortcode The color of traces will be automatically assigned by sortcode Trace or Dot Color Select the trace color from a color palette This selected color is only used if Category Coloring is set to None Plot Border Color Select the plot border color from a color palette Foreground Color Select the foreground color from a color palette Background Color Select the trace color from a color palette Font Color Select the font color from a color palette MultiChannel Grid Color Select the multi channel grid color from a color palette Filtering Parameter Group Filter On Select the check box to enable an FIR filter algorithm using FIR parameters provided in CoefBO B4 Clear the check box to disable the filter CoefB0 Type a coefficient CoefB1 Type a coefficient CoefB2 Type a coefficient CoefB3 Type a coefficient CoefB4 Type a coefficient Multi View Parameter Group Multi View Enabled Select the check box to view each channel or sort code of data in an individual plot 256 OpenScope Reference Num Views Set the number of channels or sorts to view in a multi view plot If data contains more than 16 channels or sorts the value must be increased to show all data Num Columns Set the number of columns in which multi view plots are arra
120. without the channel number for example aEa To set the tag for only one channel expand the hierarchy to display the available channels and select the tag for the desired channel for example aEA 1 Note To set the parameter for multiple devices running the same circuit modify the target name by removing the device component for example aEa NOT Ampl aEa 5 Click OK Note If the stream is stored with a different resolution than 32 bit it will usually be scaled Be sure to set the Threshold Scaling Factor located in Setup Properties Parameter Group Behavior to the inverse of the scale factor used by the component performing the data compression For example if the scale factor SF of a PlotDec16 component is set to 1e4 006 be sure to set the Threshold Scaling Factor to 1e 006 A scrolling threshold control is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Creating a Snippet Sort Control To quickly create a snippet sort control OpenController Reference Note Before creating the control start OpenWorkbench and open a configuration file which includes a Store for spike sorting The Snippet Sort control can only be used if a SortSpike SortSpike2 or SortSpike3 component is included in the data generating construct See Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting page 325 for more information In the s
121. 15 0 ButCoef gt Coef ButCoef Coef Gain 1 p 91 Gain 1 A Delay Fc 300 Fc 3000 HPFreq 3 ONBig 1 LPFreq NBig 1 B Type HP Enab Yes The acquired signal is filtered and a signal line is connected to the Stores input 1 11 0 1 12 0 b y gt TTLDelay2 Schmitt2 AqEnable b d ON1 1 f r nHi 10000 1 13 0 zAqDelay 5 N2 0 nEnab 1 EdgeDetect EE M BEdge Rising Consti nWave A timing circuit controls the duration and calculates the number of points This circuit differs from the simple timing circuit It contains an AqFire which is used by the handshaking protocol It also has the n prefix parameter tag and Npts for determining the number of points in the buffer An EdgeDetect triggers the end of the acquisition pulse 1 17 0 5 SerStore _ gt HSize 1e 006 r 9Rst 0 r 9WrEnab 1 Index 0 4 p Data y N AqEnable dWave 1 The store component is a SerStore Signal data is acquired when the AqEnable line from the acquisition timing circuit is set high This is high for the duration of the acquisition The size of the Store is indicated by the Npts line and is determined by the acquisition timing circuit above The Reset line resets the buffer at the start of a new block of acquisition 1 21 0 EI a EI RSHipHop ba SymAct 1 19 0 29Set 0 Src Soft2 Fe R0 og
122. 3 OpenEx User s Guide Using Epochs with OpenScope 224 OpenScope uses epochs to organize and display data Epochs are stored events that are associated with a block s timeline Epochs serve two main functions e To display data in groups so that each group is associated with a particular event e To change or refresh the plot in response to changes in an event Plot settings related to epoch events can be found in the Refresh Control and Behavior parameter groups in a plot s property settings dialog box Refresh Control All plots have refresh control settings that allow the user to define a refresh epoch When a refresh epoch event is defined the plot will be refreshed based on the epoch value according to the settings in the Refresh Control parameter group To learn more about the settings see Refresh Control parameter group settings page 257 Behavior Histogram and raster plots use a time reference epoch event to sort and display data and to determine what data is plotted according to settings in the Behavior parameter group To learn more about the settings see Histogram Behavior parameter group settings or Raster Behavior parameter group settings page 259 The Refresh Control and Behavior settings can be used independently or in combination Because different epoch events can be selected for the Refresh Control and Behavior the data can be refreshed by a value that is independent of the time reference epoch This behavior allows
123. 3 Behavior pg 258 Multi View pg 256 Refresh Control pg 257 Scaling pg 257 X Axis Setup pg 258 Y Axis Setup pg 258 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 256 251 OpenEx User s Guide 252 Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Enter the desired channel number in the Source Channel box Channel information is available in the corresponding OpenWorkbench file Enter the desired Time Span in seconds to be displayed on the X axis Click OK The chart plot is configured for viewing a single channel The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse When you animate or track data the plot will look like this To quickly expand the X axis scale and view a snippet waveform hold down the SHIFT key point to the snippet and drag to the right After a single channel chart plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for multi channel viewing To modify a chart plot to view multiple channels of data 1 2 3 4 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter 0 in the Source Channel box to ensure that all channels are available for viewing Enter the desired Time Span in second to be displayed on the X axis Selecting a shorter time span will improve animation performance for multiple channels When viewing the chart the
124. 3 hardware is user programmable through the RPvdsEx circuit design applications Compiled circuit files compiled circuits either rco or rcx developed in RPvdsEx can be used in OpenWorkbench to generate stimuli acquire signals and control other hardware devices OpenEx circuits have two to three main subcomponents defined as circuit constructs e Control constructs that determine how a circuit behaves under OpenEx At a minimum a control construct contains a clock and typically includes control over timing and triggering More complex control constructs allow for control of stimulus generation and data acquisition The most reliable way to implement the necessary control elements is to include the CoreSweepControl macro in every circuit file designed for OpenEx Additional sweep based controls are provided by the StandardTimeControl macro e Data constructs that define the type of data and the way the data is stored in the tank TDT has defined five data constructs Each construct represents one of the three data types The most common of these have been implemented via the Data Saving macro set e User defined constructs Users can add additional circuitry to customize data acquisition and stimulus presentation OpenWorkbench relies on a rigid naming structure and standard circuit constructs or groupings of circuit components and parameter tags within the compiled circuit file to allow users to change parameter values from the PC an
125. 3 selects channel or sort values greater than 3 Used with TIME CHAN SORT and epoch cells Values that are less than the cell value are viewed and exported Used with TIME CHAN SORT and epoch cells Values in the named range are viewed and exported For example if a cell in the CHAN column contained the statement 3 10 then channels 3 through 10 would be viewed and exported In the example below data would be exported from tank nefw blocks 45 and 46 and all SPKE and SSPK events including all channels Note how that is only used once for the BLOCK cell for SPKE in row 7 If the BLOCK cell for the SSPK event in row 8 used a the data would have come from block 47 re Ge OpenBrowser Server Local File Edit View Help DH see Lux EXE Config Indem FEM F F M a ae Block 45 cec Retest Erce Retest Eco Retest Using Epochs as a Time Reference The Data Selection Table allows users to select an epoch to be used as a time reference Using a time reference epoch starts the time value at zero for each epoch and allows the time code information to be used to generate PSTH and other graphs in NeuroExplorer and other analysis applications 273 OpenEx User s Guide K OpenBrowser Server Local nl Export Config v Muti File To add a time reference 1 Se
126. 31 OpenEx User s Guide 232 Shortcut Menus The following context sensitive menus are available by right clicking the corresponding area of the Select Tank window TANK Shortcut Menu Browse for Tank Create New Tank Register Tank UnRegister tank Test Tank Reset Tank Show Full Path Refresh Tank List Show Legacy Tanks Find Legacy Tanks BLOCK Shortcut Menu Browse for folder Opens the Select Tank file dialog box so that a tank can be added Adds the selected tank to the Windows Registry Removes the selected tank from the Windows Registry The tank can still be used on the local machine Tests the connection to the server and opens and closes the tank file Resets the selected tank file This option returns the tank file to a state in which data can be read from or written to the tank Toggles detail view on and off In details view the path to the tank is displayed Refreshes the Tank box display Displays registered legacy format tanks in the tank list Opens the Select Tank File dialog box and allows users to browse for tanks stored in the legacy format by showing files with a tbk file extension There is no shortcut menu for the BLOCK area EVENT Shortcut Menu Refresh Details Updates the EVENT area to reflect recent changes to Tank block or event information Toggles Details view on or off Details view includes event ID Store name event type such as stream snip or strobe data
127. 7 OVerVIOW etapai tanini trennen 144 SIGOMS 5 enit iiic rest Cl iue s 148 Creating heen s SR 148 OVerVIOW ao raaa anie eE An A 148 spike sorting 362 choosing a spike component 71 ol ied erp EE EE a EUMS 325 creating snippet sort control 153 using snippet sort control 156 status indicators 133 stimulus control senseksa krenari 110 storage specification table 96 101 Stores configuring 96 sweep lOp rnini iaeia 108 switch button seeeeeeeeees 144 Greal aenieei n a 145 OVEIVIGW E E E AE 144 SWIICIIGS iioii pr a aE 144 system controls OpenWorkbench 84 system controls OpenScope 227 T tag initialization seesesssess 100 Tank Monitor sss 293 TANKS waz setae hess ET 83 formats 4 eid see sscetim tete ine aoe 83 registering onrat areatik ets 83 Selecting ut ca cea ett ate ten 83 103 selecting in OpenScope 227 tanks in OpenProject sss 55 Targets iue e rr RR Rat Rien 116 initialization esee 100 linking controls 182 183 selecting ssssssseseeees 123 Time Control Window 229 TIMING 22 2 iir deed ctn 106 110 Triggered Scalar ssesssss 80 TIQQUONING EEPE EE E E EE 106 108 Tank
128. 9 0 1 11 0 dd b d FindSpike SerStore nWidth 32 Size 640000 Thres1 Tau 1000 Rst 0 ThrLo 3 WrEnab 1 ThrHi 1000 Index 0 lt SFA 1 Rst 0 dFA 1 lt gt Data j RMS 2 0 9 Strobe 0 6 gt Data 1 13 0 1 15 0 4 FindSpike SerStore nWidth 32 Size 640000 Thres2 gt Tau 1000 Rst 0 ThrLo 3 WrEnab 1 x ThrHi 1000 Index 0 amp sFA 2 Rst 0 dFA 2 lt gt Data 7 i Time Tag RMS 2 0 c Strobe 0 gt Data d A Type 4 Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting See Type 4 Signal Snippets page 323 for information about the oxSnippet component Spike sorting components generate a sort code for events that pass through a window discriminator and a voltage range at a set time Uses Used with Sort Spike Control to store waveforms that differ in shape based on the voltage of the signal at a set point in time Description Used as part of a signal snippet data construct Stores a spike event and sort code for each snippet Data can then be exported with the sort code and the time stamp Details Each spike sorting construct must include parameter tags using the tag root with the following prefixes a prefix for the lower voltage threshold b prefix for the upper threshold c prefix loads the SortSpike coefficients to the component The coefficients are generated in OpenController and contain the time and voltage range for each hoop time amplitude window discrim
129. BA Medusa Base Station with RAI6PA or RA4PA Medusa PreAmp for acquisition Overview Presents stimulus tone pips at 50 ms while running a 12 kHz sample rate The acquisition period is 83 9 ms 1024 point average Data is acquired and averaged for four channels of data OpenDeveloper Examples Several OpenDeveloper example files are installed with OpenEx Suite in the Examples TDevAcc_Example and ExamplesNTTankX Example folders See the OpenDeveloper Reference Manual for more information 45 OpenEx User s Guide 46 OpenProject Reference In the OpenProject Reference you will find A reference guide to the OpenProject Workspace and the basics of creating projects 47 OpenEx User s Guide 48 OpenProject Reference About OpenProject OpenProject acts as the essential environment integration tool for OpenEx greatly simplifying the system s ease of use Managing a single directory structure of experiment files for all OpenEx programs is the main focus for OpenProject Why the need for OpenProject OpenEx software is built on a very powerful Client Server architecture allowing a number of smaller applications to come together in one powerful environment configured to suit the needs of each project For example if you don t need complex real time views of your data as its being recorded you probably won t use OpenScope at run time However if histograms and raster plots are important in your work then you ll need to include
130. Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar 145 OpenEx User s Guide Creating a Momentary Button To quickly create a momentary button 1 Click the Controls menu point to Switches and click Momentary Button The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group 3 Settings groups include E Target s pg 216 SewerName DEFAULT Caption Border pg 187 Primary Foret i Polling pg 213 Target Channel _ Value Control pg 218 Contin tent Appearance pg 194 RUDI aie Vaue None E Value when onfo cont 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 5 Click the B button in the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box 6 Using the Select Target dialog b
131. Browse button ES in the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box In the Target Select dialog box click the expand icon next to Devices click the expand icon next to Tutorial click the expand icon next to Scalars and click FiltLP Click OK to return to the properties dialog and enter or select the following settings Caption Text Amp LP Auto Caption Clear the check box Initialize Value 2 Initialize Mode Init on Load Position Labels 2 5 10 30 100 1000 Position Values 2 5 10 30 100 1000 Click OK The slider switch is created The slider can now be used to change lowpass filter settings in real time during an experiment To create a scrolling plot Click the Controls menu point to Plots Graphs and click Scrolling Plot Click the grid to position the control Double click the control to display the properties dialog box Click the Browse button E in the Data Target box to display the Select Target dialog box In the Target Select dialog box click the expand icon next to Stores click Demo then click OK Change the Poll Period to 10 in the properties dialog box Check the Multi View Enabled checkbox Change the value of Num Views to 2 Click OK lll Setup Properties for ScrollPlot IM ETC E CIDI Common Y Local Tee Chee ato Caton a gt Channel Selector Visible Scroll Sections 10 Multi View Enabled v 2 1 Confine plotting d
132. CdPeriod zCdCount and zCdDone parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Asynchronous Next Condition Control Uses Description Details 1 11 0 zCdCount PulseTrain2 amp CdFie pnPulse 8 RSHipHop Enab Yes 9 Set r 9Rst Run lt PLate 0 1 140 D PCount 0 4 P iCompare ba zCdDone hoc T K 8 zCdCouni ies GE Used in circuits where manual or external control of the next condition is required Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will use a condition must include some form of condition control construct In this construct asynchronous next condition control is provided by a trigger line which sets a flag to start the next sweep Once the flag has been recorded the value is reset and the line is ready for the next event This construct allows the user to define the maximum number of sweeps generated during the experimental block and control protocol behavior at the end of the sweep loop through protocol settings in OpenWorkbench This construct uses an RSFlipFlop component and two trigger lines The trigger high line Set line sets the output value of the RSFlipFlop high Once the value has been recorded or the event generated the RSFlipFlop is reset and ready to accept the next trigger pulse Possible inputs for the NextCond l
133. Control Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path Repaint Target on Update When the primary or alternate target is a control setting the target control will be repainted refreshed when the value is changed Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Master Mode Control Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Modifier Control Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path Repaint Target on Update When the primary or alternate target is a control setting the target control will be repainted refreshed when the value is changed Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Primary Target Select or type the name of the primary destination target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected u
134. Event ID Store name for the Y Axis of the plot Click Rl to display a list of available event IDs Source Channel Set to 0 to display all channels Set to a valid channel number to display a single channel of data Sorting Code Set to 0 if a sort parameter has not been defined or will not be used Set to a valid sort number to display a single sort Source Name X Axis Define the Event ID Store name for the X Axis of the plot Click Bl to display a list of available event IDs Enabled Clear the check box to disable the data definition for the plot 263 OpenEx User s Guide 264 OpenBrowser Reference In the OpenBrowser Reference you will find A reference guide to the OpenBrowser Workspace and the basics of viewing and exporting data 265 OpenEx User s Guide 266 OpenBrowser Reference About OpenBrowser OpenBrowser is a data export application for data stored in the OpenEx data tank format This flexible application is a client of the TTank server When using OpenBrowser data from one or more data tanks can be selected previewed and exported to a standard ASCII file format or formats compatible with NeuroExplorer M or Plexon s Offline Sorter When working in OpenBrowser there are three steps in the data export process data selection data browsing and finally data export Data Selection Before data can be exported or viewed it must be selected The desired tank block event and associated values are selecte
135. ION LINK Zeus ran Digital 1 0 LIFIER MEDUSA PREAMP Connect to Headstage PI5 Mounted in PC PI5 Back of ZBUS Device Caddies PS20 POWER SUPPLY Power Cords Notes PIS FIS Gigabit interface provides communication between the PC and the zBUS as well as between zBUSs ZBIPS zBUS provides communication and power for modules mounted in the device caddie RA16 Medusa RX5 Pentusa Base Stations provide onboard processing and a fiber optic link to preamplifiers and headstages Multiple Base Stations are linked for higher channel count acquisition 338 Tips Tricks and Technical Information Tips for Working in OpenEx OpenWorkbench Idle Mode Use caution when switching to OpenWorkbench s Idle mode In Idle mode many values set from OpenController are cleared from the hardware Use Standby mode rather than Idle to pause an experiment Compiled Circuit File Sampling Rates Compiled circuit files are interchangeable among devices but keep in mind that not all devices will run all sampling rates For example a high frequency auditory stimulus file designed for play back on an RP2 may not be suitable for playback on an RAI6BA which has a maximum D A sampling rate of 48 kHz Tips for Modifying Circuits Because the RPvdsEx system is complex simple acts can cause circuits to fail Included below are several tips to help users avoid commo
136. Listed Tag After a tag has been added to the list the user can click the tag to enable the Edit and Remove buttons 102 OpenWorkbench Reference Edit Opens the Secondary Data Tag dialog box Remove Removes the selected tag from the list EP secondary Tags decrease the circuit complexity by minimizing the number of circuit constructs and components required Secondary tags are updated at the same time as the primary tags Updating is controlled via a Latch MultiLatch or SerStore component Assigning a Data Tank Users must choose a data tank for data storage If a tank has not been selected system controls are disabled and a red colored Data Storage Not Specified warning is displayed in the status bar located at the bottom of the OpenWorkbench window To create a new tank or assign an existing tank 1 Click the Data Tank command on the File menu in OpenWorkbench The Data Storage dialog box is displayed and any tanks that are registered on the selected server will appear in the list 2 Click a tank in the list to select it click the el Create New Tank button to create a a new tank or click the 8f Browse for Tank button to select an unregistered tank 3 When a tank is selected click OK to close the dialog box and assign the tank to the current configuration A green arrow appears to the left of the tank name when it has been selected Data Storage x SERVER TANK 8 Local ADemoTak2 l CATDT S
137. Multi View Enabled Select the check box to view each channel or sort code of data in an individual plot Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Leave this value set to 1 to see one channel per row Scrolling Threshold Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Data Target Select the data event Store name to be plotted OpenController Reference Target Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number Caption Text Type caption text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Select the check box to display an automatically generated caption for the plot The auto caption is generated using the Store name Clear the check box to hide the auto caption The auto caption should be hidden if no caption is desired or if a user defined caption should be used Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Threshold Target The threshold target takes the threshold based on the scroll plot which is usually a plot decimated signal The output value is then sent to the threshold low parameter tag ae
138. Multiple Control Sets Because multiple control clients can access and modify the OpenWorkbench map of the hardware devices it is possible that two clients might attempt to access the same device parameter This can lead to corruption of the memory map or unreliable data The user must make sure that only one OpenController client at a time accesses each parameter variable For example two clients which include a control with the potential to modify the same parameter might be open but only one would be active Using the Master Mode Control in conjunction with window property settings for the Run and Stop buttons give the user the ability to accomplish this Workspace Basics About the OpenController Workspace The OpenController workspace includes a main grid or display area where multiple controls can be added and arranged into a customized control set The OpenController workspace includes two modes Design mode and Run mode Users can toggle between modes using a Toggle Mode button on the toolbar 119 OpenEx User s Guide b In Design mode users can add configure and modify controls File Edit Controls View Run Help Dx Bx eeu In Run mode users can use controls for real time monitoring and control of an ongoing experiment S e e tum PDec Amp Control Amp HP Amp LP 700 600 500 400 eX 200 2K 100 1K seconds Snip A menu bar is available in Design mode
139. On Run or Init On Load Filter Type Select the filter type from a drop down list Choices are Lowpass Highpass Bandpass and Notch Bandwidth Select the bandwidth of the filter in octaves This setting is used only if the Filter Type is set to Bandpass Filtering Parameter Group Filter On Select the check box to enable a filter algorithm using FIR parameters provided in CoefBO B4 Clear the check box to disable the filter CoefB0 Type a coefficient CoefB1 Type a coefficient CoefB2 Type a coefficient CoefB3 Type a coefficient CoefB4 Type a coefficient Margins Parameter Group Left Margin Type a value for the left margin of the plot Right Margin Type a value for the right margin of the plot Top Margin Type a value for the top margin of the plot Bottom Margin Type a value for the bottom margin of the plot Multi View Parameter Group Multi View Enabled Select the check box to view each channel or sort code of data in an individual plot Num Views Set the number of channels or sorts to view in a multi view plot If data contains more than 16 channels or sorts the value must be increased to show all data Num Columns Set the number of columns in which multi view plots are arranged View By Channel or Sort Code Sort Codes are generated in the RPvdsEx circuit View Index Offset Starting channel or sort is the View Index Offset value 1 For example To begin viewing data with channel 3 set the View Ind
140. OpenE sST anks Browse For Tank Create New Tank Register Tank UnRegister Tank e Registered Tank e Unregistered Tank Test Tank Reset Tank v Show Full Path Refresh Tank List es Registered Legacy Tank Block Naming Name Prefix Prompt for block name 8 Unregistered Legacy Tank Show Legacy Tanks Find Legacy Tank Right clicking in the TANK box displays a shortcut menu with commands for creating testing or resetting tanks Browse for Tank Browse for folder Create New Tank Opens the Select Tank file dialog box so that a tank can be added 103 OpenEx User s Guide Register Tank UnRegister tank Test Tank Reset Tank Show Full Path Refresh Tank List Show Legacy Tanks Find Legacy Tanks Block Naming Name Prefix Adds the selected tank to the Windows Registry Removes the selected tank from the Windows Registry The tank can still be used on the local machine Tests the connection to the server and opens and closes the tank file Resets the selected tank file This option returns the tank file to a state in which data can be read from or written to the tank Toggles detail view on and off In details view the path to the tank is displayed Refreshes the Tank box display Displays registered legacy format tanks in the tank list Opens the Select Tank File dialog box and allows users to browse for tanks stored in the legacy format by showing files with a tb
141. OpenEx User s Guide OpenEx User s Guide Copyright 2000 2008 Tucker Davis Technologies Inc TDT All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose without the express written permission of TDT Licenses and Trademarks Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Updated 1 14 2010 11 28 AM Table of Contents Betore You Beginner th e eo pri D or RC renta 1 Open EX OVERVIEW E 3 About OpenExX i zie t date rr rep HE i e et tut a dade de ded tat e De Geel 5 Real Time Control rea dd e a retard e a dys IRR ER PU eae ees 7 is eelseniue o el EI 7 The Client Server Environment sssssssssssssseeeeee eene neret enne 8 QpPenEX Tutorials iosiscc csi csssvesvessscssosssssosassenssapsenssesscasscuassnnsovseoons sede sesoassesosed sons desssuaseneddnssassennssesooonesiscoeasses 9 Tutorial 1 Getting Started with OpenEx sse nennen enne 11 T torial 2 Store Pooling tee ete eet anten ee 33 Additional Standard Project and Example Files ssssseeeeeen 43 M rsdgunized iuc 47 Abo tOpenbro Ject ett nte Lt He teatro QD e HL iet 49 About the OpenProject Window ssssssssssssseesenenneennneeen ne
142. RcOCircuits saving Computes instantaneous firing rate for sorted Examples O userFiles activity and displays SP0001 wsp LON H Acquisition Project OpenEx J Shortcut Input Extracellular Description Bar Channels 1 Display Area Storage Snips LPF Plot Raw File name sPoom wsp m Files of type OpenProject files wsp E Cancel 7 About the OpenProject Preferences Dialog Box The OpenProject Preferences dialog box can be used to determine whether compiled circuit files are retained in the project folders and to determine when the user will be prompted to begin a new data tank It is opened from the Preferences command on the OpenProject menu Project RCO Files Tab Keep local copy of RPvds circuit This check box determines if copies of RPvdsEx circuit files associated with an OpenWorkbench file are saved in the project s RCOCircuits folder When this check box is cleared new projects created in the current OpenProject session will not include local copies of these files Clearing this check box will NOT remove files from a currently open project This setting is not retained in future sessions of OpenProject unless Save As Default is selected Save As Default When this check box is selected the current Keep local copy of RPvds circuits setting is saved as the default and will be retained when OpenProject is closed and reopened Data Tank Synchronization Tab Prompt New Data Tank The user can select from
143. Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Data Target Enter the Store name Target Channel Enter the channel number SigGen Engine Control Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path Repaint Target on Update Not used Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server SigGen Waveform Target Select the parameter tag associated with the SigGen waveform buffer Buffer Length Target Select the parameter tag associated with the length of the buffer Target Channel Enter the channel number Shared Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Visualization Control Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Source Target Select or type the name of the so
144. Server tei ia aati 7 U under one second design 66 V value inputs seeeeeen 143 value watch sseeeeeeees 131 Creating ovs eee eene 132 OVOIVIOW uta n e enis 131 VBScript control creating isses te teretes 167 debugging scripts 174 running scripts eeeeeeeeeees 174 writing scripts eeeeeeeeeeee 169 Ww Workbench Plotting 86 363
145. SignalGenerators folder click Insert then click the workspace to add the macro Double click the macro to access the macro documentation and setup menus Click the Setup tab or click Next Enter 32 in the Number of Channels text box Click Done at the bottom of the properties dialog The output of the Test Spike MC macro will now be a 32 channel signal We must now connect the necessary components in order to connect the demo signal to the storage macros We will use a MCzHopOut component to make the demo signal available to all DSPs Two MCzHopln components will allow the demo signal to be split into 16 channel partitions and distributed to the two pooled stores on separate DSPs OpenEx Tutorials E There is a one cycle delay when transferring signals using the MCzHopOut and MCzHopIn X components It is important that all stores are synchronized to these delays and so we will use a MCzHopIn for both stores To connect the demo signal to the pooled store 1 2 3 4 d 10 11 12 13 14 Add a MCzHopOut component to the workspace Click the Components menu click Multi Processor and click MCzHopOut Click OK and click the workspace to place the component To set the name for the MCzHopOut component double click the component click the Name text box and type Demo Enter 32 in the nChan text box to set the number of channels to 32 Connect the output of the Test Spike MC macro to the MCzHopOut input
146. Store is enabled secondary tags can be added for each of the other Stores that will share time stamps with the primary Store The data types of the primary Store and any associated secondary tags are the same 69 OpenEx User s Guide 70 Slow Store macros The Slow Store 1 4Ch and Slow Store 1 8Ch Slow Store MC macros are compatible with TDT s single Store nChanz 1 ea processor devices The Slow Store MC macro is supported only by multiprocessor devices such as the RX5 and RZ2 Store Valu fCh Float 1Hz Data Rate 4 Bytes S ec Uses Slow Store macros are used for storing scalar data such as stimulus parameters and digital input values They can be used to record stimulus parameters time stamped to a subject response or other external event Description Slow Store macros provide triggering based on an internal sampling rate or external trigger rather than triggering related to the system sweep or stimulus value change They will accept floating point or fixed point data streams and one sample point will be stored for each channel of data at the rising edge of the trigger input when the enable line is true Discrete Data Discrete data is commonly found in the form of snippet waveforms or block waveforms Discrete data is useful in spike sorting as well as averaging since it can be time stamped and referenced to segments and events Block Store macros The Block Store 1 4Ch and Block Store 1 Block Store MC 8Ch
147. This macro will accept floating point data streams for continuous or decimated storage Stream Store MC Macro Class Storage Fa Devices Supported RXn Multiprocessor Version 5 4 Store Wave Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 381 5 kBytes Sec Sample Rates Supported Any This macro will accept floating point data streams for storage at a specified sample rate Be aware that the sampling rate for a the storage will change if the circuit sampling rate is changed after this macro setup This macro supports Store Pooling allowing the use of multiple Stream Store MC macros to split data storage across multiple processors Depending on the Store Format parameter setting one of five data formats will be used for storage 32 bit floating point 32 bit integer 16 bit integer Short 8 bit integer Byte or 32 bit integer for plot decimation If the data is being compressed before storage scale the input data stream to best match the range of the destination data type See the Options tab for more information Description Data Type Input data stream Multi Channel Floating Point Notes This macro is to be used with OpenEx and Rx and Rz series processors 3 Click the Setup tab or click Next 4 To set the macro to acquire 16 channels of data set the nChannels value to 16 35 OpenEx User s Guide Adjust Properties for Stream Store MC x Overview Setup options Store Pooling Store Name wave C
148. View area allows table or graphic visualization of tank data from a selected row To switch between table and scroll plot views select or clear the Data View Table option on the View menu Scroll Plot View The scroll plot displays waveform or scalar data from an event as well as the associated scalar information from epochs Epochs are displayed above the event data In the scroll plot below an epoch Freq associated with the time line is shown above the event Snip line li opensrowser Servers toca NN x Eie Edit View Help lw dee CATDTYOpen Block 10 EsATAeLbeATA 0 16 0 15 10 To modify which epochs are displayed choose the Show check box for the event column in the Data Selection Table window To move about the Scroll plot select the marker in the Time Line window and move it to the time stamp or event of interest The time range can be expanded or contracted to give additional detail about the waveforms using the Time Line window Table View In table view the variables selected in the Show row of the Data Selection Table window are displayed The time stamp associated with the event and any associated epochs are displayed If Tref is selected in the Data Selection Table window the time stamps displayed will be relative to the start of the epoch 275 OpenEx User s Guide To determine which variables such as block number tank name time stamp and epochs are displayed choose the corres
149. Workbench Reference About Tanks As data is acquired it is passed to a powerful data server The data server TTank indexes and stores the data then makes the data available to other client applications in the OpenEx suite Users can create a base name that will be assigned to each block of data acquired in the selected tank Data Tank Formats DataTanks and blocks are treated as folder file structures Each new data tank acts as a folder that contains multiple block folders The four files tbk tdx tev tsq associated with each block are stored within each block folder Tanks and blocks can be browsed and managed just as you would with other Windows based folders and files Individual blocks can be deleted or transferred between tanks using standard Windows Explorer methods However the underlying file structure for each block should always be maintained If a block must be moved move the block folder Never move or delete an individual tbk tdx tev or tsq file Blocks and files are named with a consistent naming structure to help keep blocks intact The following figure shows a Windows Explorer view of a tank folder and its corresponding blocks Note the identifying tank and block icons ipi x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Q sek c 3 7 a Search I Folders 525 fz Address ja C TDT OpenEx Tanks A02064Block 1 J Eje Folders Name Type
150. Workbench protocol is at Idle The yellow border might also indicate that the wrong OpenWorkbench file is opened or that a target was identified incorrectly in the control s property settings Stopped but active An active device can modify the OpenWorkbench memory map but does not acquire data from the memory map If the controls are modified this will modify whatever parameter tag or control property they are linked to However the visualization tools are halted The example below shows this state IS OpController J Ef x Control set is stopped but active and xl OpenWorkbench protocol is at Idle Stopped and locked In the stopped and locked state the controls are inactive A hatched line is placed through the controls In this case the controls can not modify any other devices To set up a control so that it locks when stopped go double click on the grid and select the Behavior parameter group in the properties dialog box then select Lock on Stop IB OpController OpenController Reference Control set is stopped and locked OpenWorkbench protocol is at Record Run Mode allows users to save and load control parameter settings such as slider switch settings dynamically ba we Control Types Saves the current control parameter settings to the control file Loads the last saved control parameter settings to the control file Control Types and the Controls Menu Controls can be added from the Co
151. a SR 24414 0625 Channel Count 16 Decimation factor 24 generates 1000 Hz SR Data Type Float 24414 0625 24 16 4 65104 bytes per second Plot Decimated waveforms SR 24414 0625 Channel Count 16 Decimation factor 64 generates 1000 Hz SR Data Type Single remember 16 bit for each value 24414 0625 64 16 2 12 207 bytes per second Total transfer rate 12207 65104 102 400 179 711 bytes per second Circuit Design Reference Data Storage with Macros The most important part of running an experiment with OpenEx is saving the experimental data To correctly save data the data constructs in RPvdsEx buffers for collecting the data etc must be carefully configured RPvdsEx includes a number of data storage macros designed specifically for OpenEx Using these macros simplifies circuit design and ensures smooth integration with Workbench Tip More information about each macro is available in its onboard help To access that information add the macro to an RPvdsEx circuit and double click the macro icon to display the macro properties and help Scalar Data Scalar data is commonly stored for stimulus variables and time references and is primarily used as reference data for epochs See About Epoch Events page 82 for more information Epoc Store macros The Epoc_Store macro is useful for Epoc Store experimental protocols that require several Store Prim valu f TA secondary tags that reference a p
152. a trigger button OpenWorkbench Reference Protocol Control Buttons Record 100 Preview Status Standb 50 Event Indicator andoy Rate Bar Indicator Idle Load z A zIrggerB ZBus B Trigger Button Event Rate Indicator The Event Rate indicator is a vertical scale and arrow to the right of the control buttons The arrow indicates the rate of events being stored to the tank The arrow changes color from blue to amber then red to alert the user when the event rate is high If the event rate is high the user should check and adjust threshold settings and other event criteria to ensure that the maximum event rate is not exceeded Data will be lost if the maximum event rate is exceeded Status Indicator Bar The Status Indicator Bar flashes green when the system is running in Record or Preview mode without errors The bar will flash red when errors occur Control Buttons The control buttons allow the user to run or halt the experiment Record devices are loaded and running and data is saved to the tank Preview data is saved to a temporary block in the tank Users can examine data in both OpenScope and OpenController This allows users to modify parameter values before starting the experiment Standby devices are loaded and running but signals are not being acquired and saved to disk This allows the user to modify parameter values through OpenController Idle devices are not loaded and are not running Switching to Idle mod
153. ad The ButCoef Butterworth Coefficient generator controls the lowpass filter frequency while the Biquad uses the coefficients to generate the digital filter The circuit construct below shows a more typical construct which includes a SerStore to store the spike rate to the data tank 332 Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference r 1 iRate 1 1 7 0 1 11 0 d InstRate b Biquad e SHE fos ficu amp nBIQ 2 1 13 0 SUseFall 1 ButCoef Coef SortMatch 0 oGain t Delay SerStore m b Ri rst bus LINE FoR eripe amp FcRetum 0 z SpecTick256 3 WrEnab 1 FcFeed 0 pee DecTicK256 Index 0 4 sRate Enab Yes J Data dRate 1 5 The primary input to the InstRate is the strobe out from the spike component Sfire HopIn This example also includes sort code input to the SortCode parameter from the SortBits output of the spike component Scode The sort code to match can be set in the InstRate SortMatch parameter A parameter tag FcFact has been included to allow the user to set the maximum rate of change of the filter from OpenController The primary output is fed through the filter that is constantly updated using a loop from the InstRate s FcFeed to the FcReturn The FcFeed is fed to the ButCoef corner frequency setting to update the corner frequency of the filter The output from the filter is saved to a Store and is also fed back into the FcReturn The FcReturn value us used t
154. ailed help for the macro Data Storage 66 Data in OpenEx can be categorized into three basic data types scalar values discrete waveforms often called snippets or segments and continuous waveforms often called streamed data Data storage macros have been developed to simplify the structure of circuit design and storage configuration Each data storage macro contains a data construct which defines what type of data will be handled by the macro All storage configurations take place behind the scenes Choosing a Data Construct The following table provides a direct comparison of the three data types used in OpenEx the constructs that implement them and the macros needed to handle the data Circuit Design Reference Data Type Scalar Data Discrete Data Continuous Data Macro to use Epoc Store Block Store MC Stream Store MC Slow Store MC Spike Store MC Data Construct Triggered Scalar Data Buffer Continuous Waveform Type Data List Signal Snippets Description single values small waveforms single waveform Synchronous synchronous across all synchronous across all synchronous across all Asynchronous channels channels snippets channels asynchronous across all channels spikes Common signals temperature PH spike evoked potentials spike activity plot or values rate snippet data ops dE and raw waveforms frequency or level spike data Note the information provided here for storage macro selection is intended as a guid
155. al tags that point to the current sweep and condition numbers When zSwNum or zCdNum is used OpenWorkbench will display the value on the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Note The zCdPeriod zCdCount zSwPeriod z5wCount zCdDone and zSwDone parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Acquisition and Stimulation Control Constructs Circuit constructs are also provided for precise control of the timing duration and delay of acquisition presentation and other events The constructs are gt Basic Acquisition Control gt Basic Stimulation Control gt Other Event Control Basic Acquisition Control 1 6 0 1 7 0 TTLDelay2 Schmitt2 d d ON1 1 zAqDur lt nHi 10000 zAqDelay M pN2 0 nEnab 1 Uses Used in circuits where sweep based acquisition will occur and the user will set the acquisition delay or duration Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used for data acquisition must include some form of acquisition control construct Description This construct allows the user to control the delay and duration of acquisition from OpenWorkbench protocol settings Details The SwFire line is generated by the sweep control construct The AqEnable line Hop will trigger buffers for acquiring data The zAqDelay parameter tag defines the length of the delay for the start of
156. al value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load Units Text Type text to be added to the value as an indication of units for the value Knob Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Primary Target Select or type the name of the primary destination target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The target should generally be the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form dddd parTag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together and the target is the source the target name will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift When the target is the destination the target name will be a lesser than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g lt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel
157. also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the slider Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Initialize Value Type a value to be used as an initial value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load Orientation Select an orientation from a drop down list Choices are Vertical or Horizontal Pointer Style Select a pointer style from a drop down list Choices are Led Pointer Bar Light Bar Position Max Enter the maximum value to be displayed for the slider Position Min Enter the minimum value to be displayed for the slider Tick Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point for value labels along the slider SigGen Engine Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server SigGen Waveform Target Select the parameter tag associated with the SigGen waveform buffer Buffer Length Target Select the parameter tag associated with the length of the buffer Target Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel
158. also displays a brief description you can use to make your selection Since we are working primarily with streaming data a streaming storage component such as the Stream Store 1 ACh macro should be used 1 Click the Insert Macro icon select the Stream Store 1 4Ch macro from the Macrosl Data Saving Streaming folder click Insert then click the workspace to add the macro File name Cores weepControl rcm Files of type RPvds Macro Files rcm Cancel 3 OpenEx Tutorials Macro Name Data Input Stream Store 1 4Ch Store Wave 1Ch Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 95 4 KBytes Sec Setting Summary Notice that the macro displays key settings along the bottom edge of the icon The macro name is displayed above and the Store or data inputs are located along the left edge of the icon By default only one channel is enabled when a Sream Store 1 4Ch macro is added Additional inputs will be activated based on settings within the macro Double click the macro to access the macro documentation and setup menus Adjust Properties for Stream Store 1 4Ch x Overview Setup Options Macro Name Stream Store 1 4Ch This macro will accept Floating point data streams for continuous or decimated storage Stream_Store_1 4Ch Macro Class Storage Target OpenEx Yes Devices Supported Any Device Version 5 4 Store Wave 1Ch Float 24444 4Hz Sample Rates Supported Any Data Rate 95 4 KBy
159. am in the Device Navigator window The devices are displayed in the top half of the window Clicking a device icon displays configuration information for that device in the Main Window Devices are configured with processing chain and storage specifications by assigning a compiled circuit file Device icons that are colored gray indicate that they have not yet been assigned a configuration those in black indicate that configuration is complete If you load an existing project OpenWorkbench attempts to match device configurations saved as part of the Workbench file with the hardware detected Any configurations that are not matched to a device are displayed in the bottom section of the navigator To assign or move configurations between devices simply drag the configuration icon to the desired device icon EE EM Device detected not configured Device detected and configured amt Configuration saved but not assigned to a device The Device Navigator is a sub window that can be floated moved collapsed or hidden By default it is located in the upper left corner of the WorkBench window Using the System Controls 84 The OpenWorkbench system controls allow the user to start or stop the experiment from the PC and preview data as it is being collected The System Control window also provides status information about the system The control set includes a system status indicator control buttons an event rate indicator and
160. and toolbars are also provided in both modes for easy access to commands Using Design Mode Design mode allows users to add and customize groups of controls that will function together in a single OpenController configuration file A menu bar toolbar and shortcut menus are available for easy access to commands 120 OpenController Reference In Design mode the main window is a grid area where controls can be added sized and organized to create a control set Controls can be added from the Control menu EL cpcontroler a File Edit Controls View Run Help D sg Numeric Displays Gauges Status Indicators Value Input Switches Sliders Knobs Plots Graphs Tables Scripting Miscellaneous Advanced Controls Power Macro ScopejPile Plot Chart Plot Scrolling Plot Feature Plot o YV FAY YY Yv v v Once added controls can be manipulated similarly to many Windows objects Users can drag a control to move it or drag a control s border to resize it EE OpControiler O eE Fie Edit Controls View Run Help D m E 3 me Using Properties Dialog Boxes The appearance and behavior of each control can be modified using the properties dialog box The properties dialog box contains all of the customizable settings for a selected control To open the properties dialog box for a control double click the control in the grid area of OpenController s Design mode 121 OpenEx User s Guide
161. ang en Note The Legacy VBScript control is still supported by TDT The VBScriptEx control functions may not be supported by the Legacy VBScript control Creating a VBScriptEx Control To quickly create a VBScriptEx control 1 Click the Controls menu point to Tables Scripting and click VBScriptEx The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 167 OpenEx User s Guide Object General ead laines Main Sub Main End Sub 3 Double click the grey area at the top of the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Setup Properties for ScriptEx xi Settings groups include Common pg 211 _Sewername OEFAULT e Behavior pe 197 Coption Tent one s 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If needed type the desired Caption Text This will appear in the upper left corner of the control component 6 If needed select from these checkbox options for additional setting configurations 168 OpenController Reference Auto Caption when the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generat
162. anks Dud Pause The Pause button freezes the appearance of the Messages window to allow the user more time to read displayed messages Message scrolling resumes when the Pause button is clicked again Verbose The Verbose check box toggles verbose messaging on and off When the check box is cleared only mode change and error messages are displayed By default verbose messaging is not enabled The default can be changed in the OpenWorkbench Preferences dialog box Find Err The Find Err button scrolls through error messages in the message list Each time the button is clicked the next error message is highlighted in the Messages window Clear The Clear button removes all messages from the Messages window Using the Plot Window 86 If the OpenWorkbench preference Enable Data Monitoring is checked the plot window is automatically displayed when a project is run in OpenWorkbench Users can also toggle the window off or on from the View menu In Preview and Record modes OpenWorkbench generates a plot set for fast easy visualization of data Workbench automatically chooses a plot type and configuration for each data set but users can adjust the configuration for each plot to refine the display OpenWorkbench Reference u i lt j eso A toolbar at the top of the plot window allows the user to control plot animation juj lt gt gt Xgl Play bd Pause Scroll back by plot window width e g if
163. annel information is available in the corresponding OpenWorkbench file In the Pile Depth box enter the minimum number of wave forms to be displayed The plot will be refreshed when the number of traces reaches twice the minimum Click OK OpenScope Reference The pile plot is configured for viewing a single channel of data The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse When you animate or track data the plot will look similar to this After a single channel pile plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for multi channel viewing To modify a pile plot to view multiple channels of data 1 2 3 4 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter 0 in the Source Channel box to ensure that all channels are available for viewing Select the Multi View Enabled check box In the Num Views box enter the total number of views required to see all available channels of data in the multi view This number will typically be the number of channels of data acquired By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Enter the number of columns to display in the Num Columns box Click OK When you animate or track data the plot will look similar to this After a multi channel pile plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for viewing a range of channels To modify a pile plot to view a range of channels l 2 Double click the plot to display
164. annels 1 1 8 0 1 y SortSpike2 D 1 10 0 SerStore Size 32000 Index 0 4 4 SEA 1 onWid 4 8 E aEA 1 2oThresh 1 gReset e UseSign 1 poWrEnab 1 Reset 3 Enab Rst 1 Tag dEA 1 0 gt Data SortBits 0 P CEA 1 9S Coef gt Data See also Choosing a Spike Component page 71 326 Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference Type 5 Continuous Waveform BIk Size 32 Data Form Float Dec_Factor 1 Channels 0 Imp_MC No Uses Description Details oxStreaam V Tag_Root About the oxStream Component Tag Root identifies the base name of the construct All parameter tags in the circuit that use the base name will be associated with the oxStream component BIk Size indicates the block size data is acquired by the DSP in small packets or blocks of the stream acquired and specifies the size of each scroll section Block size is arbitrary but the block should be small enough for easy download to the tank and large enough to minimize the cycle usage associated with continuously streaming small chunks of data to disk Too large a block size will also make a scroll plot look choppy Important Notes Blk Size cannot be more than 265 if the stream is being used in Controller for spike thresholding The size of the buffer storing the signals needs to be an even multiple of BIk Size Data Form is the format of the data and depends o
165. ardware Continuous decimated data signals that are acquired and filtered and then decimated The decimated signal is then stored to a buffer All three continuous waveform types can be acquired using the Stream Store macros For more information about data storage see Data Storage Macros page 66 and About Control Constructs page 65 81 OpenEx User s Guide About Epoch Events 82 Epochs are sections of tank blocks that are associated with the tank s timeline They identify the start stop or duration of particular event periods For example an epoch could be associated with a stimulus presentation period and could identify a pre stimulus stimulus or post stimulus period Because epochs are automatically indexed by TTank as they are stored other events can be referenced against them OpenBrowser and OpenScope use epoch values to display and edit tank data For example epoch events can be used as the reference for creating histograms and rasters They can also be used by OpenBrowser to view and export data with reference to the epoch events Epoch events can be scalar variables including triggered scalars data lists and their associated secondary tags They can be of a set or variable length depending on the triggers and sync tags used within the data construct An epoch can be used to identify the period of a sweep the duration of a stimulus the duration of the acquisition or be independent of the sweep and acquisition prope
166. are linked In this example a 7 segment display will be linked to a slider 1 Open the OpenWorkbench configuration file Note the devices should already be established and compiled circuit files should be assigned 2 Open OpenController A blank new OpenController file is created and displayed in Design mode 3 Tocreate the slider click the Control menu point to Sliders Knobs and click Slider 183 OpenEx User s Guide IB OpController 4 Click the grid to position the control IB OpController 5 Double click the Slider Control to display the properties dialog box 6 Inthe Primary Target box select the parameter tag to which the slider value will be sent In the example below a parameter tag associated with a filter setting on the acq device was selected The target can be typed or selected using the Select Target dialog box 184 OpenController Reference Setup Properties for Slider EE xi O Sewerame ics is Primen Tage scare TewDwme fe Poston Mae 00 Tick Precisin 1 5 7 Modify any other settings an needed In this example a caption HP Filter has also been added and the Auto Caption check box has been cleared so that the used defined caption will be used The Position Max and Min were modified to match the correct range for the high pass filter 8 Click OK IB OpController D m i 3 9 To add a 7 segment display click th
167. are not shown The number of labels shown is determined by the Major Ticks Count setting Label Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point for value labels found on the control Label Margin Enter the number of pixels of space desired between labels and the tick arc OpenController Reference Show Major Ticks Select the check box to show major ticks Major Ticks Count Enter the number of major tick marks to display on the control The Show Major Ticks check box must be selected before major tick marks become visible Show Minor Ticks Select the check box to show minor ticks Minor Ticks Count Enter the number of minor tick marks to display between two major tick marks on the control The Show Minor Ticks check box must be selected before minor tick marks become visible Minor tick marks can be used even if the major tick marks are not shown Slider Scale Parameters Position Max Enter the maximum value for the control Position Min Enter the minimum value for the control Show Major Ticks Select the check box to show major ticks Show Minor Ticks Select the check box to show minor ticks Minor ticks can only be shown when the major ticks are also shown Show Tick Labels Show value labels for major tick mark positions Labels can be shown even if tick marks are not shown The number of labels shown is determined by the Major Ticks Count setting Tick Precision Enter the number of digits to
168. ata in cell boundary v Plotting margin percentage n Visualize the Acquired Data x OpenEx Tutorials So far in this tutorial you have setup and compiled your device circuit configured OpenWorkbench and added real time control in OpenController It is now time to run the project and visualize the acquired data while adjusting the filter settings through OpenController To adjust the filter settings in real time 1 Click Controller_1 in the OpenProject window while OpenWorkbench is in either Preview or Run mode Adjust the filter settings of each slider control to adjust the corner frequencies of the filter Observe how each signal changes as the individual filter corner frequencies are altered The Scrolling Plot allows data to be viewed while in OpenController and functions similarly to the plots in OpenWorkbench Hold the Shift key and drag the mouse up or down to adjust the scale of the plot 31 OpenEx User s Guide What s Next In this tutorial you created a project from the ground up using RPvdsEx macros The next tutorial implements a useful feature in OpenEx called store pooling 32 Tutorial 2 Store Pooling In the Store Pooling tutorial you ll learn to distribute data storage across DSPs on a multi processor device Splitting processing tasks across multiple DSPs lowers cycle usage for each DSP and allows the device to run efficiently even when processing high channel counts or
169. ately long time Maximum Training Time Enter a value in seconds to set an upper limit on the auto sort process If the training sample size is not reached in the maximum training time the sort is based on the existing sample size Allow Unsorted Group Select the check box to allow unsorted spikes Pile Depth Set the number of traces that will be displayed Switch Button Behavior Parameters Value when On Type value when on Value when Off Type value when off Shared Behavior Parameters Hidden When Running When the controls are run the editor will be hidden from view Common Parameter Group 7 Segment Display Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value Local selects the local server Source Target Select or type the name of the source target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The source target should be either the Store name from the OpenWorkbench file or the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form ssss for Store name or dddd partag for device name and parameter tag 197 OpenEx User s Guide 198 When linking controls together the target will be a greater than symbol follow
170. ately stored to files based on the export configuration format specified If rows are not configured for export a warning message is displayed in the Export Status dialog starting with the first row that could not be exported Exporting Row 5 a Whiting to File CMest csv a Done 289 OpenEx User s Guide 290 T Tank Reference In the TTank Reference you will find An overview of the Tank Monitor workspace 291 OpenEx User s Guide 292 TTank Reference The Tank Monitor Workspace The Tank Monitor workspace provides quick and easy access to TTank Users can view information about TTank activity or perform basic maintenance such as creating new tanks and registering or unregistering existing tanks The upper right corner of the workspace displays basic information about the tank selected in the Tank box Tank Monitor Debugger xj SERVER General Tank __ p Write Activity gt 8 Local State Recording Load 0 Cache Size 43kb m Read Activity Event Rate ome SQ Acc Ors Data Rate 7kb s SO Miss 0 5 Order Errors 0 EVAcc Ds Colides 373 EV Rate OkB s Debug 373 Debug Active TANK g e NTANK auToO CATDTS penEx 8 DemoTank2 C TDT OpenEs t TANK CATDT S penEx Ej Server Box In the Server box users can select the server where data tanks can be found or created In many cases the server will be on the same PC that contr
171. ation Type Select a synchronization type Choices are None On Tag Change and On Tag True None no synchronization rows are sent one after another till done On Tag Change the table will be synchronized with the synchronization target and values are sent whenever the synchronization target changes On Tag True the table will be synchronized with the synchronization target and values will be sent whenever the synchronization target value equals true Synchronization Target Select a target to which the data table will be synchronized Click the lookup button J to open the Select Target dialog box Stop Controller When the check box is selected the control set will be stopped when all table entries have been sent Feature Plot Behavior Parameters Cloud Points Set the minimum number of points to display The maximum number of cloud points will be twice the value set The plot will refresh when the maximum number is reached X Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Total Amplitude Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Y Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Total Amplitude Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Input Box Behavior Parameters Precision Enter the number of digits displayed after the decimal point in the numeric display Value Max Enter the desired maximum value If the actual input value is greater than the defined maximum the maximum value will be used Value M
172. aussNoise b Click OK and click the workspace to place the component To link components double click the output of the first component and click the input of the second component Connect the outputs of both the Tone and GaussNoise generator components to the first and second HP LP Filter 4Ch component inputs Connect the HP LP Filter 4Ch component outputs 1 and 2 to the respective Store 1 and Store 2 inputs of the Stream Store 1 A4Ch component Your circuit should look like the one pictured below CoreSweepControl SweepNum a SweepDone Primary Store Name Tick HP LP_Filter_4Ch Stream_Store_1 4Ch Store Demo 2Ch Float 24444 4Hz Data Rate 190 7 KBytes Sec Fit 2Hz f000Hz 12dB oct By default the graphical processing chain and the control circuit control object are combined into a single compiled circuit file format rcx file that can be both edited in the graphical interface and loaded to hardware devices 21 OpenEx User s Guide 22 6 Click the File menu and click Save As When the Project folder is created a subfolder named RCOCircuits is created to store compiled circuit files for the project This folder should open by default Type Tutorial in the file name box and click Save Both the graphical processing chain and the control object are saved into one compiled circuit file Tutorial rcx in the default directory Notice that when the file is saved the circuit is compiled Any err
173. ave snippets epoch events Data Lists or buffered signals It can be expanded and contracted to show a larger or smaller times Scrolling Plot The Scrolling Plot is similar to a chart recorder The waveform streams across the plot window from left to right This is an excellent tool for visualizing continuous signals such as EEG waveforms or the plot decimated signals of an extracellular recording Feature Plot The Feature Plot measures two signal properties of a snippet waveform and displays them as a scatter plot This tool is excellent for data mining of multiple unit activity The feature plot can display comparisons of waveform features such as total amplitude peak amplitudes the area under the curve and peak to peak time differences Creating a Pile Plot To quickly create a single channel pile plot 1 Click the Controls menu point to Plots Graphs and click Scope Pile Plot The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Clickthe grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Setup Properties for PilePlot X Settings groups include Common pg 205 4 Z Channel Sele
174. be added Only one OpenWorkbench file can be added per project Adding an application will also add a corresponding file for that application Launch Details Each row in this table can represent an application that has been added to the project The order in which applications are displayed in the Launch Details list indicates the order in which the application icons will be arranged in the OpenProject window Application Column An application can be renamed by clicking in the application cell and editing the text This name is both the file name for the individual application file and the name displayed along with the icon in the OpenProject window Mode Column After an OpenController or OpenScope application has been added to a row in the Launch Details list a drop down menu is available in the Mode cell The Mode set here determines the mode in which the application will be launched when the project is opened OpenController Run launches in Run mode with controls running Design launches in Design mode to allow the user to add remove or modify controls before running Stop launches in Run mode with controls stopped OpenScope Idle allows users to select a data block or add remove or modify controls before running Animate plots are animated with last selected data block settings Track plots are animated with the most recent block of data from a currently recording experiment Tank Column After an O
175. ble Show Minor Ticks Select the check box to show minor ticks Minor Ticks Count Enter the number of minor tick marks to display between two major tick marks on the control The Show Minor Ticks check box must be selected before minor tick marks become visible Minor tick marks can be used even if the major tick marks are not shown Key Arrow Step Size Enter a step size for knob movements when using the arrow keys on the keyboard to control the knob The step size number corresponds to control values according to the minimum and maximum scale settings Tip If the arrow keys do not change the knob position try moving the knob with the mouse once After the knob position has been changed once the key arrows can be used for subsequent movements Key Page Step Size Enter a step size for knob movements when using the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard to control the knob The step size number corresponds to control values according to the minimum and maximum scale settings Tip If the Page Up and Page Down keys do not change the knob position try moving the knob with the mouse once After the knob position has been changed once the Page Up and Page Down keys can be used for subsequent movements Gauge Scale Parameters Scale Minimum Enter the minimum value for the control Scale Maximum Enter the maximum value for the control Show Labels Show value labels for major tick mark positions Labels can be shown even if tick marks
176. blocks of 1 floats Mode Select Store Disable or Fetch from a drop down list By default all Stores are set to Store and are saved to the data tank Disable a Store if you do not wish to view or save the corresponding data set Fetch enables you to view the data in OpenController but the data is not stored and will not be available in clients such as Scope or Explorer that display data from the tank Store ID Type a user defined four character label for the Store This name is associated with the corresponding data in the tank and is used by other clients such as Scope or Controller when selecting data By default the tag name will be used as the Store ID The default Store ID may be adjusted to four characters by truncation or padding with underscores e g Ticker becomes Tick PD becomes PD Tip In many cases the same OpenScope configuration file will work with several OpenWorkbench configuration files if the user has implemented standard naming scheme The following is an example of one possible naming scheme e SCAx Scalar x x 1 2 Type 1 Triggered Scalar oxScalar e BUFF Buffered data Type 2 Data Buffer oxBuffer e SLTx Scalar List Type 3 Data List oxList e CSPK Candidate Spike Type 4 Signal Snippet oxSnippet e SSPK Sorted Spike Type 4 Signal Snippet oxSnippet e PDEC Plot Decimated data Type 5 Continuous Waveform oxStream e STRM Streamed data not decimated Type 5
177. bout the OpenProject Configuration Window below for a description of modes 6 Toensure that all applications reference the same data tank click the check box in the Tank cell for each application line where it appears 7 To use an existing file for a given application click in the corresponding Import cell Browse to the desired file and double click the file name 8 Click OK to close the OpenProject Configuration window When a project is created a new folder with the user specified name is created The project file wsp and a file for each added application is created in this new folder DataTanks RCOCircuits and UserFiles folders are also created in the project folder Tank files may also be created and added to the DataTanks folder depending on project preferences Note If you import an OpenWorkbench file an RPvdsEx rpx or rcx file for any compiled circuit files specified in the OpenWorkbench application might also be added to the RCOCircuits folder You can change the Keep local copy of RPvds circuits setting in the OpenProject Preference dialog box 51 OpenEx User s Guide About the OpenProject Configuration Window 52 The OpenProject Configuration window opens whenever a new project is created It allows the user to enter basic project information such as the name and location of the project and to add all of the applications or files that will be used in the project It can also be used to add application file
178. c 7 segment display is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Creating a Value Watch To quickly create a value watch 1 Click the Controls menu point to Numeric Displays and click Value Watch The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group EEFE x Settings groups include Common pe 210 Target s pg 217 C severan oeron Lr Caption Border pe 187 Source Target Polling pg 213 Target Channel 1 f Value Control pg 218 Caption Text Appearance pg 194 PaWPed z E Punts Tee Precision 7 5 ons If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench OpenController Reference 5 Click the B button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target
179. col mode when the control set is run or stopped in OpenController Run mode Local Record The Master Mode control allows the user to tie OpenController s run and stop states to protocol mode settings The run state can be configured to automatically change the protocol mode to Record Preview or Standby The stop state can be configured to automatically change the protocol mode to Standby or Idle Using the Master Mode control to control the experimental protocol from an OpenController control set allows the user greater flexibility during an experiment For example the Stop state could be linked to Standby mode In Standby mode the protocol continues to run but no data is stored to the tank The Run state could be linked to Record mode so that when adjustments to the control settings are complete and the control is run recording will resume If multiple OpenController clients are open the OpenWorkbench protocol status can be updated from any client or OpenWorkbench This ensures that the most recently applied settings are always in effect Master Mode Control Settings 118 In the Common parameters group there are drop down menus for Mode on Run and Mode on Stop These settings allow the user to choose which protocol mode will be selected when the control set is run or stopped Mode on Run None The Master Mode control does not change the status of the OpenWorkbench protocol on run Use this if you want another contro
180. controlled using these files which are compiled from circuits designed using TDT s RP visual design studio RPvdsEx Users can generate their own compiled circuit files for use with OpenEx or select one of the Example compiled circuit files provided by TDT RCO Circuit File Area The RCO circuit file area is used to assign a compiled circuit file to a device Amp1 Processor File Name m RCO Circuit File File Name Standard RCOs Sorted 4 Channel with Filtering 25K Type2 rcx E Circuit Notes Single channel collection For extracellular type signals In the RCO Circuit File area the user can type a path and file name or browse to a compiled circuit file Clicking the Standard RCOs button or the Browse button opens a compiled circuit file Select dialog box which functions much like a standard Windows Open dialog box Note You can assign a compiled circuit file using a dialog box launched from the Assign RCO command on the Device menu or by right clicking a device and selecting Assign RCO from the shortcut menu Circuit Notes Memos that are a part of the compiled circuit file can be displayed in this area Only memos that begin with a greater than symbol gt are displayed Important Notes about Selecting Compiled Circuit Files Because OpenEx relies on certain circuit constructs or groupings of circuit components and parameter tags the selected compiled circuit files must have been designed f
181. cription Returns the Communication type Single Computer Dual Computer nDev is the device handle for the VSG2 5 Returns the ID value associated with the handle nDev is the device handle for the VSG2 5 Returns the string error message associated with the error code errorCode is the device handle for the VSG2 5 Returns the status of the communication between the computer and the VSG2 5 card Returns TCP address and communication status or error nDev is the device handle for the VSG2 5 Returns the last String value associated with a function call nDev is the device handle of the VSG2 5 Returns the device type this will almost always be a VSG2 5 nDev is the device handle for the VSG2 5 OpenController Reference System Communication Calls System Communication methods are used to control the VSG2 5 hardware and to start and stop the VB Scripts communication with the hardware The following is the description of the VSG System Communication functions Prototype case Returns Description insensitive VSG Init String devName Long Required to initialize communication between Boolean forcelogon the OpenEx application and the VSG2 5 hardware Example Returns the handle for the VSG2 5 hardware This identifies the hardware device and is used by all other function calls to the hardware Form nDevzVSG Init false VSG_Close long nDev Long Required to Close the communication link between
182. cro are necessary for this tutorial 34 OpenEx Tutorials Adding Signal Acquisition To implement store pooling in RPvdsEx two or more data storage macro are added and assigned to separate processors Each macro is then Fed a subset of channels for processing from the multi channel data stream All macros to be pooled must be configured with the same setup properties such as the store name number of channels and window width and one store macro must be identified as the primary Store This macro determines the total number of channels and contains the construct header for the data Store Any subsequent macros are considered members of the pool and are ordered sequentially In this tutorial we will be using two storage macros to implement store pooling Since the total number of channels needed is 32 each member of the pool will acquire 16 channels Since we are working primarily with streaming data a streaming storage component such as the Stream Store MC macro should be used Configuring the Primary Store To add and configure the primary store 1 Click the E Insert Macro icon select the Stream Store MC macro from the Macrosl Data Saving Streaming folder click Insert then click the workspace to add the macro 2 Double click the macro to access the macro documentation and setup menus Adjust Properties for Stream Store MC x Overview setup Options Store Pooling Macro Name Stream Store MC
183. ct an additional output line with a NextSweep or NextCond hop should be added Cycle Usage 1 7 0 CycUsage lt lt _ gt 8 84835 pve Sid ace it A 5 zCycUse Uses This is an optional construct that can be added to any compiled circuit file Description This construct allows OpenWorkbench to monitor and display the cycle usage Details The zCycUse parameter tag is used to read the current cycle usage from the CycUsage component for display in OpenWorkbench The cycle usage is displayed when a protocol is running Sweep and Condition Control Constructs A variety of circuit constructs can be used for precise control of the count period and behavior of sweep or condition loops Sweep and condition loops are used to control the length start and end of a stimulus presentation or acquisition circuit that does not use sweep or condition control runs continuously Sweep and condition circuits are triggered either by a trigger or through a user defined paradigm asynchronous Sweeps or conditions are used if acquisition or presentation requires a defined length or intervals Sweep and condition constructs are used by the OpenEx protocols The sweep and condition constructs are gt Basic Sweep Control Sweep Control with End Checking Asynchronous Next Sweep Control Basic Condition Control Condition Control with End Checking Asynchronous Next Condition Control Basic Nesting Control VV VV ON ON V Nesting Co
184. ctor Visible z Pile Depth 30 Multi View Enabled Nam views Num Columns cea 4 Li Target s pg 216 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Data Source Set pg 188 Behavior pg 196 Channel Selector pg 188 Multi View pg 189 Colors pg 188 Refresh Control pg 190 Scaling pg 190 X Axis Setup pg 191 Y Axis Setup pg 192 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Filtering pg 189 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController is running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 9 OpenController Reference Click the B button in the Data Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target The source target should be an OpenWorkbench Store To create a pile plot the source target should be a signal snippet A Tip look for this icon to identify snippets in the Select Target dialog box Enter the desired channel in the Target Channel box If the data includes a sort code uses the Sort Spike component select the By SortCode color coding method in the Category Coloring box Click OK A basic pile plot is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be runn
185. cuit header is required and no time stamp tag is required Simply add dGain as a secondary tag of Tick in the OpenWorkbench Stores settings Then the gain will be stored and it will automatically use the time stamps of Tick 329 OpenEx User s Guide 330 MultiLatch Uses Each compiled circuit file that will be used to acquire asynchronous scalar values from multiple secondary tags must include latch or multilatch construct s Description This construct provides a way to store secondary tag values latched to data tags in the primary triggered scalar construct Details The MultiLatch component stores parameter values from the PC until triggered An input line is used to trigger the MultLatch component When triggered it sends the new values to output lines This ensures that signal parameters are updated after the stimulus has been presented The latch also updates the data parameter tags When the software polls the variables it will detect the updated values and store them Using a MultiLatch to store multiple scalar values as secondary tags More than one secondary tag can be latched to a triggered scalar data construct by adding multiple Latch components with tags for saving the data of the additional scalar values The number of components can be reduced by using a MultLatch component to latch three values at once 1 1 0 PulseTrain2 OnPer 24414 6nPulse 1 Enab Yes oRst Run PLate 0 PCount 0 1 8 0 iTim
186. d an exception and has been closed when a percent sign is used in a graphic frame If the Windows Script Debugger has not been installed loading any OpenController files that include VBScript components causes the OpenController to crash Install the latest version of Windows Script Debugger It can be downloaded from this URL http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 2f465be0 94fd 4569 b3c4 dffdf1 9ccd99 amp displaylang en 347 OpenEx User s Guide 348 Note that Windows XP and Windows 2000 do not come with the Windows Script Debugger installed so this will need to be installed when using OpenEx with VBScript First noted in 1 0 After adding a new control from the OpenController Controls menu international users are unable to modify the Value properties for a Slider or any control that uses the Value property sheet To avoid this problem international users should open the Regional Options in the Windows Control Panel and change the following settings on the Numbers tab Change the Decimal Symbol to a period Change the Digit Grouping Symbol to a comma Found in all versions On some systems the Windows Installer launches erroneously asking the user to insert the Microsoft Office 2000 CD ROM The action must be canceled several times before normal operation can continue This problem has been seen when starting OpenWorkbench and when setting the Server of a control in OpenController First noted in 1 1
187. d in the Num Views box Click OK To modify a multi channel raster plot to view by sort code 1 ig dpa qe Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View In the View By box select Sort Code from the drop down list Update the Num Views and View Index Offset values as needed Click OK OpenScope Reference Creating XY Plots XY plots provide a useful means of looking changes in two continuously varying values In OpenScope the Y axis and the X axis are selected from available data events The XY plot can be used to plot positional information such as XY coordinates for an animal moving in a tank or it can be used to plot data from an eye or head tracker This type of plot can also be used when the study subject needs to be in a specific position for accurate data acquisition The XY plot can help the user to quickly determine if there were any significant changes in the subject s position such as the head position relative to the position of a sound or visual stimulus To quickly create an XY plot for a single channel of the selected data 1 Drag a data event from the Tank Select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens Select Plot Type Histogram Raster Scroll Feature Activity 2 Click XY The XY plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the feature plot
188. d mode OpenWorkbench Reference OpenWorkbench Menus OpenWorkbench File Menu Some Items on the OpenWorkbench File menu are not available when running in OpenProject New Configuration Open Configuration Save Configuration Save Configuration As Data Tank Recent File Preferences Exit Opens a new OpenWorkbench file Opens the Open dialog box so that an existing OpenWorkbench file can be opened Saves the current OpenWorkbench file with the current name If the file has not previously been saved the Save As dialog box opens so that the file can be named Opens the Save As dialog box so that the OpenWorkbench file can be saved with a new name Opens the Data Storage window so that a tank can be assigned for data storage n existing tank can be selected or a new tank can be created The third section of the File menu lists recently used files Clicking a file name opens the file Opens the Workbench Preferences dialog box Closes the OpenWorkbench application Note To save changes to a file that is part of an OpenEx project save the project OpenWorkbench Setup Menu The Setup menu provides access to settings used to control how stimuli are presented and how data is acquired Default settings are suitable for the most basic experimental protocol continuous acquisition Polling and Performance Triggers and Mode Switching Sweep Loop Condition Loop Stimulation Timing Acquisition Timing
189. d password for Value Data in the following form tankuser tttuser be sure to include the asterisks and spaces Registered tanks on the server can now be accessed from the client machine 297 OpenEx User s Guide 298 Appendix A Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference In this appendix you will find OpenEx naming conventions and basic information about RPvdsEx non macros circuit constructs 299 OpenEx User s Guide 300 Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference Overview In RPvdsEx macros simplify circuit design allowing the user to drop in pre debugged circuit chunks guaranteed to provide smooth integration with OpenEx TDT recommends using macros whenever possible If a macro is not available for a given task the user must use extra caution to design the circuit with all OpenEx conventions in mind OpenEx Naming Conventions OpenEx uses parameter tags in the compiled circuit file to recognize change and record parameter values OpenEx recognizes and classifies parameter tags using the tag name Parameter tags fall into three categories 1 Parameter tags reserved by OpenEx applications for use with Triggering and Control constructs These cannot be changed 2 Parameter tags used in Data Stores Events These have reserved prefixes but the suffixes are variable TDT recommends that the suffixes be standardized for better inter operability of circuits 3 Parameter tags for controls In many cases controls w
190. d using a spreadsheet like interface and pop up lists Data Browsing Data can be previewed in a table or as a scroll plot A time control window allows users to quickly navigate data in the scroll plot view Data can be viewed along with epoch data allowing the researcher to modify data selections and create subsets of data on the fly Data Export OpenBrowser provides for flexible data export Several file formats are supported and users can choose to export all data to a single file or to export subsets of data to separate files Workspace Basics About the Open Browser Workspace OpenBrowser includes a data viewing area and two collapsible sub windows A menu bar and toolbar are provided for easy access to commands lolx Eo L r v e Data Selection Table Window Pesca eneen cena Renew Pesca Roto recens eren ce erent Data View Area Time Line Window 267 OpenEx User s Guide Data Selection Table Window The Data Selection Table window allows users to select events from a data tank Data is selected and arranged in rows based on the tank block event and other associated variables The Data Selection Table window also allows users to design a custom configuration file that contains all the export variables and information for a data row Data View Area The data view area displays data selected in the Data Selection Table win
191. d visualize data in real time These details are handled behind the scenes within the RPvdsEx macros Macros simplify circuit design allowing the user to drop in pre debugged circuit chunks guaranteed to provide smooth integration with OpenEx If a macro is not available for a given task the user must use extra caution to design the circuit with all OpenEx conventions in mind More details about working directly with parameter tags and non macro constructs are available in the Appendix A Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference beginning on page 299 A Brief Review of Terminology Compiled circuit files are RP control objects designed by users or TDT for use with OpenEx and other applications May be in rco or rcx format 63 OpenEx User s Guide RPvdsEx files contain circuit diagrams designed in a visual drag and drop environment May be in rpd rpx or rcx format Circuits are made up of components Each component does a set task such as generate a waveform store in memory or send a signal to hardware outputs Circuit constructs are a group of components that perform a defined task in OpenEx A circuit construct will have a minimum or required component structure and secondary or alternate component structures Macro Construct Mapping Table 64 Each of the core group of Macros listed below provides the functionality of one or more of the circuit constructs typically used in OpenEx projects Detailed information abo
192. dardTimeControl rcm CoreSweepControl SweepNum a SweepDone Primary Store Name Tick Al xl Core Timing Control for OpenE x Notice that symbols in the center of the icon indicate the class of macro Q timing and whether or not it is intended for use with OpenEx a used in OpenEx 3 Click Insert After the dialog box closes click the workspace to place the component in the workspace You can double click the macro icon to view parameter menus and full documentation for the macro No changes to the default settings of the CoreSweepControl macro are necessary for this tutorial Adding Signal Acquisition 16 To illustrate the components required to store and display data we ll acquire two channels of analog data directly from the output of RPvdsEx waveform generator components These could later be replaced with A D inputs to continuously acquire display and store two channels of external analog data RPvdsEx provides a variety of data storage macros and selecting the appropriate storage component for the type of data that is being acquired is extremely important When browsing the macro folders in RPvdsEx you ll find that the macros are organized into logical folders by type such as streaming or Segment Snip Macro names are also designed to provide important information such as the number of channels or MC for multi channel macros that support higher channel counts Selecting the macro in the browse window
193. dified quickly to produce a complete set of plots Multiple plots can also be copied and pasted from other existing files 221 OpenEx User s Guide Before plots can be added a tank must be available and selected in the Tank Select window If no tanks are available in the tank select window a tank must be added to the OpenEx registry About Plot Settings 222 Plots can be modified using the Setup Properties dialog box When plots are grouped setting changes can be made to all plots in the group Plot settings are grouped into parameter groups The available settings are similar for each plot type Settings unique to a plot type can generally be found under the Common and Behavior parameter groups Plot Setting Parameter Groups Common The most commonly changed settings for the selected plot type are displayed in the Common parameter group Related settings are also grouped by color within the common parameter group The settings found in this group can also be found in the other parameter groups There is a Common parameter group for each plot type pile scroll histogram raster XY feature chart and activity Data Source The Data Source group includes settings to identify the data source as well as settings to control source channel sorting code and the data source definition Additional settings to identify a second data source are available in the XY Plot Data Source group Multi View The Multi View group includes se
194. displayed W Setup Properties for XY Plot x EEUE CT ete al Common v Source Name Y Axis m Source Channel o 1H Settings groups include Common pg 263 Data Source pg 263 Behavior pg 260 Multi View pg 256 Scaling pg 257 SeuceNmeXAds77 CbePoms ww Fe Vien Enabled i EE 71 ow xd Refresh Control pg 257 X Axis Setup pg 258 Y Axis Setup pg 258 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 256 247 OpenEx User s Guide Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group 3 Enter the desired channel number in the Source Channel box Channel information is available in the corresponding OpenWorkbench file 4 Click the Source Name X Axis box to select the desired data event for the X axis An event selection box opens 5 Click the desired data event to select it and click OK 6 Inthe Cloud Points box enter the minimum number of points to be displayed The plot will refresh when the plot reaches twice the value set 7 Click OK The XY plot is configured for viewing a single channel of data The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse After a single channel XY plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for multi channel viewing To modify a XY plot to view multiple channels of data 1 Double clic
195. displayed and hidden OpenBrowser Help Menu About OpenBrowser Displays version and copyright information for OpenBrowser 269 OpenEx User s Guide Data Selection About the Data Selection Table Window 270 The Data Selection Table arranges information in rows and columns The first three rows define the configuration properties for exporting the data and are separated from the data selection rows by a header row The data selection rows determine what data is available for export and display Each row can export data from a single tank block and event To export data from multiple tanks blocks or events a new row of data must be added L3 OpenBrowser Server Local p iz mi x Tref Check Boxes Row 1 This row allows users to select an epoch to be used as a time reference When the check box in this row is selected for an epoch the time stamp of the event is based on its position relative to the last epoch as opposed to the start of the block This is particularly useful if the data is to be exported to NeuroExplorer M or Plexon s Offline Sorter Show Check Boxes Row 3 Selecting the a check box in this row includes the associated column information such as the TANK BLOCK CHAN SORT name and the associated TIME time stamp when the data is exported or viewed in the Table view Multi File Check Box Cell A3 If the Multi File check box is selected when data is exported then the data in
196. dow Data can be displayed in either a scroll plot or table view The scroll plot view displays the waveform data and event times for time reference epochs and can be expanded and contracted using the Time Line window The table view displays data in a row and column format In this view data and time stamp information can be copied and pasted into other applications such as Microsoft Excel A shortcut menu with Cut Copy and Paste commands is also available in this view Time Line Window The Time Line window displays the block s timeline and allows users to move through the selected data using the timeline Menus 268 OpenBrowser File Menu Some Items on the OpenBrowser File menu are not available when running in OpenProject Note To save changes to a file that is part of an OpenEx project save the project Tank Opens the Select Server window Server New Opens a new OpenBrowser file Open Opens the Open dialog box so that an existing OpenBrowser file can be opened Save Saves the current OpenBrowser file with the current name If the file has not previously been saved the Save As dialog box opens so that the file can be named Save As Opens the Save As dialog box so that the OpenBrowser file can be saved with a new name Export Exports the currently selected row Current Row Export Exports multiple selected rows Several adjacent rows can be selected by Selected holding down the SHIFT key and clicking the row numbers N
197. dow width remain the same as the primary store To add and configure the second store macro 1 Select the Stream Store MC macro that you just added to the workspace 2 Select Copy from the Edit menu 3 Click the workspace and select Paste from the Edit menu 36 OpenEx Tutorials 4 Double click the newly pasted Stream Store MC macro to access the macro documentation and setup menus 5 Click the Store Pooling tab or click Next twice 6 Since this will be the 2nd store in the pool select 2nd from the Pooling Position drop down box Select 2 from the Members In Pool drop down box Finally click Done at the bottom of the properties dialog Stream Store MC Store nChan 16 el Stor Wavett 7 32 Float 24444 4Hz 525 9 kBytes Sec The Stream Store MC macro should now display the next 16 channels of the store in the macro property summary display Splitting up Processing Tasks We have now configured the pooled store containing 2 members To take advantage of the multi processor architecture of the device we must assign one of the members to another DSP processor This will be accomplished through the use of the DspAssign component Note Splitting processing tasks across DSPs can be done in two ways pages and the DspAssign component This tutorial features a small number of components and macros so the DspAssign component is sufficient for this task Larger circuits may benefit from using pages See the RPvdsEx
198. e Latch tTick M 9Trg 0 1 9 0 In1 0 20 4 Delay 3 P In2 0 0 1 dDelay r5 In3 0 20 4 Frequency Frequency 73 po Trg 0 L dFrequency In this circuit Tick is the primary Store and three secondary tags are stored dGain dDelay and dFrequency All of the values are latched at the same time as Tick so they can all share the same time stamp values Each of the three must be added as secondary tags of Tick in the OpenWorkbench Stores settings Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference Serial Store Uses Each compiled circuit file that will be used to acquire list or buffered data from secondary tags must include a serial store construct Description A serial store can store buffered data When used for a secondary tag two or more buffers can be acquired using the same time stamps Using a SerStore to store a data list as a secondary tag Storing a data list as a secondary tag involves the same basic process as storing scalar values as secondary tags First the primary Store must be created the secondary Store is then created by making only the data portion of the Store with no time stamps or circuit header Finally the secondary tag is added to the OpenWorkbench Stores settings of the primary Store The difference with data lists is that the data is a memory buffer rather than a single scalar value 1 3 0 iTime gt SerStore Size 1000 r 9WrEnab 1
199. e Controls menu point to Numeric Displays and click 7 Segment Display 10 Click the grid to position the control 185 OpenEx User s Guide 186 11 12 ox File Edit Controls View Run Help D Hd Ba HP Filter 1100 0 50 0 8 B Qa a e e l e e e Double click the control to display the properties dialog box In the Source Target box enter the source path In this case the Source Target is the Value setting found in the Value Control parameter group settings for the control named cSlider 3 The source target can be entered using the Select Target dialog box or by typing a greater than sign gt followed by the source path If the Select Target dialog box is used the greater than sign is added automatically Setup Properties for LedDisplay x O SewerName iscs f Source Target coste Vanel Tastewe 5 te Caption Led Color Mme OO O Modify any other settings an needed In this example the Caption Text setting has been changed to HP Filter Setting and the Auto Caption check box has been cleared Click OK Click Record or Preview in the OpenWorkbench System Controls Click the w Toggle Mode button on the OpenController toolbar The control set is run and active Moving the slider will now change both the filter setting on the Device and the value in the 7 segment display OpenController Reference Agno Eb gt bm wo HP Filter HP Filter Se
200. e Grouped with Controls In this example a frame has been used to group a pile plot with a slider controlling the spike threshold and a value watch displaying the current threshold value 178 OpenController Reference Creating a Frame To quickly create a frame Click the Controls menu point to Misc and click Graphic Frame The pointer changes to indicate that the frame can be added 1l Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the frame The frame is added to the grid area Double click the frame to display the properties dialog box Type the desired caption in the Caption Text box Resize the frame and drag controls to be added to the frame Oe pe Select the frame and related controls 6 Click the Edit menu and click Group A basic frame is created Before running controls the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the controls click Run on the menu bar About SigGen Control The SigGen control gives users access to TDT s SigGenRP signal generation application SigGenRP is a program for generating simple and complex waveforms The SigGenRP application allows users to control all properties of the signal Users familiar with SigGenRP can use their existing SigGenRP files with little modification or change This control provides users with the ability to use and control a stimulus file designed with SigGenRP as part of an OpenEx experiment 2151 xd wd e p tuu
201. e Workbench icon to add OpenWorkbench to the project OpenProject icon on your desktop and create a new project 3 Double click the RPvdsEx icon to add one instance of RPvdsEx to the project OpenProject Configuration I Xi Project Name Tutorial2 File Location CATDTYOpenExMyProjects X Description acquires 32 channels of continuous waveforms Utilizes store pooling to split data storage across two separate DSPs z View Edit Applications gt Launch Details e i WorkBench Browser Controller RPvdsEx 4 Click OK Designing a Processing Chain to Implement Store Pooling Click the RPvdsEx 1 icon in the OpenProject window 2 Inthe RPvdsEx window click the File menu and click New 3 Click the S Device Setup button and select your high performance processor from the Type drop down list 4 Click OK Adding Required Timing and Synchronization All timing and synchronization will be handled by the CoreSweepControl macro To add a CoreSweepControl macro In RPvdsEx click the EJ sert Macro icon on the RPvdsEx Components toolbar 2 Inthe dialog box select the CoreSweepControl macro from the Macros Timing folder 3 Click Insert After the dialog box closes click the workspace to place the component You can double click the macro icon to view parameter menus and full documentation for the macro No changes to the default settings of the CoreSweepControl ma
202. e dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group OpenController Reference lll Setup Properties for SigGen xj Settings groups include Common pg 208 Target s pg 217 Sever Name DEFAULT a Caption Border pg 187 Sien Wavetom Target Ja Polling pe213 ButerenhTags aul sizcion Specs ne 190 Target Channel G Canton Tent O Initialize Mode None SigGenFie A on 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 5 Inthe SigGen Waveform Target box select the parameter tag associated with the SigGen waveform buffer The parameter tag will be in the following location in the Select Target tree DeviceslNamelBuffersl The color of buffer icon will be pink to indicate a memory buffer as opposed to a coefficient or delay line 6 Inthe Buffer Length Target box select the parameter tag associated with the length of the buffer The parameter tag will be in the following location in the Select Target tree DeviceslNamelScalarsl The color of the scalar will be light blue to indicate an integer value 7 Select the startin
203. e name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form dddd parTag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together and the target is the source the target name will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift When the target is the destination the target name will be a lesser than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g lt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Initialize Value Type a value to be used as an initial value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop do
204. e name d tag root For example if the tag root is Freq then it will look for the tag dFreq Depending on the type of data construct being used other tags will be required as well including sync parameters s tags and time stamps t tags For the tag root Freq these would be sFreq and tFreq When storing multiple channels suffixes may be used with these parameter tags as well More detail about each of these tags can be found in the OpenEx naming conventions and in the documentation for each particular data construct When discussing data constructs it is also important to mention secondary tags Secondary tags are a way of sharing time stamps when storing pieces of data that are always stored at the same time For example if a complete construct with circuit header is set up for saving the sweep number parameter other stimulus parameters can be saved at the same time with the same time stamp by listing them as secondary tags There are several methods for using secondary tags For more information see Secondary Tag Constructs page 328 Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference Data Construct Types Type 1 Triggered Scalar oxScalar Uses Description Details About the oxScalar component Tag Root identifies the base name of the construct All parameter tags in the circuit that use the base name will be associated with the oxScalar component HandShake indicates whether a software trigger will be used for the hands
205. e number of channels of data acquired By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Enter the number of columns to display in the Num Columns box By default Category Coloring is set to By SortCode and a different color will automatically be assigned to each sort code When data is not associated with a sort code it will be assigned a gray color If sort codes are not present in the data change this setting to By Channel to display data points in brighter colors for easier viewing Click OK After a multi channel feature plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for viewing a range of channels To modify a scroll plot to view a range of channels 1 2 3 6 250 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter the total number of channels of data to be viewed in the Num Views box By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 To display multiple channels beginning with another channel modify the index offset To modify the index offset value click the Parameter Group value box and click Multi View In the View Index Offset box enter the number of channels to offset lll Setup Properties for Feature Plot x EEA GANGE Multi View OO Wmv C Mum Couns 1 Ho View Index Offset Show View Index one For example to begin viewing from channel 5 enter an Index Offset value of 4 The plot will begin with channel 5 a
206. e resets Control values to their defaults When Record or Preview is selected the plot window is displayed in the main window area and status information in displayed in the message window area By default the system will automatically switch to Idle mode if 100 errors are reported in a single recording session The error counter is reset for each new recording session The number of errors can be set in the OpenWorkbench Preferences dialog box zTrigger B Button This option is activated when the Use zTrgB check box is selected under Triggers and Mode Switching on the Workbench setup menu 85 OpenEx User s Guide When the zTrgB button is illuminated pressing it will start a conditional trial or trigger any event on devices that have the zTrigB line enabled Using the Messages Window When OpenWorkbench is running the Messages window displays a scrolling list of OpenWorkbench messages You can double click any message to display the full message in a message box Messages may contain information about OpenWorkbench activity TTank activity or system errors Error messages provide the user with details about the error xj p Store Snip Idling E passe Store PDec Idling JV Verbose Store Rate Idling Device PAS 1 Idling Find Err Device Full Pro Idling Tank Tanki Idling Clear Tank Tanki Tank Closed a Status Messages Ready Hardware Loaded Data Storage C TDT OpenEx T
207. e stamping Time stamps should not be confused with the RPvdsEx component TimeStamp which is used by the RV8 356 Glossary 357 Index 7 7 segment display ssssssss 131 Cheating eiiis ied 131 OVerView 22 cceececeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeees 131 A acquisition Control 110 Advance Setup dialog box 98 100 Arbitrary sample rates 98 B biquad coefficient generator 175 erae fe 176 OVOIVIGW se etie sta ette tina 175 C changing file names 52 57 circuit constructs essesss 63 301 acquisition o oerna ea a REEERE 314 asynchronous next condition 311 asynchronous next sweep 308 asynchronous scalar 317 biquad filtering 75 334 PURE ciem it te ces 318 clock generator 305 CONGIION LEN 309 condition control with end checking 310 continuous waveform 327 Control niece 65 304 iT 329 E ete EE ERE 321 multilatch 4 2 tees 330 naming conventions 301 nesting basic sessao Kia 312 nesting with end tracking 313 other timing seeusss 315 OVOeIVIOW eeeesseseeeeeennnnnennn 63 301 serial store eeesessses 331 SigGen control
208. each row will be saved to a separate file Header Cells Row 4 This row displays the header names associated with a data tank The first seven header names columns C I are standard for all tanks and cannot be changed The cells under each column header are used to access the associated variable type Cells in columns J and greater can be used to select epoch header names Column Header Function TANK Select the tank for data access BLOCK Select the block number OpenBrowser Reference EVENT Select the associated Store TIME Select time stamp values CHAN Enter a channel number or range of channels Leaving this column blank includes all channels SORT Enter a sort code or range of sort codes associated with a snippet event DATA Not implemented at this time Allows the user to select epoch variables to use as time stamp reference markers A row must be selected before an epoch can be selected Right click an empty header cell to add an epoch Data Selection Cells Rows 5 and Greater Users can fill multiple rows with data export information For example an experiment might consist of a single block of data with multiple events An OpenBrowser export file would consist of a series of export rows each with different events and possible channels within an event This allows a user to configure an OpenBrowser file to organize how the data is exported Exp Config Buttons Column A Clicking the Exp Config button for a row disp
209. eading the values and storing them to the tank it will reset the latch if using a handshake protocol or continuously read the values and only save them when they change The triggered scalar should only be used when the data arrives at a rate less than once per second If scalar data values must be stored more frequently a data list Type 3 construct must be used instead Each data buffer must include parameter tags using the tag root with the following prefixes and suffixes t prefix for the time stamp parameter S prefix for the sync parameter d prefix for the data tags that are stored Handshaking is optional If there is no handshake the latching of the 317 OpenEx User s Guide 318 time occurs through OpenWorkbench polling OpenWorkbench polls for changes in the time stamp parameter tag t prefix and then stores the data when the time value changes The example below uses a triggered scalar construct with handshaking to store the sweep number On each sweep the Counter is incremented changing the value of the dSweep tag Also the latch is triggered which stores the current time value via tSweep Since handshaking is being used OpenWorkbench will look for the sSweep tag to be set high when new data has arrived So also on each sweep the RSFlipFlop is set which causes sSweep to be equal to 1 After OpenWorkbench reads the data and time values it issues a Soft 1 trigger which resets the RSFlipFlop and sSweep becomes 0
210. eamplifier Overview Sorts and acquires 64 channels of neural spike data LFPs are also extracted and stored for all 64 channels The active channel can be monitored via the Port E 9 front panel BNC Tuning Curve Projects Project File TDT OpenEx Examples ManualTuner ManualTuner wsp Hardware RP2 1 Real Time Processor for stimulation and RA16BA Medusa Base Station with RAI6PA or RA4PA Medusa PreAmp for acquisition Overview Generates an auditory tuning curve or frequency threshold curve mapping the threshold boundary of a neuron or fiber Allows users to approximate the neuron s center frequency or frequency of maximum sensitivity It acquires sorted spike data as well as measures of level and frequency Project File TDT OpenEx Examples AutoTuner AutoTuner wsp Hardware RX6 MultiFunction Processor for stimulation and RX5 Pentusa Base Station with RAI6PA or RA4PA Medusa PreAmp for acquisition Overview Uses the characteristic frequency found by running the Manual Tuning Curve example to generate stimuli with a random sequence of frequencies and intensities This automated stimulus presentation is then used to determine the tuning curve of a cell This example demonstrates how scripted elements can be incorporated into the OpenEx environment to provide extended functionality Evoked Response Project Project File TDT OpenEx Examples EvokedResponse EvokedResponse wsp Hardware RP2 1 Real Time Processor for stimulation and RA16
211. ec Plot A Spk Control Window six imate Track Animation Speed 4 Double gt x r a T 62 400s ok lt b AAEE RU k b Ready Time Control Window Messages Window 226 OpenScope Reference Using the Tank Select Window The Tank Select window allows you to identify the data to be plotted Before you can plot data the tank containing the data must be selected Users can create plots by dragging a data event to the grid area The window is divided into three areas TANK BLOCK and EVENT Clicking an object in any area selects the object Right clicking an area displays a shortcut menu that includes common commands TANK e The TANK area lists tanks that have been added to the OpenEx registry The Details view displays the name and path for each tank MANK Click a tank to select it ee TANK BLOCK The BLOCK area displays the blocks available in the tank selected in the Tank area The Details view displays a name date and starting time duration stop time owner and memo area for each block of Block 2 data in the selected tank Click a block to select it GBlck3 EVENT The EVENT area displays information about events OpenWorkbench Stores for the block selected in the BLOCK area Click an event to select it Drag an event to the grid to create a plot using that data The Select Tank window is accessed from the Data Source command on the File menu and can be used as an al
212. ecimated or plot decimated data Data is decimated to reduce the amount of data stored to disk or being transferred from the hardware to the PC and in cases where very low sample rates are necessary device a named group of OpenWorkbench settings which define which System 3 hardware such as RP2 RL2 RA16 RXn RZ or RV8 or attenuators PA5 are controlled from OpenWorkbench and what compiled circuit files will be used to control the specified hardware Also the hardware component specified in the Device settings E epoch an event or sections of a tank block that are associated with the tank s timeline Epoch events can be scalar variables including triggered scalars data lists and their associated secondary tags Epoch events can be used by other OpenEx applications such as OpenScope and OpenBrowser to sort and display tank data event data that is stored in the data tank such as a scalar value snippet waveform or continuous waveform Note not all significant occurrences e g spikes are events In OpenEx an event refers only to stored data H hand shaking an optional protocol where a flag sync tag is set to signify that data is ready for downloading and OpenWorkbench resets the flag after the data has been downloaded Often used with oxBuffer stores Idle an OpenWorkbench protocol mode in which devices are not loaded and are not running All values are cleared from the hardware including values set in OpenController
213. ect of an experiment For example users might develop one control set to be used in an exploratory fashion to understand the general properties of the experimental system and a second control set to run tests that are saved for later analysis OpenController includes a variety of built in controls such as gauges switches and plots These controls can be added to a control set and customized by the user The controls can be roughly grouped according to OpenController s two principal tasks OpenController Two Tasks OpenController s primary task is to allow users to control experimental parameters in real time Parameters such as filter settings threshold settings for unit activity and stimulus presentation variables can be modified from customizable controls within a control set These controls or modifiers can send values to the system via OpenWorkbench and parameter tags within a compiled circuit file running on a Device OpenController s secondary task is to monitor the acquired data and parameters associated with it Some controls read and display precise parameter values while others read and display data from OpenWorkbench Stores These controls or visualization tools acquire information through OpenWorkbench and display it in OpenController according to the user s design How OpenController Works OpenWorkbench generates a map of all the data in Stores and parameter tags of the devices in memory As a client of OpenWorkbench Op
214. ection End 1 must be defined before the color can be applied Section Color 2 Select a color for the second section The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 2 and the section ends should be defined Section Color 3 Select a color for the third section The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 3 and the section ends should be defined Section Color 4 Select a color for the fourth section The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 2 and the section ends should be defined Section Color 5 Select a color for the fifth section The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 2 and the section ends should be defined Section End 1 Enter the value in degrees for the first section s end point along the arc The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 1 Section End 2 Enter the value in degrees for the second section s end point along the arc The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 2 Section End 3 Enter the value in degrees for the third section s end point along the arc The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 3 Section End 4 Enter the value in degrees for the fourth section s end point along the arc The Section Count must be greater than or equal to 4 X Axis Setup Parameter Group Show X Labels Select the check box to display a unit label for the x axis Clear the check box to hide the x axis label X Axis Unit Set name for units that will appear as part of the plot
215. ects of the condition as part of a protocol The settings are enabled when the Condition Loop check box is selected Count Defines the number of sweeps via the zCdCount parameter tag within the compiled circuit file Period Defines the period of the sweep via the zCdPeriod parameter tag within the compiled circuit file Stop When Done Halts the experiment when all sweeps are completed requires end checking construct This box should be checked if the count is not set to 1 Otherwise data will still be stored to the tank after the Count is stopped at zero External Control of the Next Condition If an asynchronous next condition control construct is included in the compiled circuit file the period and count can be controlled using OpenController an external trigger or through a custom circuit design Setting the Period to 0 will allow flexible control of the period Setting the Count to will allow flexible control of the count 109 OpenEx User s Guide 110 Stimulation Timing These settings are available from the OpenWorkbench Setup menu Timing controls are used to control the start and duration of acquisition stimulus presentation and other actions Different stimulus and acquisition timing controls provide independent control over the experimental paradigm Before setting timing controls the sweep and or condition controls must be enabled Stimulation Stimulate Timing xj The settings under Stimulation can only be I
216. ed and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Hidden when running when the controls are run the editor will be hidden from view 7 Click OK 8 Click in the editing area of the control and begin typing to write the script Writing VBScriptEx control scripts The script control supports the standard VB Script language and TDTs extended functions Extended functions add screen output and system flow controls to the VB Script language and provide access to data targets by the simple read and write commands There are three types of data targets Device Targets The script control can communicate with devices running on the OpenWorkbench server The OpenWorkbench server loads multiple devices RPco circuits saved in compiled circuit files generated by RPvdsEx Each RPco device contains tags for data input and output The script performs stimulus control by communicating with these tags To specify a device target use the format DeviceName TagName For example to access the Frequency tag in the device RP 2 use RP 2 Frequency Control Targets The script control can also communicate with other controls within the same OpenController file A script can write a value to other controls such as a value watch control to display it or change the caption text of the control To specify a control target use the control name and the
217. ed and configured for export Data is selected using the Data Selection Table window When multiple rows of data have been selected the user can choose to export multiple rows to a single file or to export each row to a separate file Single or Multi File export is determined using the Multi File check box in the Data Selection Table window If exporting to multiple files each row must be configured before the export process begins Individual rows of data can be configured for export at any time using the Exp Config buttons If exporting to a single file the export configuration can be defined during the export process If the export configuration has not been completed prior to export the Data Export Format Configuration dialog box will be displayed during the export process Exporting From the Data Table View The data in the data table can be copied and pasted directly to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet This will save all the information about blocks events time stamps channel sort and Epoch information displayed in the table view It does not export the waveform data Using The Data Export Format Configuration Dialog Box 278 The Data Export Format Configuration dialog box is used to configure data for export before or during the export process To open the Data Export Format Configuration dialog box click the Exp Config button for a row The settings available depend on the export format selected in the File Type box in the upper le
218. ed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the 7 segment display Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the source target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Led Color Select a color for the segments of the numeric display from a color palette Number Digits Enter the number of digits to be displayed By default the leading unused digits will be displayed as spaces The total number of digits should be sufficient to display the desired precision Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point The precision value should be less than the Number Digits value to display the desired precision Biquad Coefficient Generator Common Parameters Server Name Select the se
219. ed line while the execution is paused DE Step Into F8 Execute the current line If the current line is a subroutine or function call stop on the first line of that subroutine or function If the script is not active start it Step Over Shift F8 Execute to the next line If the current line is a subroutine or function call execute that subroutine or function completely m Iml Step Out Ctrl F8 steps out of the current subroutine or function a The focus must be on the script control to make the accelerate keys F5 F8 and F9 function The focus will be lost from the script control when the window area outside the script control is clicked Click the control to set focus on the script control OpenController Reference Biquad Coefficient Generators About Biquad Coefficient Generators The System 3 platform relies primarily on digital filtering with filters implemented through RPvdsEx components within the compiled circuit file Biquad filters inherently more stable than other IIR filters are the filter of choice for many OpenEx applications Their superior stability allows users to change filter coefficients on the fly making them ideal for the OpenEx environment The Biquad Coefficient Generator control is one of two ways OpenEx users can modify the coefficients of the Biquad filter Note Filtering macros are available and offer cascaded highpass and lowpass filter sections with selectable order and dynamic f
220. ed to identify the device in other OpenEx clients such as OpenController Clear Clears the current configuration for the selected device effectively disabling the device until another compiled circuit file is assigned Device menu settings are also available in the Device Navigator from a right click shortcut menu OpenWorkbench Stores Menu Options are available from the Stores menu to synchronize Stores change the display of the Storage Specification table and initialize targets The same options are also accessed by right clicking in the Storage Specification table Important select the desired device in the Device Navigator before using the Stores menu commands Refresh Stores Resets all Store properties for the selected device repopulating the Storage Specification table with information gathered from the control file Changes made in the Storage Specification table Store Synchronization Toggles Store Synchronization on or off When Store Synchronization is off Off checked the Stores will not be updated if changes are made to the control circuit Show All Fields Displays additional field in the Storage Specification table Other Options Displays the Advance Settings dialog allowing users to change sampling rates or initialize parameter values OpenWorkbench Reference OpenWorkbench Control Menu The commands on the control menu allow the user to start or stop the experiment from the PC and preview data as it is being
221. een in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Scrolling Plot Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Data Target Select the data event Store name to be plotted Target Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number Caption Text Type caption text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Select the check box to display an automatically generated caption for the plot The auto caption is generated using the Store name Clear the check box to hide the auto caption The auto caption should be hidden if no caption is desired or if a user defined caption should be used Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Channel Selector Visible Select the check box to display a channel selector as part of the control The channel selector is a slider that can be used to control which channel of data is used to animate a single view plot By default the channel selector options include channels one through eight The user can modify the number of channels or offset value in the Channel Selector parameter group Scroll Sections Selects the number of scroll sections to display
222. eere sees ee ee ente etes senose esos ionsar sasso seta sete sete stesse eese tosta seas sean etna sena 113 OpenEx User s Guide About OpenController s eessssssssssseeseeeee nennen nennen nennen sn nnt dae araut aeea Tae adei 115 About Visualization Tools 3 i ED CARE Le EGER GI 115 Abo t Modiflers ict 11 2 nete i eter d car e a eeu a tenor el beta tek eds 116 Understanding Targets sssssssssssssessseeeeenennn enter en nnns tnt sn rentes nn tren rnnt enin 116 Controlling the Experimental Protocol ssssssssse eene nnne nentes 118 MA lelutzoris Marl C EER E 119 Gontrol TYPES 3n eet te p bee e e eed td ete n tr detta 127 linking COMMONS ott oto tube oet t desse ces LP AI Ame E 182 Gontrol Settings Reference etr incen aei dc Re PER Rad nee RU 0 oe RE TERR relig 187 OpenScope I M 219 About OpenScope x ue ied ide ei Him E EE Pe e ee de cu eru a e oet ge dg efe dre 221 About Adding Plots 5 uu er tm c i e eek ee Mes el ied dea toad 221 About Plot Seltihgs 2 3 n e rettet ette Coa tout stet ON d omi otto dues 222 Using Epochs with OpenScope ssssssssssssssess ener entere enne nnns snnt 224 Workspace BASIS aeaiee orb ir enitn a on ee nu IN kai a e ea euh o Seen Ru c 226 Plot IVDO S tue Et eei Eee i deseen eee n odes me eerrerr cree 235 Plot Settings Reference cccceccseeesceceeceeeeeeeeneeeceaeeesaaeseeaa
223. efined TimeRef epoch event As data is animated the next data will only be displayed if the associated epoch event value is less than the high range value Leave at default value of 1 if a range will not be used Time Span Define the maximum value of the X axis using a time stamp value if the Respect TRef Duration check box is cleared 259 OpenEx User s Guide Scroll Behavior Parameters Scroll Sections Set the number of sections to display before scrolling XY Behavior Parameters Cloud Points Set the minimum number of points to display The maximum number of cloud points will be twice the value set The plot will refresh when the maximum number is reached Common Parameter Group 260 Activity Common Parameters Source Name Select the data event Store name from the currently selected tank Color at Min Select the color to be displayed when activity is at defined Min Value Color for values between Min and Max Values are generated using a proportional mix of the defined Colors at Min and Max Color at Max Select the color to be displayed when activity is at defined Min Value Color for values between Min and Max Values are generated using a proportional mix of the defined Colors at Min and Max Min Value Enter the number of spike to be defined as the minimum value which is represented by the defined Color at Min Max Value Enter the number of spike to be defined as the maximum value which is represented by the def
224. efreshed The Scaling group includes settings to control plot scaling including the Auto Scale feature Auto Scale can be disabled None set to scale at all times to ensure all values can be shown on the plot Active or set to scale only during the first 3 seconds Smart The X Axis Setup group includes settings to control labels unit name unit factor and offset for the x axis The X Axis Units Factor defines the scalar of the default number of points The Y Axis Setup group includes settings to control labels unit name unit factor and offset for the y axis The Y Axis Units Factor defines the scalar of the default number of points The Appearance group includes settings to control the plot appearance such as title title position font size and multi channel grid When you title a plot the Plot Auto Title check box must be cleared before the change can be applied The Margins group includes settings to control the plot margins The Colors group includes settings to control the color of chart elements Category Coloring can be set to use the trace color to draw the plot None to automatically select the color for each channel By Channel or to automatically select the color for each sort code By SortCode The Filtering group includes settings to enable or disable an FIR filter algorithm and to set parameters for the filter For more information about plot settings see the plot settings reference page 256 22
225. elected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the source target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Arc Start Enter the position in degrees for the starting position of the arc display Arc Range Enter the range in degrees for the arc display For example 90 degrees for a quarter circle arc Scale Minimum Enter the minimum value for gauge values that will be displayed Scale Maximum Enter the maximum value for gauge values that will be displayed Tick Label Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point for value labels found on the control Master Mode Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the Master Mode Control Mode on Run Select the OpenWorkbench System Control Mode to enable when the OpenController settings in window containing this control are Run Choices are None Standby Preview and Run Mode on Stop Select the OpenWorkbench System Control Mode to enable when
226. eline however the stored event rates that can be achieved with each data construct may vary depending on the amount of data to be read back and the Master Polling Rate set in OpenWorkbench To ensure that all data is stored without loss the maximum data transfer rate should not be exceeded Calculating Data Transfer Rates The maximum throughput of the TDT system differs depending on the interface Refer to your System s User Guide for more information on the maximum throughput of your interface Data acquisition that is near the maximum rate may cause more data to be acquired on the hardware device then can be transferred to disk At that point the system will fail to store all the data and if it continues for an extended period of time can cause OpenWorkbench to stop acquiring any data To minimize the chance of exceeding the data rate data should be acquired at rates that are no more than 9096 of the maximum transfer rate There is a fair amount of overhead associated with polling all of the hardware devices and rates that come close to the above transfer rate are likely to overflow How to Calculate Your Maximum Transfer Rate The maximum transfer rate of your protocol is fairly straight forward Transfer rate is rarely of concern when working with data with slow event rates such as triggered scalars or events that are only acquired at the end of an acquisition such as an averaged signal Streamed or snippet data that is acquired through
227. enController accesses this map to modify parameter variables and to read data for visualization Since this map is updated in real time several times a second the data displayed in OpenController is also displayed in real time When OpenController modifies a parameter tag the tag is modified in this map and then updated on the device OpenController acquires data from this map to access the variable information for data visualization Because OpenController is not accessing the Data Tank the 2 3 second delay associated with storing data does not occur However OpenController is forever in the present and data stored in the past cannot be reviewed as it can in OpenScope About Visualization Tools Visualization tools are controls that allow users to visualize information that is available within the circuit running on a hardware device but is not necessarily stored in the data tank For example filter settings RMS level of the signal and the processing ability of the system can be visualized without being stored The information from these tools can then be used to modify stimulus parameters filter settings and other properties of a hardware device s 115 OpenEx User s Guide Visualization controls also allow users to quickly see when other controls have been changed Visualization controls can receive variable values from other controls such as sliders switch buttons and data tables This allows users to quickly view the parameter
228. ence The settings are enabled when the Acquisition check box is selected When the settings are disabled the acquisition will start when the sweep fire line SwFire within the compiled circuit file is triggered Delay Defines the length of the delay for the start of the acquisition relative to the beginning of a condition or sweep via the zAqDelay parameter tag within the compiled circuit File Duration Defines the duration of the acquisition via the zAqDur parameter tag within the compiled circuit file 111 OpenEx User s Guide 112 OpenController Reference In the OpenController Reference you will find A reference guide to the OpenController Workspace and the basics of adding and modifying controls Control Types Step by step guides to creating the most common control types Control Settings Reference An in depth reference covering many of the control settings available from the Property Dialog box 113 OpenEx User s Guide 114 OpenController Reference About OpenController OpenController is a visual interface for designing and implementing custom control sets for OpenWorkbench experiments During an experiment these control sets allows users to control the status of the OpenWorkbench protocol and access acquired data and parameter variables in real time The OpenEx client server architecture makes it possible for users to develop a series of control sets each designed to modify or visualize a particular asp
229. ench settings that pull together all the information needed to store data Each store is associated with a data construct within the compiled circuit file running on the Store s Host Device Also the data construct used by the Store or the data stored by the Store Sync a tag that tells OpenEx when data is ready to be downloaded May be connected to a FlipFlop for handshaking stores or an index value that indicates the position of the buffer and tells OpenEx how many points are to be downloaded to the tank or if any points at all require downloading The parameter tag associated with a Sync is identified by an s prefix synchronous describes buffers or events that are coordinated in time typically across multiple recording channels T tank a group of data stored by OpenEx s TTank data server or the files used to store the group of data target Points to the location of data being read or the location to which a value will be read This location might be an OpenWorkbench Store a parameter tag within a compiled circuit file running on a device or another control setting time stamp the precise time of an event that is recorded to the tank The precision of the time stamp depends upon the sample clock Parameter tags associated with a time stamp are identified 355 OpenEx User s Guide by a t prefix Typically the time values will be latched periodically when data needs to be stored Streaming data continuous does not require tim
230. ends the execution for a specified amount of time in milliseconds Example Sleep 1000 sleep for 1 second Read a value from a target Example Dim target_dev target_ctrl val target dev MyDevice frequency val Read target dev Print val target ctrl gt knob Value Print_ Read target_ctrl Write String target variant or constant Note If using the Legacy version of VBScript this method is Write String target variant or constant GetSystemMode SetSystemMode int newMode IssueTrg long TrgID long TrgMode Note TrgID corresponds to Software trigger 1 10 True successful False failed Long True successful False failed Long At this time IssueTrg always returns a 1 OpenController Reference Write a value to a target Example Dim target dev target ctrl val target dev MyDevice frequency Write target dev val target ctr gt knob Value Write_ target_ctrl val Returns a long that specifies the devices current mode 0 Idle 1 Standby 2 Preview 3 Run Sets the devices current mode where newMode 1s 0 Idle 1 Standby 2 Preview 3 Run Issues Software trigger 1 10 on all active devices connected to the zBUS The parameter TrgMode is reserved at this time and should be set to 0 Example IssueTrg 1 0 Using the CRS VSG2 5 system with OpenEx With the latest release of the OpenEx Interface TDT provides the ability
231. environment you ll find our Tips Tricks and Technical Information area to be a useful resource 335 OpenEx User s Guide 336 Tips Tricks and Technical Information Connecting the Hardware The OpenEx Software Suite may be used with any of the System 3 real time processors Some of the most common hardware configurations are described below See the installation guide supplied with your system for more information on connecting your hardware Connecting a Multi Channel Pentusa System with Multiple Medusa Preamplifiers The diagram below shows a typical 32 channel system with a single Pentusa base station two preamplifiers and Gigabit interface RX5 PENTUSA BASE STATION Status AMP A AMP H AMP C AMP D j gms 504 DAG 1 Idle uM uti u2 u3 u4 Al M1234 MODE Cyc 0 00 00 0 Zeus FoR SYSTEM 3 Mu it DSP Lane Processor Muri 1 0 MEDUSA PREAMP Connect to Headstage MEDUSA PREAMP Connect to Headstage PI5 Mounted in PC PI5 Back of ZBUS Device Caddies PS20 POWER SUPPLY Power Cords 337 OpenEx User s Guide Connecting a Medusa System with a Single Medusa Base Station The diagram below shows a typical Medusa Amplifier and Gigabit interface system for less than 16 channels RA16 MEDUSA BASE STAT
232. er tags using the tag root with the following prefixes and suffixes S prefix for the sync parameter Only one parameter tag with the s prefix is required because all streams are acquired at the same time and are the same 327 OpenEx User s Guide size and position prefix for the data tags that are stored This tag may also include a suffix with a tilde and a number if there are multiple acquisition channels For example dPD 1 and dPD 2 would be used for two channels of data associated with the data stream using the tag root PD Before the circuit is stored as an compiled circuit file the number of channels is checked by comparing the tilde values to the oxStream buffer value wai oxStream Tag_Root PD BIk Size 256 Data_Form Short Dec_Factor 16 Channels 2 Imp_MC No 1 12 0 1 14 0 PlotDeci6 4 SerStore nDec 32 Size 64000 OSF 32767 r 2WrEnab 1 Strobe 0 amp Index 0 6 4 sPD Dat dPD 1 3y gt dae 1 16 0 1 18 0 PlotDec16 1 SerStore nDec 32 Size 64000 SF 32767 DReset 3 P 5Rs 0 DEnable 73 e sEnab 1 eWrEnab 1 dPD 2 m Pata In this example 2 channels of data stream are associated with the oxStream component through the use of the tag root PD The tag root is set in the oxStream component and could be changed to any value The Chan and Chan2 lines are data from an acquired signal The
233. eract with both a data visualization application and a data export application or even several instances of each Finally OpenEx has been developed using a client server protocol that allows applications to communicate effectively across networks This means that the OpenEx applications can be distributed efficiently across different locations The Clients and the Servers The OpenEx Suite currently includes two servers TTank and OpenWorkbench and five client applications OpenWorkbench OpenController OpenScope OpenBrowser and Tank Monitor Data is stored in files on the computer where TTank is running and OpenWorkbench must be run from a computer with a direct connection to the hardware Client applications can run from any networked computer TDT does not limit installation of client applications This means for example that several users can visualize experimental data on separate PCs as it s acquired Several add on client applications are also available such as OpenExplorer and OpenSorter The Client Server Advantage The client server advantage allows a number of smaller applications to come together in one powerful OpenEx environment With OpenProject all OpenEx programs are brought under the control of a single management tool and all experiment files are managed automatically under a single directory structure OpenEx Tutorials OpenEx User s Guide 10 OpenEx Tutorials Tutorial 1 Getting Started with OpenEx Getting S
234. es RMS for Alpha Beta and Theta waves 43 OpenEx User s Guide Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects EEG SPM0803 SPM0803 wsp Standard Hardware RZ2 BioAmp processor and PZ3 Amplifier Overview Acquires 32 channels of EEG data and filters for alpha beta delta and theta waves Stores the RMS of the alpha beta and theta waves Extracellular Projects Many of the extracellular projects are provided in two versions one using macros indicated by inclusion of SPM in the file name and one that does not Typically the circuit files used in the macro based projects are easier to work with and make minor modifications The non macro circuit projects demonstrate circuit design techniques that may be used in those cases where macros are not available or greater flexibility is required Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects Extracellular SP0001 SPO001 wsp or StdProjects Extracellular SPM0001 SPM0001 wsp Standard Hardware RA16BA Medusa Base Station and RA4PA or RAI6PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires a single channel of spike data Includes an automated window discriminator and a spike sorting control Also includes a fake spike generator that can be used to test of the system and become comfortable with the thresholding and spike sorting controls for data collection Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects Extracellular SPO100 SP0100 wsp or StdProjects Extracellular S PM0100 SPM0100 wsp Standard Hardware RA16BA Medusa Base Station and RA4PA
235. es the Time Control window between displayed and hidden Toggles the Control window between displayed and hidden OpenScope Reference Message Window Toggles the Message Window between displayed and hidden Verbose Toggles verbose messaging on and off Messaging Customize Opens the Customize dialog box The Customize dialog box Toolbars allows you to customize the appearance of the menu bar and toolbar OpenScope Help Menu About OpenScope Displays version and copyright information for OpenScope Plot Types Selecting Data Before you can plot data the tank and block within the tank must be selected in the Tank Select window of OpenScope To select data from a tank 1 Click the tank name in the TANK area of the Tank Select window 2 Click the block name in the BLOCK area of the Tank Select window The events contained in the selected block will be displayed in the EVENT area Each event corresponds to an OpenWorkbench Store Note If a tank does not appear in the Tank Select window it must first be added to the OpenEx registry After data is selected plots can be created using the selected data Creating Pile Plots Pile plots are designed to visualize small data buffers 500 for quick recognition of differences in waveform properties Pile plots are commonly used when extracellular recordings from neurons are examined to separate out single unit activity Users can use pile plots to view time stamped buffers called s
236. esaeeeceaeeseaaesseaeeseaeeesaaesseaeeseeeeeaes 256 OpenBrowser Reference apr S 265 About OpenBrOWSer 1 n eade ide eid te ed ease en Y Pub v Pad pe eee ud dorada 267 Workspace Basics so th et t A eee tll e ete etd Ee s eere 267 Data Selectioni cu usi a a im ace et ee et dt e ete Mad Me ee pui da cu ct et E eat 270 Data Browsihg dice ge a RED deae dendo i Relea 275 Data Exports motto tete ctio ute uter dam E Ede I pue M 278 Tank Reference creer torret roter aE o eio ES Eneo eSEE o as dp sera Ee aere eU Oe EP ADR a REA e See Ue abo S dp pna eDae 291 The rank Monitor WOrkspagco 2 fr eee ne HR Lei doe enn 293 Accessing a Tank on Another PC ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeene ener enne snnt nnns 295 Appendix A Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference e eeee ee eee eere ee ee eese eese ea seta attesa sn nato 299 eu m 301 Control Gonstl cts su ono tlt tice etuer ba etas best curo ip te ten uses eoo ie eee ieee 304 Data Storage ie Hm tete rad d t E itp d der Meg x de dpt e ee tees 316 Instantaneo s Rate Constructa eiee eere dec d tac ie Fe eap e M vu dna 332 OpenController Constructs ssssssssssesseseee enne ener intent nennen sn nnn sn nene enne 334 Appendix B Tips Tricks and Technical Information eee eee eese entente einen atn tna tntnaenae 335 Connecting the Hardware sssssssss
237. eshold for spike detection green threshold bar Artifact rejection however is implemented by setting a maximum threshold value The auto threshold feature does not set this value and does not display the maximum threshold or artifact rejection marker pink threshold bar To control the artifact rejection threshold and display the marker in the plot you can set the value of the tag going into the second threshold line of the SortSpike component One way to do this is to control the value using a slider Use the following steps to set the high threshold and display the threshold marker 1l In Controller click the Controls menu click sliders knobs and click slider 2 Click the workspace to add a slider then double click the new control to open the properties dialog box Click the browse button next to Primary Target Select Devices gt Amp1 gt Scalars gt bEA and click OK Enter a Position Max of 0 005 and a Position Min of 0 Enter a Tick Precision of 4 Save the changes and run the project Right click the Scrolling Threshold plot not the Snippet Sort Plot and select Auto Threshold 9 The green threshold marker will appear in both the scrolling threshold and snippet sort plots 9o X x Wm SR IB 10 Use the slider to set an upper threshold This also brings the second threshold pink marker into view in the Snippet Sort plot Note that you cannot set the artifact rejection in the Scrolling Threshold plot A pink marker mig
238. ettings as desired 283 OpenEx User s Guide 10 Click Export 11 Review the messages in the Export Status dialog box and click OK EJ Microsoft Excel Block 10 csv Bd File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help A ug id BSEIG RIV AIA an J A BsB Al Y fe BLOCK 1 fetock lEvENT TIME CHAN Sampling Freq Block 10 Snip 1 791754 1 24414 06 1000 Block 10 Snip 1 892228 1 24414 06 1000 Block 10 Snip 1 882745 1 24414 06 1000 5 Block 10 Snip 2 093179 1 24414 06 1000 B Block 10 Snip 2 193654 1 24414 06 1000 7 Block 10 Snip 2 294129 1 24414 06 1000 Exported Data Viewed in Microsoft Excel Exporting to PLX 284 OpenBrowser can export directly to the PLX format for use with Plexon s Offline Sorter and Wave Tracker Data exported in PLX format can also be viewed with NeuroExplorer M For researchers who use several different analysis packages exporting to the PLX format eliminates the need to export data in several different formats The PLX export has been streamlined to provide the user with both flexibility and ease of use Note Use Offline Sorter version 2 5 or greater if possible Earlier versions of Offline Sorter might be unable to import OpenEx Stream data The latest version of Offline Sorter is available at http www plexoninc com Software_downloads htm When tank data is exported to PLX format it must be scaled to match the requirements of the new format This is done using two parameters
239. etup Properties for ScrollPlot OOO ee e ata set dd Tanger Channel i ion Tet x Settings groups include Common pg 206 Target s pg 216 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Data Source Set pg 188 4 Channel Selector Visible Scroll Sections 10 Multi View Enabled J Behavior pg 196 Channel Selector pg 188 Multi View pg 189 Refresh Control pg 190 Scaling pg 190 1 X Axis Setup pg 191 Y Axis Setup pg 192 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Pb npmegnpecemepe G e If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController is running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 7 8 OpenController Reference Click the B button in the Data Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target The source target should be an OpenWorkbench Store Scrolling plots are most commonly used with continuous waveforms Tip look for this icon to identify continuous waveform in the Select Target dialog box Enter the desired channel in the Target Channel box Click OK A scrolling plot is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be runn
240. even 8 bit data for Stores whenever possible 5 Remove any redundant data Stores For example if you are storing the full 25 kHz bandwidth signals in your single unit collection project there is no need to also store a band limited LFP version of these sample signals Operating System 6 Turn off unnecessary applications including a Background applications like anti virus firewall and spyware detection tools b Services that run in the background even if you do not have the program open 7 Turn off any automatic update features 8 Avoid launching applications once data collection has started in OpenEx 9 Avoid doing other tasks on the collection computer while it s running OpenEx like accessing the Internet 10 If you have USB or the Wired Gigabit interface consider upgrading to the Optical Gigabit Interface If you need assistance with any of the above design guidelines please contact TDT technical support 343 OpenEx User s Guide Working with Long Blocks 344 In OpenEx the data acquired during each recording session is typically labeled and stored to the tank as a single OpenEx Block Theoretically there is no limit on the size of a single block or tank however we recommend that neither exceeds a size of 2GB to ensure the best performance possible Lengthy recording session can be divided into several smaller blocks depending on the amount of data being acquired Users who frequently run lengthy recording se
241. ex Offset value at 2 Show View Index Index is Channel or Sort Code and is determined by the View By value 189 OpenEx User s Guide Pointer Parameter Group Pointer Style Select the pointer style from a drop down list Choices are Arrow Line Arrow Line and Triangle Pointer Color Select the pointer color from a color palette Pointer Size Enter the desired size of the pointer in pixels Pointer Margin Enter the desired size of the margin between the tip of the pointer and the arc that is the tick marks along the arc Hub Visible Select the check box to display a hub or pinion point marker at the base of the pointer If the Hub Visible check box is be selected the hub Size can be specified Hub Size Enter the desired size of the hub in pixels Hub Color Select the desired color for the hub from a color palette Refresh Control Parameter Group Refresh Period Set a time value for the refresh period in seconds Scaling Parameter Group X Axis Range The range of the x axis Y Axis Symmetry Select the check box to ensure that a symmetrical Y axis range will be displayed This is ideal for signals that are expected to be symmetrical Auto Scale The plot can be set to automatically scale during animation to ensure that the data can always be viewed in a convenient scale None Auto Scale is turned off Active The scale of the plot is automatically adjusted to ensure all values can be shown on the plot
242. f a SortSpike2 component and by default the marker is unidirectional and will be adjusted based on values A bidirectional marker can be specified by modifying the Use Sign parameter of the SortSpike2 component If a SortSpike component is used the threshold bar typically implements the low threshold PDec 1 300 300 Note A pink threshold marker might sometimes be seen This marker should not be used Snippet Sort Control When this control is run one or more threshold markers are displayed for the window discriminator As in the Scrolling Threshold control the direction of the primary threshold marker bar slightly above the signal waveform in the previous diagram depends on the specified Threshold Target see Using the Scrolling Threshold and Snippet Sort Controls page 154 for more information Note the primary threshold marker in the Snippet Sort and scrolling threshold controls should be used to control the same target Moving the marker in one control should move the marker in the other control When a SortSpike2 or SortSpike3 component is used only one threshold maker is needed If a SortSpike component is used both low green bar and high pink bar thresholds can be implemented If two threshold markers are needed and only one marker is displayed press and hold down the Shift key and drag the mouse up or down to adjust the plot scale until the second marker is in view If no threshold markers appear Ctrl doub
243. for the project are synchronized Tank check box selected for applications in the OpenProject Configuration window this dialog box can be used to change the tank used throughout the project To view available options right click to display the shortcut menu This dialog box is opened from the Data Tank command on the OpenProject menu Data Storage x SERVER TANK 8 Local DemoTank2 amp el Browse For Tank Create New Tank Register Tank UnRegister Tank Test Tank Reset Tank v Show Full Path Refresh Tank List Block Naming Name Prefix Prompt for block name Show Legacy Tanks Find Legacy Tank Cancel OpenProject File Dialog Box The OpenProject File dialog box is a variation of the standard Windows Open dialog box It includes a shortcut bar and a description area 58 OpenProject Reference The description area displays the project description for a selected project file The Shortcut bar can be used to quickly navigate to a frequently used folder or file To create a shortcut drag a folder or file from the list tot he shortcut bar You will be given an opportunity to name the shortcut This dialog box is opened from the Load Project command on the OpenProject menu Look in SPO001 tj ex E3 Project Description Single channel collection for extracellular type signals G DataTanks Supports online sorting and LFP extraction and Standard ICj
244. ft corner of the dialog box After the export settings are configured clicking the Save button stores the export information for future use and the color of the Exp Config button text changes to blue OpenBrowser Reference Data Export Format Configration File Type fasci Column Delimiter Significant Digits 10 RETURN File Type Drop Down Menu ASCII Export Settings Column Delimiter data is exported with the specified separators between columns COMMA each value is separated by a comma This is the default Excel importing format TAB each value is separated by a tab RETURN each value is separated by a return character Row Delimiter data is exported with the specified separators between rows RETURN each row is separated by a return character most common TAB each row is separated by a tab COMMA each row is separated by a comma Max Col Width maximum number of columns in a row When the maximum number is reached a row delimiter is generated To ensure the integrity of exported data when viewed in the target application set the Max Col Width for that application before export In applications like Excel that have a maximum number of columns exceeding the application s maximum number of columns might cause problems when the exported data is opened in the target application Problems might include truncated data display automatically generated and undesirable row decimeters and so forth
245. g 188 Multi View pg 189 Colors pg 188 Refresh Control pg 190 Scaling pg 190 X Axis Setup pg 191 Y Axis Setup pg 192 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Filtering pg 189 Target Channel 1 Caption Text Auto Caption V Poll Period Channel Selector Visible Multi View Enabled Category Coloring By Channel cea If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box KORO If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController is running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench Click the m button in the Data Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target The source target should be an OpenWorkbench Store To create a scope plot a continuous data type should be selected Tip look for this icon to identify continuous waveform in the Select Target dialog box Enter the desired channel in the Target Channel box Set the Pile Depth to 1 This will cause the screen to update on each block Click OK A basic scope plot is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar 138 OpenController Reference At this point the plot will look something like this 500 500 D n 255
246. g SGI in the Initial SGI box 8 Click the Parameter Group box and click SigGen Specs in the drop down list 9 In the SigGen File box select the SigGen file to use with the SigGen control 10 If necessary select the maximum and minimum SGI index 11 Click OK 12 Add a slide switch to the control workspace and select the proper position and target parameters The Primary Target is located in the following location in the Select Target tree ControllcSigGen x Value ControllSGI 13 Click OK At this point you should be able to control the SigGen index control from the slider switch To test this run the controller and move the slider The SGI value box should change 181 OpenEx User s Guide Linking Controls About Linking Controls 182 Linking Controls allows controls to send data to and receive data from other controls Data from modifier controls can be sent to visualization tool controls such as status indicators or gauges For example the value sent from a Slider could be sent both to a parameter tag running on a Device and to a setting for a visualization tool such as an Led Indicator The Advantages of Linking Links provide a logical structure to groups of controls and allows users to modify the parameter settings of one control based on the source information of another control For example a user may want to monitor the signal output from a data channel A modifier control such as a slider determines the monitor c
247. ge value to scale the threshold target to match the voltage range of the signal being sent to the spike sorting component This is usually the inverse of the scale factor parameter in a PlotDec16 CompTo16 or CompTo8 RPvdsEx component that was used to compress the data before display For example If the scale factor of a PlotDec16 is set to 10 to convert it to microvolts then the Threshold Scaling Factor should be set to 10 If the scale factor of a CompTo16 is set to 32767 then the Threshold Scaling Factor should be set to 3 052X10 Sort Thresh Mark Persistence Select Dynamic or Saved to determine if the threshold is saved when the control is stopped Select dynamic to update the threshold each time the control is run Select Saved to use the fixed threshold until Auto Threshold is run or the scaling is changed manually Auto Threshold S N Factor Select a choice from the drop down menu to determine the signal to noise factor that will be used to set the threshold when the auto threshold feature is used Auto sets the threshold based on any spike activity that is above the noise floor Even if no spikes occur the control will calculate a threshold that will acquire some signals above the threshold 2 1 through 5 1 selects a fixed ratio that generates a threshold that is x times greater then the noise floor Auto Threshold Effort Select low medium or high to determine how large a data block will be acquired before the threshold is calcula
248. ggested names The parameter tags must be defined as the Coef Target and Delay Line Target in the control s property settings Using the Biquad Coefficient Generator Control The control set below includes a filter coefficient generator on the right and a slider on the left to provide dynamic control of filter settings during the experiment The filter type Lowpass Highpass or Bandbass is set along with the default filter settings when the controls are created in OpenController During an experiment the corner frequency Fc or bandwidth BW can be changed by typing a value in the appropriate box then pressing Enter or from a linked controller such as the slider pictured in the following diagram 15 x Lb tum HP Filter HP Filter 1000 0 Fc 622 3 hz 850 0 BW 1 00 oct 7000 550 0 400 0 250 0 100 0 Control Set with a Biquad Coefficient Generator Creating a Biquad Coefficient Generator Two text boxes on the biquad coefficient generator control can be used to change filter settings during an experiment The first is used to select the center or corner frequency of the filter and the second selects the bandwidth in octaves The bandwidth setting only works with the Notch and Bandpass filter types The steps provided below create a biquad coefficient generator control and a slider to control the filter settings This is probably the most common use of the biquad coefficient generato
249. h a sweep based stimulus protocol The information below assumes that the circuit construct is part of a circuit that includes a sweep or condition construct and that the construct is controlled by an OpenWorkbench protocol that uses sweep settings It is possible to use SigGen circuits in other circuits and OpenWorkbench protocols however the circuit control must be designed by the end user SigGen Signals are generated on the PC and then loaded to and played from the SerSource component 1 2 0 d gt P sgRamNpts1 an SerSource Ch 1 Size 1e 006 a _pORst 0 1 3 0 Index 0 4 5 sgPlaylndex sgWavel Data y sgRamNpts1 parameter tag determines the size of the buffer sgWavel parameter tag loads the SigGen file to the SerSource component Sweep resets the buffer before the start of the next stimulus This should be changed to condition if condition control settings are used rather than sweep control settings in the OpenWorkbench protocol SwEnable plays out the signal from a sweep based protocol This should be changed to CoEnable if condition control settings are used rather than sweep control settings in the OpenWorkbench protocol Appendix B Tips Tricks and Technical Information In the Tips Tricks and Technical Information section you will find Quick access to topics of special interest to OpenEx users If you are looking for shortcuts and tips for working in the OpenEx
250. h cascaded highpass HP lowpass LP filter sections Butterworth filter coefficients can be updated through the macro properties dialog through parameter tags via software control or dynamically through direct connections to the FreqHP and FreqLP macro parameter inputs when enabled HP LP Filter 1Ch Input F Output Static 300Hz 5000Hz 12dBoct HP LP_Filter_4Ch Output1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Static 300Hz 5000Hz 12dBoct HP LP Filter MC Input nChan 4 VY Fit 300Hz S000Hz 12dBoct 75 OpenEx User s Guide 76 OpenWorkbench Reference In the OpenWorkbench Reference you will find A reference guide to OpenWorkbench including an introduction to important concepts the Workbench workspace the basics of configuring and experiment and running an experiment using the system controls Configuring an Experiment Step by step guide to configuring a project with reference details 77 OpenEx User s Guide 78 OpenWorkbench Reference About OpenWorkbench OpenWorkbench is a flexible application for running and designing experiments OpenWorkbench uses compiled circuit files to control System 3 hardware and funnels acquired data to OpenEx s TTank data server for fast indexing and storage Configuration files xpm include information about device configuration data storage and the experiment timing and control Several OpenWorkbench configuration files are provided as part of the Examples so u
251. hake The handshake is a communication procedure between the application and the compiled circuit file A flag is set high to indicate the data has been acquired The application acquires the data and time stamp and then resets the flag for the next stimulus If the handshake value is set to None OpenWorkbench polls for changes in the time stamp parameter tag t prefix and then stores the data when the time value changes Channels is the number of channels associated with the scalar For single mode the value is set to 0 The triggered scalar data construct is used when storing asynchronous scalar data that arrives at a rate no greater than once per second Examples of asynchronous data include sweep numbers stimulus parameter and digital input values Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used to acquire asynchronous scalar data must include this construct With a triggered scalar data construct data values are latched using the Latch component each time they need to be stored Periodic timing can be used For example latch the data once every five seconds or other timing methods can be used for example latch the data when an external trigger arrives at the device A time stamp value must be latched at the same time as the data is latched so that the data and time will be associated when stored in the tank OpenWorkbench reads the data and time values when polling the hardware device After r
252. han OfflineSorterLong exe 256 samples Epoch events are not recognized as strobe The Export epoch events as plx strobe events in NeuroExplorer M events check box was not selected during export Events are named incorrectly in The Export epoch events as plx strobe NeuroExplorer M events check box was not selected during export Exporting to NEX OpenBrowser can export directly to the NeuroExplorer M NEX format Export to Multiple Files 1 When exporting to multiple files ensure that the Multi File check box in cell A3 of the Data Selection Table window is checked 2 Configure each row for export To configure a row for export Click the Exp Config button for the desired row b Inthe Data Export Format Configuration dialog box ensure that NEX is selected in the File Type box c Name the export file Click the B button to the right of the Output File Name box The Open dialog box is displayed d Browse to the desired file location When using OpenBrowser within OpenProject the default location will be the UserFiles folder for the current project e Type a file name in the File Name box and click Open You can type individual names for each row file or use the same base file name for all rows files If you use a base name be sure to use the Append File Name by check boxes If two or more rows attempt to write to exactly the same file data will be overwritten f If desired select one or more of the Append File Name
253. hange Click button to edit store name nChannels Set the number of channels For storage Sampling Rate 24414 06 Hz Change Click the button to set the sampling rate For the data storage Store Name Enter a unique name for the stream store If store pooling is used ensure that all macros related to this store have the same Store Name 5 Click the Store Pooling tab or click Next twice Since this will be the primary store in the pool select Primary from the Pooling Position drop down box We will be configuring two stores in our pool so we must designate the total number of members 7 Select 2 from the Members In Pool drop down box Adjust Properties for Stream Store MC xj Overview Setup Options Store Pooling Pooling Position Primary x Members In Pool bcc Store Pooling x Store Poolina handles component channel numbering parameter taa numbering and OnenEx header management when 8 Finally click Done at the bottom of the properties dialog Stream Store MC The Stream Store MC macro should now display the first 16 channels of the store in the macro property summary display Configuring the Second Store Macro Once the primary store has been configured a second store macro can be added by simply copying the primary store and adjusting the pooling position in the macro setup properties This method ensures that all other necessary properties such as the store name number of channels and win
254. hannel This output can be sent to a Visualization control so that the graph shows the correct monitor channel How It Works Controls communicate to each other through Targets Targets are defined as primary secondary alternate source or data targets Primary Targets change a parameter tag on the circuit or a parameter of another control and occur in modifier controls A primary target sends a new value each time the system is polled Alternate Targets are similar to primary targets They allow users to modify multiple parameter tags or control parameter settings with a single control Alternate targets are associated with modifier controls An alternate target may be a parameter tag on a different device or a visualization control parameter setting Source Targets acquire values from parameter tags and other controls When a value is acquired from a control the Value setting in the Value Control parameter group settings is the source Source targets are associated with visualization controls Data Targets acquire values from parameter tags and other controllers Data targets are associated with visualization controls Each control has a unique name When linking controls the control name is used as a part of the target path for another control The control name can be found in the control s property setting dialog box in the My Name box of the Target s parameter group name will be generated automatically or the user can enter a
255. he aEA 1 tag and the parameter port The ConstF is included to convert the parameter tag output to a signal that can be used by the ScaleAdd The addition of the ScaleAdd provides a simple means of altering the signal value When the scale factor SF is set to 1 via the trig parameter the threshold value passes through without being altered However if the scale factor is set to O the threshold value will also become 0 When the threshold value on a SortSpike 2 Thres or SortSpike ThLo becomes 0 no spikes are acquired This creates the desired pause effect without stopping the recording session Pause Resume ERE The value of this trig tag which controls the scale factor can be set from OpenController using a simple switch control The switch with an on value of 1 and an off value of 0 can be used to pause and resume event acquisition within a single block Tips Tricks and Technical Information lll Setup Properties for Switch x IM TET TS CHE 157 Common O Sewerame iscs o O Primoy Target Anoia E C caont O WaiseVaue Value when onjo FAQs In this topic you ll find page references to areas of the help that will provide answers to some of the most frequently asked questions about OpenEx Some of these questions refer to advanced topics and may require a bit of background reading so be sure to view any supporting information regarding these topics How do I choose a Data Co
256. he drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load Orientation Select Vertical or Horizontal orientation Position Labels Type position labels separated by a comma Position Values Type values separated by a comma Snippet Sort Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Data Target Select the data event Store name to be plotted Target Channel Select the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number Caption Text Type caption text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Select the check box to display an automatically generated caption for the plot The auto caption is generated using the Store name Clear the check box to hide the auto caption The auto caption should be hidden if no caption is desired or if a user defined caption should be used Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Channel Selector Visible Select the check box to display a channel selector as part of the control The channel selector is a slider that can be used to control which channel of data is used to animate a single view plot By default the channel selector options include channels one through eight The user can modify the number of
257. he first data point in the buffer If handshaking is used a sync parameter tag should also be set high after the buffer has filled up OpenWorkbench will then read the data and time stamp and reset the sync parameter tag Each data buffer must include parameter tags using the tag root with the following prefixes and suffixes t prefix for the time stamp parameter A Latch component acquires the time stamp from the Clock Generating construct S prefix for the sync parameter A parameter tag with the s prefix is used if handshaking is enabled for the construct It will be set high when data has been acquired into the buffer and needs to be stored to the tank n prefix for the number of points If the Buffer Size of the oxBuffer is set to 0 then OpenWorkbench will look for a parameter tag with the n prefix to determine the number of points in the buffer This tag value should take into account any decimation factor including Plot16Dec and time slices If a timeslice is used make sure that all constructs use the same timeslices see the RPvdsEx Help section on timeslices d prefix for the data tags that are stored This tag may also include a suffix with a tilde and a number if there are multiple acquisition channels 319 OpenEx User s Guide 320 In this example the data is acquired and stored to the tank on each sweep 1 16 0 1 17 0 fc Ch 1 2 Biquad Biquad e 1 13 0 mos 1 14 0 PnBIQ 1 d 1
258. he number label Chart Behavior Parameters Time Span Set the time range in seconds and according to the time stamp to be displayed on the X axis Feature Behavior Parameters Cloud Points Set the minimum number of points to display The maximum number of cloud points will be twice the value set The plot will refresh when the maximum number is reached OpenScope Reference X Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Y Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Histogram Behavior Parameters TimeRef Epoch Name Defines the epoch or indexed event that will be used for the raster rows Click the value box to view a list of events Valid choices are preceded by an F epoch event icon Respect TRef Duration When checked the plot s X axis scale is equal to the duration of the epoch event selected in the TimeRef Epoch Name setting TRef Epoch Low Range Use to set the low value for the X axis range according to the defined TimeRef epoch event As data is animated the next data will only be displayed if the associated epoch event value is greater than or equal to the low range value Leave at default value of 0 if a range will not be used TRef Epoch High Range Use to set the high value for the X axis range according to the defined TimeRef epoch event As data is animated the next data will only be displayed if the as
259. ht be seen but is not implemented 11 After the threshold marker is in view you can continue to set the value using the slider or adjust the value in the Snippet Sort control 161 OpenEx User s Guide Master Mode 162 About the Master Mode Control The master mode control can be used to access the OpenWorkbench protocol controls from OpenController The Run mode toolbar in OpenController includes Run and Stop buttons Each of these buttons can be linked to OpenWorkbench protocol control modes The Run button can be linked to the Record Preview or Standby protocol mode The Stop button can be linked to the Standby or Idle protocol mode For example the Stop button could be linked to the Standby mode In Standby mode the protocol continues to run but no data is stored to the tank The Run button could be linked to the Record mode so that when adjustments to the control settings are complete and the control is run recording will resume Local Record Master Mode Control Creating a Master Mode Control To quickly create a Master Mode control 1 Click the Controls menu point to Advanced Controls and click Master Mode Control The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed set
260. icate when the RMS level has become too high Green indicates good yellow indicates caution or watch and red indicates that the noise level is too high Linear Gauge Before using a gauge the user should determine what variable is to be measured This variable must either be a Store or have a parameter tag associated with it OpenController includes both linear and logarithmic gauges The user should select the appropriate gauge depending on the type of data to be visualized Both types of gauges are created in a similar way OpenController Reference Creating a Linear Gauge To quickly create a linear gauge 1 Click the Controls menu point to Gauges and click Linear Gauge The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Will Setup Properties for Gauge X Server Name DEFAULT s SeweTaw a Tesethewe 5 Cention Text x g Settings groups include Common pg 203 Target s pg 217 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Layout pg 212 Scale pg 214 Pointer
261. ice Devices contain different amounts of memory and processing power so individual applications will vary Reduce the number of channels and or buffer size to be processed Occurs when attempting to run a circuit that contains components assigned to a DSP that does not exist i e DSP 5 on a 2 DSP RX device Verify that your RPvdsEx circuit has not assigned components to a DSP assigned pages or DSP assign components that does not exist Glossary Glossary A asynchronous describes buffers or events typically across multiple recording channels that are NOT coordinated in time block 1 In OpenEx a group of data labeled and stored in the tank for the purpose of analysis Typically a block contains one recording session and may contain many sweeps There may be one or more blocks in each data tank Blocks are named automatically or by the user and can be selected for display or export 2 A specified number of data points handled as a group for downloading from or uploading to a device Breaking data into chunks for data transfer increases the efficiency of the system The block size is defined in OpenEx header components such as oxSnippet and oxStream C circuit a configuration of processing components Each component does a set task such as generate a waveform store in memory or send a signal to the DAC outs Circuits are designed using RPvdsEx software and are run on System 3 Real Time Processors client the request
262. icular event For example if the stimulus frequencies are stored as an epoch scalar then the user can quickly sort data and view all data acquired with frequencies above 4000 Hz Scalar values can be stored using either the Store inputs associated with the control macros or using the Epoc Store or Slow Store macros When macros are not used scalar data is saved using a Triggered Scalar or a Data List data construct Discrete Waveforms Discrete waveforms or fixed block events are small chunks of data 1000 samples They are typically things such as acquired spikes or evoked potentials Users can store this type of data using either a Spike Store or Block Store macro When macros are not used a Data Buffer or Signal Snippet data construct can be used OpenWorkbench Reference The Spike Store macro is used when spike detection and or sorting is needed and Block Store is used when it is not Each of these macros can acquire fast data signals that occur at rates greater than once a second and store separate time stamps for each channel asynchronous storage It is important to note that block sizes must be small enough and infrequent enough so that a maximum data throughput of 200 000 samples per second is not exceeded If the size of the block is large and there are multiple channels it is possible to attempt to store more data than can be transferred See Calculating Data Transfer Rates page 67 for more information Continuous Waveforms
263. ide the x axis label X Axis Unit Set name for units that will appear as part of the plot label X Axis Units Factor Define a multiplication factor to convert x axis units to valid value for the units label X Axis Offset Define the starting value for the x axis Y Axis Setup Parameter Group Show Y Labels Select the check box to display a unit label for the y axis Clear the check box to hide the y axis label Y Axis Units Set name for units that will appear as part of the plot label Y Axis Units Factor Define a multiplication factor to convert y axis units to valid value for the units label Behavior Parameter Group 258 Activity Behavior Parameters Color at Min Select the color to be displayed when activity is at defined Min Value Color for values between Min and Max Values are generated using a proportional mix of the defined Colors at Min and Max Color at Max Select the color to be displayed when activity is at defined Min Value Color for values between Min and Max Values are generated using a proportional mix of the defined Colors at Min and Max Min Value Enter the number of spike to be defined as the minimum value which is represented by the defined Color at Min Max Value Enter the number of spike to be defined as the maximum value which is represented by the defined Color at Max Show Num Trace Select the check box to display the number of events in the activity cell Clear the check box to hide t
264. iew etc are grayed out and inactive The reason for this is that a DataTank has not yet been set up in which to store any acquired data Click the File menu and click DataTank In the Data Storage dialog box select the e NewTank icon and specify a path for data storage and name the data tank TutTank then click OK 25 OpenEx User s Guide Data Storage X SERVER TANK AD emoT ank2 rd OF DemoTank2 CTDT SOpenEsST anks s Add Data Tank xj Path C TDT Opent x Tanks Browse Name TutT ank a Block Naming Name Prefix Prompt for block name Cancel EUN 6 Click OK Setup is complete and the Workbench controls are enabled Running the OpenEx Project 26 OpenWorkbench is the hardware server for the OpenEx suite Because OpenWorkbench is the only application that communicates directly with the processors it controls when an experiment begins and when data is collected and stored These conditions are determined by OpenWorkbench s system modes so it is a good idea to become familiar with them before you begin an experiment There are four modes gt Record is used when you re ready to begin storing data to the data tank Preview is used to test the system or when you want to modify parameters before you begin collecting data This mode allows you to view data but the data is not stored permanently to the experiment s defined data tank gt Standby should be used
265. ifies the parameter as a Npts value X Decimation Factor One tag suffix is used for stored data Channel Number The suffix identifies the parameter as part of several channels of data In the circuit header oxComponent you can choose the number of channels associated with the data construct The number after the tilde is the channel number A Brief Review of Terminology Compiled circuit files are RP control objects designed by users or TDT for use with OpenEx and other applications May be in rco or rcx format RPvdsEx files contain circuit diagrams designed in a visual drag and drop environment May be in rpd rpx or rcx format Circuits are made up of components Each component does a set task such as generate a waveform store in memory or send a signal to device outputs Circuit constructs are a group of components that do a defined task in OpenEx A circuit construct will have a minimum component structure and alternate component structures 303 OpenEx User s Guide Control Constructs About Control Constructs 304 OpenEx is designed for time critical data acquisition and stimulus presentation To ensure precise triggering of all System 3 hardware devices a global trigger is sent to each of the System 3 hardware device caddies zBus At the simplest level continuous acquisition this will start a clock that generates a time stamped output All aspects of timing and triggering are controlled by the c
266. ignal snippet construct the Sort Code flag must be set to YES Click the Controls menu point to Advance Controls and click Snippet Sort Control The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Setup Properties for SortCtrl Emel Common Aue Caption Channel Selector Visible T 3 Allow Unsorted Group T ol eie ee ons Settings groups include Common pg 209 Target s pg 216 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Data Source Select pg 188 Behavior pg 197 Channel Selector pg 188 Refresh Control pg 190 Scaling pg 190 X Axis Setup pg 191 Y Axis Setup pg 192 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 188 Filtering pg 189 4 Select a valid target for the control and make any other property setting changes as needed To select the target 1 Click the look up button Es in the Data Target box The Select Target dialog box opens In the target hierarchy expand the Stores tree and select the correct Store name that
267. ilable epoch events Using these shorthand characters to configure additional rows once the first row has been configured in Data Selection Table Indicates that the value in the cell above will be used for this cell For example placing a caret in a cell in the TANK column will cause the row to acquire data from the tank named in the row above Used with BLOCK CHAN and SORT cells It will increment the BLOCK CHAN T or SORT number by one relative to the cell above it Used with TIME CHAN SORT and epoch cells Channels that are greater than the gt cell value are viewed and exported For example gt 3 selects channel or sort values greater than 3 Used with TIME CHAN SORT and epoch cells Values that are less than the cell value are viewed and exported Used with TIME CHAN SORT and epoch cells Values within the named range are viewed and exported For example if a cell in the CHAN column contained the statement 3 10 then channels 3 through 10 would be viewed and exported OpenWorkbench e Click a device icon in the Device Navigator to display the device configuration in the main window Clean Running Applications If a user attempts to run OpenProject when an OpenWorkbench or OpenProject application is already running a Clean Running Applications applet will be launched This applet lists running project applications and allows users to choose between terminating the applications or quitting the project start u
268. ill be modifying the same parameters in different circuits For example control of threshold levels in a spike detection circuit or filter settings for data acquisition will be the same across multiple circuits Reserved Tags and Prefixes The OpenEx naming conventions described below must be followed to ensure that the compiled circuit file will work correctly with zStimDelay OpenEx The first letter of each tag is a prefix used to classify the tag as a control or data parameter These prefixes are used in combination with rigid tag names and flexible tag roots to simplify circuit design Control Tags Z Reserved Tag names used by OpenEx controls use the z prefix If the tag name has a valid OpenEx suffix OpenEx will send and receive parameter values via the tag z tags in example files or circuit constructs must be preserved in their entirety The z prefix should be reserved for OpenEx tags Sweep Control To use the sweep control circuit constructs the following names are required zSwPeriod The period of the sweep duration This is set in OpenWorkbench and can not be modified during block acquisition If it is necessary to change this value during the experiment an asynchronous next sweep control circuit construct should be used See Asynchronous Next Sweep Control page 308 for more information 301 OpenEx User s Guide 302 zSwCount The maximum number of sweeps before the signal is terminated If this req
269. ill begin with channel 5 and display the next sequential channels to equal the number entered in the Num Views box Click OK After a multi channel histogram plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified to view by sort code To modify a multi channel histogram plot to view by sort code 1 2 3 4 5 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View In the View By box select Sort Code from the drop down list Update the Num Views and View Index Offset values as needed Click OK Creating Raster Plots 244 Raster plots provide a useful means of looking at time stamped values or waveforms that are not continuous such as snippets The time stamps of the snippets are represented by dots plotted in rows Each row represents an epoch or indexed event In a raster plot the Y axis is indexed event values and the X axis is time stamp values This view provides a good visual representation of when snippets occurred for an indexed event Raster plots are an excellent way of detecting subtle changes in the timing of waveforms across channels To quickly create a raster plot for a single channel of the selected data 1 Drag a data event from the Tank Select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens OpenScope Reference Cancel Select Plot Type Scroll Feature xY Chart Activity 2 Click Raster The raster
270. ilter coefficient updating for single and multichannel signals TDT recommends using macros whenever possible See Tutorial 1 Getting Started with OpenEx page 11 for more information on how to add a real time filter control using filtering macros e Within RPvdsEx there are several components that can be used to generate filter coefficients ButCoef1 generates Butterworth coefficients for a first order Biquad ButCoef generates Butterworth coefficients for an n order Biquad and ParCoef generates a parametric coefficient equalizer filter for a first order Biquad The parameters of these components may be controlled from within the circuit or from an OpenEx control e Within OpenController Biquad Coefficient Generators generate n order Biquad coefficients and allow users to set the filter properties of the Biquad Lowpass Highpass Bandpass or Notch The order of the Biquad filter or number of Biquads is automatically detected and the correct number of coefficients is generated There are advantages and disadvantages to both methods Using RPvdsEx components to generate the coefficients allows users to control the filtering properties independent of the Microsoft Windows operating environment If precise timing of the filter changes is required then this would be the best choice The advantage of generating them through OpenController is two fold First you decrease the number of components used in the circuit If the number of comp
271. in Enter the desired minimum value If the actual input value is less than the defined minimum the minimum value will be used Master Mode Behavior Parameters Mode on Run Select the OpenWorkbench System Control Mode to enable when the OpenController settings in window containing this control are Run Choices are None Standby Preview and Run Mode on Stop Select the OpenWorkbench System Control Mode to enable when the OpenController settings in window containing this control are set to Stop Choices are None Idle and Standby 195 OpenEx User s Guide 196 Delay to run secs Enter a value in seconds to delay implementation of Mode on Run setting Delay to stop secs Enter a value in seconds to delay implementation of Mode on Stop setting Momentary Button Behavior Parameters Value when On Type value when on Value when Off Type value when off Value in milliseconds for On time Type the length of time for the control to stay on when clicked Scope Pile Plot Behavior Parameters Pile Depth Set the number of traces that will be displayed Set the Pile Depth to 1 to create a scope plot Scrolling Plot Behavior Parameters Scroll Sections Set the number of sections to display before scrolling Scrolling Threshold Behavior Parameters Threshold Target The threshold target is used to set the lower threshold for the ae 1 parameter tag attached to a spike sorting component Threshold Scaling Factor Enter a volta
272. inator added in the Snippet Sort control 325 OpenEx User s Guide SortSpike Variation The SortSpike component must have the following organization oxSnippet M Tag_Root EA S Blk Size 32 Data Form Float Sort Code Yes Dec Factor 1 Channels 1 1 8 0 aEA 1 lt ThrLo 0 0002 OT hrHi 10 bEA 1 p gt Enab Rst 1 gt P0Tag dEA 1 4 SortBits 0 iTime P Coef P Data CEA 1 SortSpike2 Variation 1 10 0 SerStore Size 32000 Rst 0 WrEnab 1 Index 0 4 SEA 17 gt Data b This construct can also use a SortSpike2 component in place of SortSpike SportSpike2 works similarly but specifies only a lower voltage threshold value and allows for spike detection outside of a range threshold threshold In this construct the prefix a is used for the parameter tag that controls the threshold The threshold parameter is also affected by the Use Sign parameter If Use Sign is set to one any sign entered with the Thresh value is disregarded and the value is considered to be a number If set to zero Thresh value sign is considered This construct can be further modified for use with a SortSpike3 component Users should be aware of the limitations of SortSpike3 when using it within the OpenEx environment Note there is no b prefix parameter tag with this construct oxSnippet Tag Root EA BIk Size 32 Data Form Float Sort Code Yes Dec Factor 1 Ch
273. ine include an external criterion such as an external trigger or hardware trigger not generated by OpenWorkbench or the ZTRGB signal in a secondary trigger construct Also experiments that use changing sweep durations interstimulus intervals ISI and so forth will require timing constructs to trigger the next condition The RSFlipFlop acts as a switch to start the PulseTrain2 When a criteria is met the PulseTrain2 fires The firing of the pulse then resets the RSFlipFlop to zero 311 OpenEx User s Guide The zCdCount parameter tag defines the number of conditions zCdPeriod is not used in this construct because the sweep durations are not necessarily constant throughout the experiment Instead the asynchronous next sweep controls the duration and timing of each sweep The current condition number is compared to the total number of conditions zCdCount to determine when the condition loop is complete When this occurs the output value is set high and this flags OpenWorkbench through the zCdDone parameter tag to indicate that the last condition has been reached Using the Standby on Stop check box and the Stop When Done check box under Condition Loop the protocol can be set to Idle check boxed cleared or Standby check box selected mode when the zCdDone parameter tag value is set high The zCdNum parameter tag is an optional tag that points to the current condition number When zCdNum is used OpenWorkbench will display the value on
274. ined Color at Max Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When multi view is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Refresh Epoch Name Define the refresh epoch or indexed event Click the value box to view a list of events Valid choices are preceded by an F epoch event icon When a refresh epoch event is defined the plot will be refreshed based on the epoch value according to the settings in the Refresh Control parameter group Chart Common Parameters Source Name Select the data event Store name from the currently selected tank Source Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number To view multiple channels set to 0 and enable multi view Time Span Set the time range in seconds and according to the time stamp to be displayed on the X axis Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When multi view is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None
275. ing To run the control click Run on the menu bar Creating a Feature Plot A feature plot is used to display two waveform properties and is an excellent tool for separating waveforms Waveforms that are different will be in separate parts of the feature space Feature space plots use snippet Stores Type 4 Signal Snippet or possibly buffer Stores Type 2 Data Buffer to display differences The data Store should contain less than 100 samples per waveform Waveforms that are too large will increase the processing time and slow down the system 1 Click the Controls menu point to Plots Graphs and click Feature Plot The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group 141 OpenEx User s Guide 142 Setup Properties for FeaturePlot X Settings groups include most 2 Target s pg 216 Server Name DEFAULT Caption Border pg 187 SewceTage Polling pg 213 Tagetthane f Value Control pg 218 CaptionTet Data Source Set pg 188 Behavior pg 195
276. ing To run the control click Run on the menu bar At this point a plot of the spikes will appear and the pile plot will look something like this Snip Common Modifications Multi View If the Store has multiple channels select the Multi View Enabled check box then enter the number of channels in the Num Views box The example below enables the Multi View and selects the number of channels 3 for visualization Snip 1 Scope Plot The Scope Pile Plot control can also be configured to behave as a Scope plot 137 OpenEx User s Guide Creating a Scope Plot To quickly create a single channel scope plot 1 7 8 9 Click the Controls menu point to Plots Graphs and click Scope Pile Plot The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group W Setup Properties for PilePlot X Settings groups include Common pg 20 Target s pg 216 Sewer Nome DEFAULT ua Caption Border pg 187 Data Target Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Data Source Set pg 188 Behavior pg 196 Channel Selector p
277. ing a row header while the control is running 164 OpenController Reference Synchronizing the Data Table The data table may be used to send any type of data to parameter tags within the compiled circuit file Typically the data table will be used to control some aspect of a stimulus presentation To ensure that the data values are sent at an appropriate time the data table should be synchronized with some target such as the sweep number The table can be synchronized by modifying the control property settings 1 To display the properties dialog box double click the control The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group lll Setup Properties for Table xj Settings groups include 7 Serwer Name DEFAULT Caption Border pg 187 emen Poting ne 215 Behavior pg 195 ate NN a D 2 Click the Ordering Scheme arrow and choose a scheme from the list 3 Select Sequential to send row values sequentially Random to send row values randomly Manual to select rows manually or Sync Tag to use a tag to select the row 4 Click the Synchronization Type arrow and choose a type from the list 5 Select On Tag Change to send data values when ever the synchronization target changes or On Tag True to send data when ever the synchronization target value equa
278. ing program or user in a client server relationship For Example OpenScope is a client application that requests data from the TTank data server in the OpenEx client application compiled circuit file RP control object or compiled circuit designed for use with OpenEx or other TDT applications The System 3 real time processing modules are controlled using these files which are compiled from circuits designed using TDT s RP visual design studio RPvdsEx Users can generate their own compiled circuit files for use with OpenEx or select one of the standard compiled circuit files provided by TDT construct a group of components in a circuit that perform a defined task in OpenEx For example a triggered scalar construct stores single data values for later analysis Most circuit constructs have a minimum or required component structure and secondary or alternate component structures continuous decimated data signals that are acquired and filtered then decimated and stored to a buffer D 353 OpenEx User s Guide 354 Data types 1 In OpenEx standardized construct formats in which data is stored such as snippet buffer list stream and scalar 2 A description of data such as float 32 bit floating point value integer 32 bit integer value short 16 bit integer value byte 8 bit integer value decimated data data that has been reduced further than the sampling rate of the device for data storage May refer to continuous d
279. ingle view plot By default the channel selector options include channels one through eight The user can modify the number of channels or offset value in the Channel Selector parameter group Cloud Points Set the minimum number of points to display The maximum number of cloud points will be twice the value set The plot will refresh when the maximum number is reached X Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Total Amplitude Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Y Axis Feature Select from a drop down list Choices are Total Amplitude Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time and Area Multi View Enabled Select the check box to view each channel or sort code of data in an individual plot Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Input Box Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Primary Target Select or type the name of the primary destination target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using
280. ircuit or compiled circuit file running on the System 3 hardware devices The non macro control circuit constructs described in this section can be used in two ways When a straightforward stimulus and or acquisition protocol is needed these constructs can be added to circuits to allow the user to control timing and triggering parameters in OpenWorkbench When more complex scenarios are needed these circuits offer a starting point for developing more complex control circuits Most control constructs use reserved parameter tag names and prefixes to tie construct parameters to the OpenWorkbench settings When using constructs be sure to preserve the required tag names non When creating new tag names avoid reserved names and prefixes such as the z prefix See Naming Conventions page 301 to become familiar with reserved parameter tag names and prefixes Basic Triggering and Timing The main trigger and clock generator constructs provide sufficient triggering and timing control to generate and acquire continuously such as continuously recording spike data or other waveforms The minimal circuit consists of a global trigger zBUS trigger The trigger ensures that all devices start at the same time If data storage is required then a clock generator is required The clock generator starts with the Trigger Clocks are used to precisely time stamp all data The basic triggering and timing constructs are Main Trigger gt Clock Genera
281. is the Store which includes the signal snippet with spike sorting data construct 153 OpenEx User s Guide Select Target Server Local xi Target Ea um Devices H E PA5 1 H E mpl HB e Stores Xa Tick EM Ay PD ALY Wave ul Q3 Master Parameters Sac Channel Sus SortCode SaD Device Server 5 Click OK A snippet sort control is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Sees 5 Using the Scrolling Threshold and Snippet Sort Controls When a protocol is running spike discrimination and sorting can be accomplished from OpenController using the Scrolling Threshold control and the Snippet Sort control Typically these controls are used together allowing the user to set the spike threshold while viewing a pattern of spike activity in one plot and sort spikes while viewing candidate waveforms in another Note These controls rely on standard OpenEx data constructs Typically a SortSpike2 component should be included in the data generating construct See Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting page 325 for more information In the signal snippet construct the Sort Code flag must be set to YES To use the scrolling threshold and snippet sort control 1 Start the OpenWorkbench protocol and Run the Controller 2 Click the LI Toggle Mode button or the P Run button on
282. is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench Click the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target Enter the desired values in the Position Labels box Labels are separated by a comma and are used as points for selecting labels Enter the desired values in the Position Values box Values are separated by a comma and are used as points for selecting values Click OK A basic slide switch is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Slide Switch On 147 OpenEx User s Guide 148 About Sliders and Knobs Sliders and knobs are used to modify a variable Users input the variable valuable by dragging a slider or turning a knob This allows the user to select a value from a range of values and to determine the desired value by making small adjustments Sliders and knobs can be used to set values such as frequencies or intensities Sliders and knobs vary primarily in appearance Threshold Monitor Channel 10 P 7 Ke 8 2 5 a 4 f m 3 id g i Slider Knob Creating a Slider To quickly create a slider 1 Click the Controls menu point to Sliders Knobs and clic
283. ject Only available when the project is locked Opens the OpenProject DataTank Setup Dialog box This option is enabled only if Data Tank Synchronization is enabled from the OpenProject Configuration window Opens the OpenProject Configuration window so that project settings can be changed Opens a Submenu that allows the user to add an instance of OpenWorkbench OpenController OpenScope OpenBrowser or RPvdsEx to the project Opens the Clean Project dialog box and allows users to remove unwanted files from the project Opens the OpenProject Preferences dialog box and allows the user to set whether RPvdsEx files will be saved with projects and to set tank synchronization preferences This section of the File menu lists recently used project files Clicking a file name opens the file Closes OpenProject and all project applications 57 OpenEx User s Guide Application Icon Shortcut Menus Right click any application icon in the OpenProject window to display a short cut menu Import Opens a dialog box that allows users to browse to an existing file for import to the selected application Attach Docks the selected application window to the OpenProject window Float Floats the selected application window Close Closes the selected application without closing the project Open Opens a closed application Remove Deletes the selected application from the project OpenProject DataTank Setup Dialog Box When the data tanks
284. k Slider The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Re cores vcn OpenController Reference Settings groups include lll Setup Properties for Slider E xi Melee Common mE Sewer Name DEFAULT a Primary Target i Tevet Channet i 5 Cem Text kriize vawe Jo Common pg 207 Target s pg 216 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Appearance pg 193 Scale pg 215 Behavior pg 197 Position Marji Posion C Tiek Precision E om x If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench Click the E button in the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target In the Position Max box enter the maximum value to be displayed for the slider In the Position Min box enter the mi
285. k box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box 187 OpenEx User s Guide Border Style Select an appearance style for the border Border Color Select a color for the border from a color palette Channel Selector Parameter Group Channel Selector Visible Select the check box to display a channel selector as part of the control The channel selector is a slider that can be used to control which channel of data is used to animate a single view plot Channel Selector Positions Enter the number of positions to appear on the channel selector Channel Selector Offset Enter the number to offset the position values For example enter 2 to begin position values with channel 3 Colors Parameter Group Category Coloring Set how the trace colors will be applied None The color set in the Trace Color value box will be applied to all traces By Channel The color of traces will be automatically assigned by channel By Sortcode The color of traces will be automatically assigned by sortcode Trace or Dot Color Select the trace or dot color from a color palette This selected color is only used if Category Coloring is set to None Plot Border Color Select the plot border color from a color palette Foreground Color Select the foreground color from a color palette Bac
286. k file extension The user can enter a prefix name that will be used for each block of data stored to the selected tank Block names consists of the prefix and a block number For example Block 1 Block 2 Prompt for block name If the user prefers to name the block when the protocol is run the Prompt for block name check box can be selected Server In the SERVER box users can select the server where data tanks can be found or created In many cases the server will be on the same PC that controls the hardware devices Local SERVER P 8 Local 104 A green arrow will appear to the left of the server name to indicate that it is selected Commands for common tasks such as adding editing and removing a server are available from a shortcut menu by right clicking in the Server box OpenWorkbench Reference Setting Up Timing and Control Protocols Polling Rate These settings are available from the OpenWorkbench Setup menu Polling Rate xi r Master polling rate 15 10 20 Cancel 5 10 W Eon 30 m Performance Options TDT recommends using Target Bus Loading 50 OpenEx software with the Gigabit interface and setting the Action on data we H polling rate between 3 to 10 Hz niu When using the USB interface the polling rate should be set to a low value The Master polling rate sets how often OpenWorkbench polls devices for new data A high polling rate
287. k the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box 2 Enter 0 in the Source Channel box to ensure that all channels are available for viewing 3 Select the Multi View Enabled check box 4 Inthe Num Views box enter the total number of channels of data to be viewed By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 To display multiple channels beginning with another channel modify the index offset 5 To modify the index offset value click the Parameter Group value box and click Multi View 6 Inthe View Index Offset box enter the number of channels to offset 7 For example to begin viewing from channel 5 enter an Index Offset value of 4 The plot will begin with channel 5 and display the next sequential channels to equal the number entered in the Num Views box 8 Click OK Creating Feature Plots 248 Feature plots compare two waveform properties such as the first and second peak voltages of two candidate spikes They are ideal for determining how many unique waveforms are present in a signal In OpenScope the feature plot has been designed for examining patterns of spike waveforms The plot works best when viewing time stamped waveforms that are not continuous In OpenEx this type of data is also called snippet data Although other waveforms can be viewed plotting complex waveforms with many points will require intensive amounts of computer time While the default feature of the Y axis is the voltage of the
288. ke does not change there is a potential to loose candidate units or to acquire signal artifacts One problem with using the RMS of the noise floor is that it is affected by changes in unit activity A spike train may change the calculated RMS value and thereby decrease the chance of acquiring all the spikes in a train using this method If the firing units cause a significant change in the RMS a SortSpike2 or similar component should be used SortSpike and SortSpike2 SortSpike and SortSpike2 were designed primarily for use with OpenEx applications and allow online real time spike sorting through OpenController Signals that cross a fixed voltage threshold window discriminator are considered as candidate spikes Units whose waveform also falls within a voltage range during a specified time window are given a unique sort code while units that do not pass through any of the time voltage windows are assigned an unclassified code Because SortSpike and SortSpike2 use a fixed voltage window discriminator spike trains during the onset or offset of a stimulus should not affect the systems ability to acquire unit activity However if the noise floor of the signal changes it may be necessary to change the threshold settings on a regular basis to ensure a proper signal to noise ratio SortSpike and SortSpike2 differ in how the captured signal is stored in the buffer SortSpike like FindSpike centers the peak of the waveform and uses this value as the time
289. kground Color Select the trace color from a color palette Font Color Select the font color from a color palette MultiChannel Grid Color Select the multi channel grid color from a color palette Data Source Setup Parameter Group 188 The settings in this parameter group are automatically set when the Data target is a Store The settings should only be modified when the Data Target is a buffer read directly from a hardware device not a Store Shared Sync Enabled when a Store acquires data from multiple channels sources A sync indicates the position of data in a buffer or when a change in data has occurred these usually generate a logical high Plotting Mode Choices include Tracked and Static The Plotting Mode affects how plot data is updated When Tracked is selected new data is displayed only when changes occur in OpenWorkbench Static displays data based on the polling rate of the control without regard to whether new data has been acquired OpenController Reference Filler Specification Parameter Group Filter Frequency This setting always reflects the current filter value and can be used as the target of another control allowing the filter frequency to be modified by another control such as a slider Default Filter Frequency Enter the default filter frequency to be used if the initialize mode is Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init
290. l or OpenWorkbench to determine when to record data Standby The status of the OpenWorkbench protocol is set to Standby on run In standby mode the circuit will load and run and controls can modify and read data from parameter tags but not from the OpenWorkbench Stores Preview The status of the OpenWorkbench protocol is set to Preview on run In Preview mode users can visualize data from Stores however the Store data is not saved to the tank Use this mode to look at the data before running through an experimental protocol Record The status of the OpenWorkbench protocol is set to Record on run In Record mode data is saved to the tank OpenController Reference Mode on Stop None The Master Mode control does not change the status of the OpenWorkbench protocol on stop Use this if you want another control or OpenWorkbench to control the protocol Standby The status of the OpenWorkbench protocol is set to Standby on stop This allows the circuit to continue running without storing data This is useful to make sure that the proper settings are defined before stimulus presentation or data acquisition occurs Idle The status of the OpenWorkbench protocol is set to Idle on stop This halts the processing chain on the devices Note Use caution when setting Mode on Stop to Idle In Idle mode many values set from OpenController are cleared from the hardware Use Standby mode rather than Idle to use Stop to pause an experiment Using
291. lay Line Target box select the parameter tag associated with the gt Delay line The parameter tag will be in the following location in the Select Target Tree DeviceslNamelBuffersl In the Filter Type box select Highpass Lowpass Bandpass or Notch If Bandpass is selected specify the bandwidth of the filter in octaves in the BW box Click OK HP Filter Fe 622 3 hz BW 1 00 oct Add a slider to the control workspace In the slider property settings dialog box select the proper position parameters and primary target The target is located in the following location in the Select Target Tree ControllcFilterGen xlFilter SpecificationlFilter Frequency Click OK 177 OpenEx User s Guide At this point you should be able to control the filter settings of the Biquad from the slider To test the control set toggle to run mode and move the slider The filter settings should change in the Fc box EE OpController Suae tae HP Filter HP Filter 1000 0 Fc 622 3 hz 850 0 BW 1 00 oct 7000 550 0 400 0 250 0 100 0 Other Control Types About Graphic Frames A frame can be used to create a caption and border for a group of controls After the frame has been added other controls can be dragged to it Spike Thresholds Spikes Threshold 500 ELIT m e B uy a 3 0 500 z 2 Threshold MEEENI Fram
292. lays a dialog box that allows users to select how the data in that row is exported Refresh Buttons Column B Clicking the Refresh button for a row refreshes the View area with data for the selected row Using the Data Selection Table Window The Data Selection Table can be used to select data and to prepare data for export Selecting Data To use the Data Selection Table window select the tank block number then event information for the data to be viewed or exported These three pieces of information must be selected in order that is the tank must be selected before the block can be selected and the block must be selected before the event can be selected Each piece of information can be added by right clicking the cell under the appropriate column heading and then double clicking the desired tank block or event from the list in the selection window When selecting a tank right click in the cell under the Tank heading to bring up the Select Tank dialog By default only registered tanks created with OpenEx 2 0 or greater will be shown in the list To select a tank in the list single click the tank name To select an unregistered new format tank click the Open Existing Tank icon to open the Browse for Folder dialog and navigate to the desired tank folder Note Clicking OK out of this dialog selects the tank and also closes the Select Tank dialog 271 OpenEx User s Guide To display registered Legacy tanks right click in the
293. le click can be used to add the markers For an alternate method of displaying the upper threshold marker see Implementing Artifact Rejection page 160 To set the window discriminator e Drag the threshold markers into position to define the desired magnitude range of the waveforms In the following example the green marker lower bar is the lower threshold and the pink marker topmost bar is the upper threshold To acquire only events within a range the pink and green markers are positioned so that a voltage window is created 157 OpenEx User s Guide 158 Snip 1 20D uv 200 D n 29 To add a time voltage window e Hold down the control key and double click in the center of the sort spike control Snip 1 0 n i 29 Note Grey traces are snippets that will be recorded as unassigned The sort code value for these snippets is set to 0 To assign sort codes to visually identified spikes e Drag the time voltage window sorter into position and resize the length of the bar as needed When the sorter is positioned the color of the snippets that pass through the sorter changes to match the color of the bar Additional time voltage windows can be added in the same way OpenController Reference Snip 1 D n 29 To remove a time voltage window e Drag it off the edge of the control until the pointer changes to a small trash can A message will be displayed to request co
294. lect the Tref check box in Row 1 for an empty epoch column The header for an empty epoch column contains an ellipse 2 Selecta row containing data selection information for the tank block and event To select a row click the row number 3 In the Header row right click the cell containing an ellipse for that column This will open an event selection dialog box The available epoch events are listed that is available in the tank named in the TANK column for the currently selected row 4 To select the epoch to be used as a time reference double click the epoch in the list Additional epochs can be added to subsequent columns however only one time reference epoch can be active at a time Note A specific value or range of values can be selected using the epoch cell for a row For example entering 21000 in an epoch cell will limit the epoch values used to those greater than 1000 A single value may be selected by entering a number without a modifier such as 1000 See the Using Shorthand Characters page 272 for more information The active time reference determines the zero time for the time stamps When the Show check box is selected for an epoch column the epoch will be included in the view area for any row that is refreshed It will be displayed above the data in the scope plot view or show as a separate column in the data table view 274 OpenBrowser Reference Data Browsing About the Data View Area The Data
295. ll Controllers so the user must close Controllers manually before closing OpenWorkbench Fixed in version 1 5 In OpenScope Invalid property value error 380 appears when starting OpenScope if the font size DPI Setting is set too large in Windows Display properties Setting the display font size DPI setting to small fixes the problem Fixed in version 1 1 OpenBrowser is unable to export all events if the time between two successive events is too great Until this issue is resolved make sure that events occur at regular intervals Fixed in version 1 5 Troubleshooting Below is a listing of general issues you may encounter in OpenEx If you encounter an error that is not described below contact tech support at support tdt com or consult the online tech notes database at http www tdt com support htm Access to path and application was denied Occurs when attempting to run an OpenEx project using the Windows XP or Windows 2000 operating system without administrator privileges OpenEx modifies the registry on your Local Machine that is the PC on which you run the application Windows requires that users have administrator level privileges to modify the Local Machine registry Multiple stores have the same name Occurs whenever OpenWorkbench detects more than one Store with the same name Make sure all store names are unique either by renaming the circuit components in RPvdsEx or by disabling the duplicate store in OpenWorkbench
296. ll be recorded as unassigned The sort code value for these snippets is set to 0 When needed the spikes can also be sorted manually Using the Scrolling Threshold and Snippet Sort Controls Manually When a protocol is running manual spike discrimination and sorting can be accomplished from OpenController using the Scrolling Threshold control and Snippet Sort control While these two controls are designed to be used together they can also be used independently This section provides information about using these controls for manual discrimination and spike sorting Manual operation is most often used to make adjustments to the automated threshold and sorting results OpenController Reference Scrolling Threshold Control When this control is run a threshold marker is displayed If the threshold marker is not shown it can be displayed using auto threshold or by pressing and holding down the Shift key and dragging the mouse up or down to adjust the plot scale Ctrl double click can sometimes be used to display the threshold marker Dragging a marker across the edge of the plot will remove the marker A confirmation message will be displayed before the marker is removed To set the threshold manually e Drag the threshold marker into position This defines the desired magnitude range of the waveforms The direction of the threshold marker green bar depends on the specified Threshold Target Typically the target is the Threshold parameter o
297. lot in the grid area of OpenScope W Setup Properties for XY Plot x Source Name YAris y a Source Chennet 0 Source Nome Axis 777 Wom Columns w While all Setup Properties dialog boxes look and behave in a similar fashion the settings available depend upon the plot being modified 4 ROKO Plot settings are grouped into parameter groups The Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the selected plot displayed To display the settings available in another group click the Parameter Group value box and select the group from the list EELA CH eli Common Source Settings When settings such as Source Name must be set using the name of an event a Lookup button gl is located to the right of the value box Clicking the Lookup button opens an Event Selection window OpenScope Reference EVENT Local CATOT OpenEssTankstTANk Block 6 Strobe Double n 0 Snip Float 32 24414 1 Stream Short 32 381 5 Stream Float 16 190 7 In the Event Selection window a list of available events in the current block is displayed Events are organized in rows The EvID event ID corresponds to the OpenWorkbench Store name or Tank Code for secondary tags The event ID is preceded by an icon to indicate the type of event such as snippet continuous waveform Epoch events are marked with the Epoch icon Using the Time Control Window The Time Control window
298. lows users to sort spikes that differ in both shape and direction of the peak However it does not allow users to reject stimulus artifacts which both SortSpike and FindSpike allow If users plan to use electrical stimulation it may be necessary to use SortSpike or FindSpike so that signal artifacts can be removed 73 OpenEx User s Guide 74 SortSpike3 SortSpike3 is a modified version of the SortSpike2 component The only difference between the two components is the generation of the sort code See Determining Sort Code page 160 for more information Each to the spike discrimination components has advantages and disadvantages Users should select a component based on their research needs Continuous Data Continuous data found in OpenEx is typically streamed with a time reference only to the start of the block Continuous data can be stored in several data formats and is useful for observing plot decimated data spike activity raw waveforms and decimated waveforms Stream Store macros The Async Stream Store MC and Async Stream Store MC Async Stream Store 1 4Ch macros are Store nChan 4 supported only by multiprocessor devices such Sr as the RX5 and RZ2 The Stream_Store_1 4Ch and 1 8Ch macros are compatible with TDT s single processor devices Store AWav 1 4 100 24414 1 Hz The Stream Store MC macro is supported Stream Store MC only by multiprocessor devices such as the RX5 and RZ2 Store nChanz4
299. ls true 6 Click the lookup button i in the Synchronization Target box and browse for a synchronization target in the Select Target dialog box 7 Click OK to return to the properties dialog box 8 Click OK to update the control with the modified settings The data table is now synchronized with a target and all rows will be used according to the selected ordering scheme To use only selected rows click the row headers use SHIFT click to select adjacent rows or CTRL click to select non adjacent rows before running the control Using Formulas The data table control supports the use of formulas and functions similarly to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet Formulas can be entered in any cell and may include cell references such as B2 Each formula must start with an equals sign and may include standard math operators such as multiply and divide or functions such as SUM and AVG average The first four rows of the table are reserved for comments or reference values The user can use a formula and cell references to multiply table values by some constant 165 OpenEx User s Guide 166 For example a value in cell B1 could be referenced in a formula for the repetition values in column A as in the table below All repetition values can then be changed by changing the constant in cell B1 Note the table displays formula results not formulas as in the example below A B C D 1 Repeat Constant 20 2 3 4 5 Repeats Rem RP2 1
300. luding a time stamp when there is no need for spike sorting and the noise floor of the signal might vary greatly users can set up a second threshold to reject artifacts when spike sorting is required or if spike trains increase the RMS SortSpike value between two voltage windows peak of spike centered in buffer no time voltage spike sorting yes center of buffer buffer size is determined by defining a value that equals half the size of the buffer including time stamp and sort spike code when spike sorting is required or if the spike rate might affect the RMS of the signal when windowing must be used to minimize stimulus artifacts when circuits that can easily be used with BrainWare or custom ActiveX applications are desired SortSpike2 value above a set voltage threshold threshold can be bimodal threshold crossing placed at 1 4 point of the buffer yes time voltage spike sorting yes 1 4 mark of the buffer buffer size is determined by defining a value that equals 1 4 of the size of the buffer including the time stamp and sort spike code same as for SortSpike except there is no artifact rejection when spikes that exceed above an absolute threshold value must be detected SortSpike3 value above a set voltage threshold threshold can be bimodal threshold crossing placed at 1 4 point of the buffer yes time voltage spike sorting yes 1
301. m more than one computer Security settings need to be modified on both the server and client computers if the user desires simultaneous access to a data tank from more than one computer One example may be a server computer running an OpenEx project saving data locally to a tank named DataTank1 and client computers using OpenScope to access the current active block of DataTank1 on the server In order for software components distributed across networked computers to communicate with each other several DCOM security settings need to be modified on the server computer Perform the following steps to access tank data on a network computer 295 OpenEx User s Guide 296 After these steps are completed a client computer can access data from a registered new format tank or legacy format tank located on a server computer Server computer 1 If the computer belongs to a workgroup instead of a domain make sure that simple file sharing is disabled Open Windows Explorer or double click My Computer click Tools then go to Folder Options click View and uncheck Use simple file sharing Recommended in the Advanced settings Generate a user account on the server computer For illustrative purposes we will use username tankuser password tttuser This account can be a limited user account Remain logged on to an administrator user account for the remainder of the steps From the Control panel click Administrative Tools then C
302. me and so forth at the beginning of the row Specifying subsections allows the data to be stored using several rows Each row or subsection includes the header information such as tank name block name followed by a subset of data samples This option is useful when loading a data file with a large number of samples For example if the user intends to work with exported data in Excel then each row must be limited to no more than 256 cells A file with 300 points in each record can be exported specifying 2 subsections to create two rows dedicated to each record each with 150 sample points This would ensure that the maximum number of cells per row is not exceeded and creates a file with a consistent set of row headers at the beginning of each row See also Max Col Width page 279 for more information Transpose output data in columns transposes columns to rows so that each column is a data set by default OpenEx data is saved in rows This option can be used when exporting a data file containing a large number of samples for use with Microsoft Excel By saving data in columns the user avoids limitations in the maximum number of cells possible in a row PLX Export Specific Settings Export epoch events as plx strobe events used to display epoch events as strobe events in NeuroExplorer M Not used when exporting for use with Plexon s Offline Sorter Gain for spike waveform in K used with Scaling Factor to scale spike data for viewing in
303. ments OpenWorkbench generates a map of all the data in Stores and accessible parameters or parameter tags often contained in macros and transparent to the user of the devices in memory 27 OpenEx User s Guide 28 As a client of OpenWorkbench OpenController accesses this map to modify parameter variables and to read data for visualization Since this map is updated in real time several times a second the data displayed in OpenController is also displayed in real time When OpenController modifies a parameter it is modified in this map and then updated on the device OpenController acquires data from this map to access the variable information for data visualization This results in real time control for device parameters In this tutorial you will adjust filter settings in real time To switch to OpenController e Click Controller 1 in the OpenProject window taor iid OpenProject File Edit Controls View Run Help s D a ee WorkBench RPvdsEx 1 Controller 1 The OpenController window is displayed in Design mode In Design mode you can add configure and modify controls The compiled circuit file used in this tutorial includes digital biquad filters for highpass and lowpass filtering You can add two slide switches to control the corner frequency of these filters Slide switches provide convenient real time switching between several values To create the highpass filter setting slider Click the Controls
304. n several blocks of data from different experimental protocols and different subjects To provide data management users may wish to have tanks automatically generated at regular intervals or based on events Managing New Tank Creation In the OpenProject Preferences dialog box users can choose when and how new data tanks are generated Users can choose to be prompted to create a new tank at regular intervals or based on events The prompt may also include an auto naming scheme To configure Data Tank Synchronization Options 1 Right click the Applications area of the OpenProject window 2 Click Preferences 3 Onthe Data Tank Synchronization tab of the OpenProject Preferences dialog box select the desired configuration option from the Prompt New Data Tank area 4 If auto naming is necessary click the Auto Name Tank check box Note The Tank box must be checked in the OpenProject Configuration window for at least one component for a tank to be automatically generated To make the current setting the default for all new projects gt Select the Save as Default check box in the OpenProject Preferences dialog box 55 OpenEx User s Guide Importing Application Files 56 When users create a new project or add applications to an existing project the user can import an existing file for an application When a file is imported a copy of the file is made which replaces the default application file in the project folder The defaul
305. n Change check box If Refresh on Change is not selected old data is removed and new data is displayed on each epoch within the boundary conditions set by Strobe Epoch Low Range and Strobe Epoch High Range In many cases the user might want to refresh on a particular event For example if an experiment calls for ten presentations of the same stimulus after the last stimulus the stimulus can be updated If the stimulus number is included as an epoch then the plot can be refreshed when the stimulus number reaches a certain value Using Behavior Settings in Raster and Histogram Plots Behavior settings determine how data is displayed and what data is displayed in a plot When an epoch event is defined for a Raster or Histogram plot only the data associated with the epoch s scalar values will be displayed For example if a user wants to display only signal responses that occur when a particular stimulus is presented such as a 9 KHz tone the plot behavior can be set so that a new raster pattern is displayed only when this event occurs Workspace Basics About the OpenScope Workspace The OpenScope workspace includes four collapsible sub windows and a main grid area where plots can be displayed A menu bar and a toolbar are provided for easy access to commands Grid Area penScope m 5 x Ble Edt Control View Help OSG GS 6 amp 6 Tank Select Window TANK lee conacq a BLOCK 6 Block 2 2 f Rint xj EVENT Pd
306. n Visible check box is selected by default for the value watch Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the source target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Units Text Enter the units text to be added to the display Precision Enter the number of digits that to be displayed after the decimal point The precision value should be less than the Number Digits value to display the desired precision Shared Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Caption Text Type caption text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Not used Hidden When Running When the controls are run the editor will be hidden from view Layout Parameter Group 7 Segment Layout Parameters Number Digits Enter the number of digits to be displayed By default the leading unused digits will be displayed as spaces The total number of digits should be sufficient to display the desired precision Leading Style Select a style for leading digits Choices are None Zeros and Spaces Show Sign Checked
307. n is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The source target should be either the Store name from the OpenWorkbench file or the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form ssss for Store name or dddd partag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together the target will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the led caption Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the source target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Poll Period Enter a value i
308. n is organized in rows In the table pictured above row 2 indicates that the compiled circuit file selected will store continuous waveform data acquired from two channels at a 25 kHz sampling rate The tag name Demo was generated when you named the Store in the Stream_Store_1 4Ch macro The Store ID is automatically generated based on that tag name The Store ID is associated with the corresponding data in the tank and is used by other clients such as OpenScope or OpenController when selecting or viewing data You can change the Store ID by typing a new four character code in the Store ID cell but in this tutorial we will use the default Store IDs OpenEx Tutorials D openworkbeneh RP File Setup Device Stores Control View Help 24x r RCO Circuit File tutorial tutorial File Name Standard ACOs Nutorialicx E Circuit Notes RX8 Multi I O Processor Storage Specification Store Tick Tick Type 3 Scaler List s Single xl blocks of 1 floats oe Store Demo Demo Type 5 Cont Waveform 24414 1 2 Record 100 blocks of 2048 floats 25K Preview m 50 Standby 5 xl E Ziirigger B a evice Gy sage E Time Device Cycde Usage Gondition Sweep ofi Event Rate Data Rate Status Messages Ready Loaded Not Specified A Hardware Data Storage Note that at this point the Workbench controls Record Prev
309. n milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Led Color Select a color for the led from a color palette On Off Threshold Type the threshold If the value change is greater than the threshold the indicator will be toggled off or on Led Indicator Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Source Target Select or type the name of the source target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The source target should be either the Store name from the OpenWorkbench file or the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form ssss for Store name or dddd partag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together the target will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift OpenController Reference Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption
310. n mistakes that might occur when modifying RPvdsEx circuits for use with OpenEx e One of the most common problems that users encounter is exceeding the maximum cycle usage The problem can easily go unnoticed because the cycle usage displayed in RPvdsEx and OpenEx will wrap around if it exceeds 100 for example if a large circuit appears to be running a only 10 cycle usage it has probably wrapped around and is really using 110 See the RPvdsEx help for information on reducing cycle usage e Always recompile the circuit after making changes The circuit is automatically recompiled on saving when using the rcx format The common problems below can be avoided by using macros wherever possible within the circuit Using macros in your circuit design automatically handles required constructs reserved OpenEx parameter tags parameter tag naming conventions component parameter dependencies and OpenEx header settings e When deleting parts of a circuit be careful to avoid deleting control and timing constructs or reserved OpenEx parameter tags Deleting these components from the circuit will cause OpenEx to be unable to control the circuit properly e When using OxStream to read data from the hardware the Dec_Factor must be a multiple of the BIk Size otherwise you ll read a partial block back When this happens you ll see data coming back as if all where fine but that data will be erroneous e Always follow the OpenEx naming conventions for pa
311. n the resolution of the stored data This value must be configured correctly for the data type or tank values will be incorrect If the data is being stored in 16 bit resolution usually when passed through the PlotDec16 or CompTo 16 components then the data form is short If the data is being stored in 8 bit resolution usually when passed through the CompTo8 component then the data form is Byte If the data is in 32 bit integer format the data form is Integer Dec Factor is the decimation factor when the streaming data is being decimated When decimation is not required the value should be set to 1 If a PlotDec16 component is being used for decimation then the Dec Factor will be half of nDec on the PlotDec16 If a CompTo16 is being used then the Dec Factor should be set to 1 Channels is the number of channels of snippets being recorded Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used to acquire continuous data must include this construct Data streams are continuously acquired and stored waveforms that do not require a unique time stamp Because the event is streamed and all values are stored TTank can keep account of the precise time when each streamed event was stored Typical streamed events include slow wave brain recordings decimated multi channel extracellular recordings and any event that requires a chart recording of all or most of the data Each data buffer must include paramet
312. nWorkbench file may have several devices and each device might be assigned a different compiled circuit file For example an experiment might require stimuli to be presented at regular intervals but acquisition to be continuous In this case a Protocol can be set up to generate several sweeps for the stimulus presentation The stimulus device would contain a stimulus timing protocol The following settings are enabled when the Sweep Loop check box is selected Count Defines the number of sweeps via the zSwCount parameter tag within the compiled circuit file Period Defines the period of the sweep via the zSwPeriod parameter tag within the compiled circuit file Stop When Done Halts the experiment when all sweeps are completed requires end checking construct If stop when done is not checked TTank will store data after the count has ended This box should only be disabled if the condition is nested within a sweep External Control of the Next Sweep If an asynchronous next sweep control construct is included in the compiled circuit file the period and count can be controlled using OpenController an external trigger or through a custom circuit design Setting the Period to 0 will allow flexible control of the period Setting the Count to 1 will allow flexible control of the count Control of Sweeps Nested in Conditions Condition loops and sweep loops can be nested to generate more complex stimulus and acquisition control When a swee
313. nd display the next sequential channels to equal the number entered in the Num Views box Click OK OpenScope Reference Creating Chart Plots Chart plots are an excellent way of graphing time stamped waveform data such as spike snippets Unlike raster plots that only show the position of the time stamp over a narrow range in the block the chart plot shows the snippet waveform and its exact position in the block of data In a chart plot the Y axis is voltage and the X axis is time in seconds When the scale of the X axis is contracted the position of a snippet along the X axis clearly identifies when in time the snippets occurred and patterns of occurrence over time are emphasized As the scale of the X axis is expanded the shape of the waveform becomes more visible To quickly create a chart plot for single channel of the selected data 1 Drag a data event from the Tank Select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens Select Plot Type Raster Scroll Feature Activity 2 Click Chart The chart plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the chart plot displayed lll Setup Properties for Chart Plot x C Sowce Name 77 Source Channel oo B Time Spen s Multi View Enabled MumVew E NumColumns 4 v By Channel on Settings groups include Common pg 260 Data Source pg 26
314. nels to equal the number entered in the Num Views box Click OK OpenScope Reference When you animate or track data the plot will look like similar to this Creating Histograms Histograms use time stamped values from a variety of data Stores for graphic presentation The most common of these are snippets but lists and even scalars can be included as long as a time stamp is part of the acquired value Users set up the bin size size of time divisions for sorting the time stamps and the parameters for refreshing the plot A common plot in neurophysiology is the peristimulus histogram or PSTH This plot shows the distribution of spike times after a stimulus has been presented Another plot might show spike times for a particular epoch event such as a signal of particular intensity and a final plot might compare spike patterns across channels over the entire experiment Histogram plots in OpenScope show the distribution of waveform time stamps over a set time span Histogram plots can show additive changes over a set time scale or they can be refreshed over a set range In addition the plots can refresh start from zero at each epoch or on changes in an epoch such as a change in the intensity of a stimulus This view provides a good visual representation of how waveform time stamps are distributed from the start of a stimulus To quickly create a histogram plot of for a single channel of the selected data 1 Drag a data event fr
315. nents Implement Triggers Window Help m b Ee t t WorkBench Controller_1 2 In the RPvdsEx window click the File menu and click New You re ready to begin circuit design Adding Required Timing and Synchronization Every project requires some basic timing and control elements In OpenEx all the timing and control functions can be handled by the CoreSweepControl macro Macros are a special construct that comprises a group of circuit components and allows you to configure those components and set their parameters through a simple wizard like properties dialog The CoreSweepControl can handle a broad group of timing and control functions but in this basic project it is primarily responsible for starting and synchronizing timing generators on each real time processor in the OpenEx project and automatically distributing timing signals to all other macros that require them Additionally though not required the CoreSweepControl will store the timing tick discussed at the beginning of the tutorial The CoreSweepControl macro or equivalent circuitry must be included in every OpenEx project To add a CoreSweepControl macro 1 In RPvdsEx click the E insert Macro icon on the RPvdsEx Components toolbar 2 Inthe dialog box select the CoreSweepControl macro from the Macros Timing folder OpenEx User s Guide Insert RPvds Macro Symbol Look in c Timing t er E3 CoreSweepcControl rcm stan
316. nes the period of the sweep and the zSwCount parameter tag defines the number of sweeps 312 Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference The zSwNum and zCdNum parameter tags are optional tags that point to the current sweep and condition numbers When zSwNum and zCdNum are used OpenWorkbench will display the values on the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Note The zCdPeriod zCdCount zSwPeriod and zSwCount parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Nesting Control with End Tracking Uses Description Details 1 12 0 zCdCount s PulseTrain2 amp CdFire gt y OnPer 25000 4 1 180 p nPulse 8 zCdNum RSHipHop 4 9Enab Yes Set 0 Ba 1 21 0 gt R 4 PCount 0 iCompare lt zCdDone b Doo eres zCdCount Test GE N A zSwPeriod 1 15 0 PulseTrain2e amp SwFie zSwCouni 3 _ gt nPer 25000 L enPulse 8 6 zSwNum Rst Run PCount 04 4 99 iCompare lt zSwDone gt 6K 0 zSwCount OTest GE Used in circuits where both conditions and sweeps are used for either stimulation or acquisition and end checking is required Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will use both sweeps and conditions must include some form of nesting control construct When this construct is
317. nfirmation of the deletion Snip 1 D n 29 Note The Snippet Sort control can only be used if a SortSpike SortSpike2 or SortSpike3 component is included in the data generating construct In the signal snippet construct the Sort Code flag must be set to YES The Scrolling Threshold control can be used with all spike components See Type4 Signal Snippets page 323 or Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting page 325 for more information If SortSpike or FindSpike are used only the low threshold is controlled using the Scrolling Threshold Control The high threshold for SortSpike can be controlled in the Snippet Sort Control 159 OpenEx User s Guide 160 Determining Sort Codes The spike sorting components sort spikes using time voltage window discriminators SortSpike and SortSpike2 For the SortSpike and SortSpike2 components a distance algorithm distance from the center of the window is calculated for waveforms that pass through two or more windows to determine which sort code value should be assigned For example in the OpenEx Snippet Sort Control figure below there are two time voltage window discriminators All but one spike passes through both of the windows Since these spikes pass closer to the center of window 2 they are all given sort code 2 coded in red If any of these spikes had passed closer to the center of the yellow window they would have been given sort code 1 yellow The spike that did n
318. ng clocks Cancel Use Legacy Tank v Enable data monitoring r Recording Options Cache Delay secs 6 0 Errors Before Idle 100 Reset hardware on launch Default verbose messaging Synchronize sampling clocks Use Legacy Tank Enable data monitoring Recording Options Cache Delay Seconds Errors Before Idle When the check box is selected any attached System 3 hardware will be reset whenever OpenWorkbench is launched When the check box is selected verbose messaging is the default view for the Messages window When cleared only error and mode change messages will be displayed by default Verbose messaging can be turned on or off for the current session only at any time from within the Messages window When this preference is checked the zBusA trigger is used to synchronize the sampling clocks of all connected devices Note Not supported by RZ Processors When this box is checked the OpenWorkbench Data Storage Dialog will use the Legacy tank view and right click menu This preference enables or disables the OpenWorkbench plotting function This value relates to the size of the OpenWorkbench temporary memory buffers Although a higher setting requires more system RAM it provides less susceptibility to data storage errors Set the number of reported errors that will cause OpenWorkbench to switch to Idle mode The count is restarted each time OpenWorkbench is switched to Recor
319. ng construct must be set up so that both of the buffers are enabled for writing a single sample each time a data value must be saved The sync parameter tag should be connected to the Index of one of the buffers Each time OpenWorkbench polls the device it will check to see if the index has changed and if so it will store the new data and time stamp values Data lists are not dependent on the polling rate of OpenWorkbench for acquiring signals because they can store multiple data points in between polls Details Each data list construct must include parameter tags using the tag root with the following prefixes and suffixes t prefix for the time stamp parameter S prefix for the sync parameter d prefix for the data tags that are stored If several pieces of data need to be stored at the same time for example saving several stimulus parameters such as frequency level and duration each one can be stored as a different channel or they can be saved as secondary tags A suffix of a tilde and a number indicate multiple channels for the data list 321 OpenEx User s Guide No handshaking is used with data lists because OpenWorkbench will always need to look at the current buffer index to determine how much data needs to be stored In this example the intensity and frequency of a time stimulus are changed in rapid fashion on each stimulus sweep The output signal is a gated tone to channel 1 of a System 3 device Stimulus Out Construct
320. ng rate of data storage Store Name Enter a unique name for the stream store nChannels Set the number of channels for this store Sampling Rate Use the Change button to choose a decimated sampling rate for this store Use a value of 1 for no decimation Typical sampling rate settings are provided for some common applications 4 To set the macro to acquire two channels of data set the nChannels value to 2 3 1 Notice the Store Name field In OpenEx each type of data to be stored is called a Store and is X given a unique name used to identify it in the data tank 5 To change the default name of the Store Wave click the Change button next to the Store Name type Demo in the pop up dialog and click OK 6 Click the Options tab or click Next to continue On the Options tab you can select a storage format from a drop down list and set a scale factor For this example leave the format of the stored data in the default floating point 32 bit format Other options include Integer Short Byte or PDec 7 Finally click Done at the bottom of the properties dialog Store 1 Store 2 Stream Store 1 4Ch Store Demo 2Ch Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 190 7 KBytes Sec The Stream Store 1 4Ch macro should now display two active inputs on the left side of the icon Adding Signal Filtering To add signal filtering 1 Click the Insert Macro icon select the HP LP Filter 4Ch macro from the Macrosl Filtering folder click I
321. nged View By Channel or Sort Sorts are generated in the RPvdsEx circuit View Index Offset Starting channel or sort is the View Index Offset value 1 For example To begin viewing data with channel 3 set the View Index Offset value at 2 Show View Index Index is Channel or Sort Code and is determined by the View By value Refresh Control Parameter Group Refresh Epoch Name Define the refresh epoch or indexed event Click the value box to view a list of events Valid choices are preceded by an epoch event icon When a refresh epoch event is defined the plot will be refreshed based on the epoch value according to the settings in the Refresh Control parameter group Strobe Epoch Low Range Set the low value for a range in which the plot will be refreshed according to the defined refresh epoch Leave at the default value of 0 if a range will not be used If the scalar value read from the tank for the defined refresh epoch event is greater than the Strobe Epoch Low Range value then the plot is refreshed If not new data is added along with older data Strobe Epoch High Range Set the high value for a range in which the plot will be refreshed according to the defined refresh epoch Leave at the default value of 1 if a range will not be used If the scalar value read from the tank for the defined refresh epoch event is less than the Strobe Epoch High Range value then the plot is refreshed If not new data is added along with older data
322. nimum value to be displayed for the slider Specify the desired step in the Tick Precision box 10 Click OK A basic slider is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Creating a Knob To quickly create a knob 1 Click the Controls menu point to Sliders Knobs and click Knob The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group 149 OpenEx User s Guide lll Setup Properties for Knob xj Settings groups include nu ServerName OEFAULT s Caption Border pg 187 Primary Taset a Polling pg 213 asset Channet 7 f Value Contot pg 218 Caption Test Appearance pg 192 oi initial Scale pg 190 Initialize Value O Initialize Mode None E Pos Display Visible Label Precision o on ed 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The
323. nippets or synchronized buffers In a pile plot the Y axis is signal intensity such as voltage or dB and the X axis is the record size in samples Waveforms are layered over one another and centered along the X axis As the buffers pile up differences in the shape of the waveforms can easily be distinguished To quickly create a pile plot for a single channel of the selected data 1 Drag a data event from the Tank select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens 235 OpenEx User s Guide 236 Select Plot Type for Snip Histogram Scroll Feature mw nxn n EL LE IAM Chart Activity 2 Click Pile Cancel The pile plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the pile plot displayed lll Setup Properties for Pile Plot x EEGA Common m SewceNeme 5 a Sewcetheme 5 s Ma View Enabled em tans 1 es Settings groups include Common pg 261 Data Source pg 263 Behavior pg 259 Multi View pg 256 Refresh Control pg 257 Scaling pg 257 X Axis Setup pg 258 Y Axis Setup pg 258 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 256 Filtering pg 256 Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Enter the desired channel number in the Source Channel box Ch
324. nnel box Channel information is available in the corresponding OpenWorkbench file In the Cloud Points box enter the minimum number of points to be displayed The plot will refresh when the plot reaches twice the value set If desired select an X axis and or Y axis feature from the drop down menus in the corresponding value box Select from Total Amplitude Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak to Peak Time or Area By default Category Coloring is set to By SortCode and a different color will automatically be assigned to each sort code When data is not associated with a sort code it will be assigned a gray color If sort codes are not present in the data change this setting to None to display data points in a brighter color for easier viewing 249 OpenEx User s Guide 7 Click OK The feature plot is configured for viewing a single channel of data The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse After a single channel feature plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for multi channel viewing To modify a feature plot to view multiple channels of data Tees pe 7 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter 0 in the Source Channel box to ensure that all channels are available for viewing Select the Multi View Enabled check box In the Num Views box enter the total number of views required to see all available channels of data in the multi view This number will typically be th
325. nnel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number OpenController Reference Caption Text Type caption text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Select the check box to display an automatically generated caption for the plot The auto caption is generated using the Store name Clear the check box to hide the auto caption The auto caption should be hidden if no caption is desired or if a user defined caption should be used Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Channel Selector Visible Select the check box to display a channel selector as part of the control The channel selector is a slider that can be used to control which channel of data is used to animate a single view plot By default the channel selector options include channels one through eight The user can modify the number of channels or offset value in the Channel Selector parameter group Time Span Set the time range in seconds and according to the time stamp to be displayed on the X axis Multi View Enabled Select the check box to view each channel or sort code of data in an individual plot Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the
326. nnen nnne enne nnn nnn innen 50 Creating a Project 1 acte tbe to i eet d i te etbru Podos ta e ek EN 51 About the OpenProject Configuration Window sese 52 Adding Applications to an Existing Project ssseeeeneenn enn 54 Ghanging Eaunch Settings tri eoe e t itt eu e a ua ex tou de Pet 54 Stop Making Local Copies of RPvdsEx Files sess 55 Working with Data Tanks in OpenProject 0 cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneneees 55 Importing Application Files iet ei nte htm Re e reet e Pt itr eds 56 Menus and Dialog BOX S 0 c ccccesceceeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeneeceeeeeeaaeeseneeseeeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeseeeeas 57 bendi coee ER 61 Circuit Design OVOrvIGw eode tee dd da e di e Ha ta d n ere a c ei ee dance 63 OpenWorkbench Reference e eese eee ee esee eese eene etna ease ta seta seta seta stesse ese eo setas etas e ease tas e ta sete sees ne a 77 About OpenWhorkbencbi tn i ceti entr He et ate e spied dee teet 79 Understanding OpenEx Data Stores ssssssssssssssssseeeeneen neret nnns 80 About Epoch Evants 5 nidi er dead a dea seid dv aea deny ne ade d p a dun 82 About Tanks i eR e a ete e o tial ete etes da 83 Workspace Basics ir e ied i e Hd edd 84 Configuring an Experiment esses eene en nentes snnt enne es 94 OpenController Reference
327. nsert then click the workspace to add the macro HP LP Filter 4Ch Output 1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Static 300Hz 5000Hz 12dB oct 18 9e mu QV cA OpenEx Tutorials By default many macros contain a field which allows the number of channels to be specified This is useful for reducing unnecessary components and disabling unneeded inputs and outputs The HP LP Filter 4Ch macro was chosen to illustrate this concept and also to keep the circuit as simple as possible Double click the macro to access the macro documentation and setup menus Adjust Properties for HP LP Filter 4Ch x Overview setup Filter Shape Macro Name HP LP Filter 4Ch Cascaded highpass lowpass filter sections with selectable order and dynamic filter coeficient updating 4 channel HP LP Filter 4Ch V pi Macro Class Filtering Target OpenEx No Devices Supported Any Device Version 6 Static 300Hz 5000Hz 12dB oct Sample Rates Supported Any This macro passes up to four channels of floating point data through cascaded highpass HP lowpass LP filter sections Butterworth filter coefficients can be updated through the macro properties dialog through parameter tags via software control or dynamically through a direct connection to the coefficient generator components Inputs Description Data Type Input 1 Input 4 Input data streams Floating Point FreqHP Optional parameter input for dynamically c
328. nstruct Choosing a Data Construct page 66 How do I choose a Spike Component Choosing a Spike Component page 71 How do I calculate the data transfer rate Calculating Data Transfer Rates page 67 How can I view the firing rate on an acquisition channel About Instantaneous Spike Rates page 332 What are epochs About Epoch Events page 82 345 OpenEx User s Guide 346 Known Anomalies Note The latest anomalies and tech notes are always available on the Web at www tdt com T2Support FlashHelp S ystem3TechNotes htm When operating OpenEx at higher data rates generally 16 channels or more measures should be taken to improve overall system performance and efficiency The system is optimized via modifications to the OpenEx project and its Stores and by terminating unnecessary applications running on the host PC The RZ2 does not support sample clock edge synchronization In the OpenWorkbench Preferences dialog box the Synchronize sampling clocks check box is not checked when using the RZ2 Errors may be generated when attempting to filter blocks larger than 2GB See tech note 0222 to resolve this problem A partial install or partial uninstall of OpenEx may not be able to be uninstalled automatically In this situation a manual uninstall may be necessary When a control circuit is not located in the project s local RCOCircuits directory and the user has to browse outside the local directory a local copy i
329. nt data streams using the FindSpike SortSpike Spike Store MC multi processor devices only SortSpike2 or SortSpike3 components and storage of the snippets Control Constructs About Control Constructs OpenEx is designed for time critical data acquisition and stimulus presentation To ensure precise triggering of all System 3 hardware devices a global trigger is sent to each of the System 3 hardware device caddies zBus At the simplest level continuous acquisition this will start a clock that generates a time stamped output Most timing and control can be handled using one of the following macros CoreSweepControl CoreSweepControl P Swe epNum ja SweepDone Priman Store Name Tick The CoreSweepControl macro should be used in every circuit file intended for use in OpenEx It produces core timing and control signals required in all circuits designed for use with OpenEx Its functions include e Starting and synchronizing timing generators on each real time processor used in the OpenEx project e Generating timing pulses for all sweep based e g stimulation or acquisition protocols e Storing the sweep number and timestamp e Optionally creating up to four additional secondary Stores for saving epochs at the onset of each sweep Sweep number and timestamp are saved using a Data List Type 2 storage method The CoreSweepControl works with both single and multi processor devices and automatically distributes timing
330. nt format making use of the full resolution of the system However other data types can be in integer short or byte This value must be configured correctly for the data type or tank values will be incorrect Sort_Code is a flag that determines whether or not a sort code should be stored with spike data This parameter should be set to Yes when using a spike acquisition component which generates a sort code for each snippet stored such as SortSpike SortSpike2 and SortSpike3 It should be set to No when using components that do not generate a sort code such as FindSpike and Tetrode Specifying Yes when no sort code is generated will result in erroneous data being stored as the SortCode Specifying No when a sort code is generated will result in the sort code data not being stored Form more information on spike sorting see Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting page 325 Dec_Factor is the decimation factor when data is stored at a lower rate than the devices sampling rate 323 OpenEx User s Guide 324 In most cases snippet data will not require decimation and this will be set to 1 Channels is the number of channels of snippets being stored Uses Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used to acquire snippet data must include this construct Description The signal snippet stores a waveform and its associated time stamp in to the data tank The value is read from a buffer that stores the
331. nt to Status Indicators and click Led Caption The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group OpenController Reference Settings groups include lll Setup Properties for LedCaption ms Server Name DEFAULT fa sowe Taroa Tewetheme 5 Common pg 202 Target s pg 217 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Appearance pg 193 Poll Period 300 B Led Color IKiSIUt Threshold cs 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 5 Click the Bl button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target 7 Inthe Threshold box type the threshold If the value change is greater than the threshold the indicator will be toggled off or on 8 Click OK A basic led caption control is
332. nter the desired channel number To view multiple channels set to 0 and enable multi view TimeRef Epoc Name Define the epoch or indexed event that will be used for the vertical bars Click the value box to view a list of events Valid choices are preceded by an 5 strobe indexed event icon Time Span Define the time span The X axis will be equal to the value set for Time Span divided by the value set for Bin Width Bin Width Define the Bin Width The X axis will be equal to the value set for Time Span divided by the value set for Bin Width Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When multi view is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Pile Common Parameters Source Name Select the data event Store name from the currently selected tank Source Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number To view multiple channels set to 0 and enable multi view Pile Depth Set the minimum number of traces that will be displayed The maximum number of traces will be twice the value set The plo
333. ntrol with End Tracking Basic Sweep Control Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference zSwPeriod 1 7 0 PulseTrain2e 6 SwFie zSwCount 5 9enPer 25000 enPulse 8 Enab Yes Enable enab PCount 0 zSwNum Uses Description Details Used in circuits for basic sweep based control of stimulus or acquisition The sweep control defines the sweep period and number of acquisitions or presentations An OpenEx circuit that requires some form of sweep control must use one of the sweep or condition constructs This construct allows the user to define the sweep period and the maximum number of sweeps generated during the experimental block through protocol settings in OpenWorkbench The Enable and Reset lines are generated by the triggering construct The SwFire line Hop pulses for a single sample to start each sweep and is generally sent to a stimulus or acquisition control construct The zSwPeriod parameter tag defines the period of the sweep and the zSwCount parameter tag defines the number of sweeps The sweep count will be infinite when the count is set to 1 in OpenWorkbench The zSwNum parameter tag is an optional tag that points to the current sweep number When zSwNum is used OpenWorkbench will display the value on the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Because there is no end checking the Stop When Done and Standby on Stop protocol settings can not be
334. number Caption Text Type caption text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Select the check box to display an automatically generated caption for the plot The auto caption is generated using the SigGen Waveform Target name Clear the check box to hide the auto caption The auto caption should be hidden if no caption is desired or if a user defined caption should be used SGI This setting always reflects the current SGI value and can be used as the target of another control allowing the SGI to be modified by another control such as a slide switch Initialize SGI Type a value to be used as an initial value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load SigGen File Select the SigGen file to use with the SigGen control Slide Switch Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Primary Target Select or type the name of the primary destination target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target OpenController Reference dialog box Click the look up button Bl to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The target should generally be
335. o calculate a new value for the FcFeed Notice that the SerStore stores the new rate once every X number of sample ticks In general the InstRate will not exceed a rate of at most 250 events per second This means that recording the spike rate continuously would be inefficient A decimation rate of between 128 and 256 is recommended depending on the maximum firing rate of the neurons 333 OpenEx User s Guide OpenController Constructs Biquad Filtering When necessary filters can also be implemented without macros A biquad filtering circuit construct is required for each biquad filter that will be implemented through OpenController 1 2 0 o Biquad gt OnBIQ 1 FilterCoe gt gt Coef P e Delay FilterDela y In this example The FilterCoef parameter tag is used by OpenController to load the coefficient values for that filter setting to the Biquad The FIlterDelay parameter tag is used to reset the Biquad delay lines If the delay lines are not zeroed it is possible for the filters to crash These parameter tag names are suggested names The parameter tags must be defined as the Coef Target and Delay Line Target in a control s property settings SigGen Control 334 The following circuit construct must be added to the RPvdsEx circuit to allow users to load and control SigGen generated stimulus through OpenController s SigGen Engine Control In most cases the SigGen file will be used wit
336. o the display Undo On Error When the check box is selected the control will automatically clear input errors Knob Appearance Parameters Knob Style Select a knob style Choices are Raised Edge Raised Sunken and Sunken Edge Edge Width Select a value to adjust the edge width Indicator Style Select an indicator style Choices are Dot Lowered Dot Raised Dot Line Center Line Custom and Triangle Indicator Size Select a value to adjust the Indicator size Indicator Margin Select a value to adjust the Indicator margin OpenController Reference Led Caption Indicator Appearance Parameters Led Color Select a color for the led from a color palette Led Bevel Style Select a bevel style to control the three dimensional appearance of the control Choices are None Raised and Lowered Threshold Type the threshold If the value change is greater than the threshold the indicator will be toggled off or on Plots Graphs Appearance Parameters Plot Title Type a title for the plot Plot Auto Title When the check box is selected the plot will have an auto generated plot title Plot Title Position Select a position for the plot title Plot Line Width Select a numerical value for the plot line width Plot Font Size Select a numerical value for the plot font size Show MultiChannel Grid When the check box is selected the plot will display lines separating channels when the multi channel view option is enabled Highlight To
337. of data is being exported only the gain and scaling factor for that data type will be used and the others will be ignored However keep in mind that all rows of a particular data type will be exported using the same gain and scaling factor If two rows of the same data type are dissimilar they might need to be exported separately Click the Bl button to the right of the Output File Name box The Open dialog box is displayed Browse to the desired location for the data file When using OpenBrowser within OpenProject the default location will be the UserFiles folder for the current project Type a file name in the File Name box and click Open Modify any other settings as desired Click Export Review the messages in the Export Status dialog box and click OK OpenBrowser Reference Troubleshooting the Export Process The following table will help users identify common errors that might occur during the export process Symptom Problem OpenBrowser crashes during export This usually indicates that an error was made in calculating the scaling factor Data seems to small or too large in Offline An error was made in calculating the Sorter Wave Tracker scaling factor Data is displayed with the wrong units in An error was made in selecting a Gain Offline Sorter Wave Tracker setting Offline Sorter Wave Tracker displays a This usually indicates that the block message that states that the user needs size for exported data was greater t
338. og box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group xj Settings groups include S OM Target s pg 217 Server Name DEFAULT Caption Border pg 187 C Soweto i Polling pg 213 Taret Cranner fa Value Control pe 218 Contin e Layout pg 212 Scale pg 214 PaiPei xs fa Pointer pg 190 Mesue e Sections Pe 191 Ra ave Range 50 G Seale Minimum 1 Tick Label Precisin 0 5 cot 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 5 Click the ES button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target 7 Ifthe source target is a Store with multiple channels enter the channel number in the Target Channel box 8 Inthe Scale Minimum box enter the minimum value for gauge values that will be displayed 9 Inthe Scale Maximum box enter the maximum value for gauge values that will be displayed 10 Click OK A basic logarithmic gauge is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol sh
339. ols the hardware devices Local A green arrow will appear to the left of the server name to indicate that it is selected Commands for common tasks such as adding testing and removing a server are available from a shortcut menu by right clicking in the Server box Tank Box In the Tank box users can select or a tank create a new tank and register or unregister existing tanks By default the Tank window list only contains registered tanks that were created with OpenEx 2 0 Right click in the tank window to bring up a shortcut menu 293 OpenEx User s Guide 294 TANK g 6 NDemoT ank2 e Registered Tank Browse For Tank Create New Tank Unregistered Tank Register Tank e UnRegister Tank Registered Legacy Tank Test Tank S Unregistered Legacy Tank Reset Tank wv Show Full Path Refresh Tank List Show Legacy Tanks Find Legacy Tank Browse for Tank Browse for folder Create New Tank Opens the Select Tank file dialog box so that a tank can be added Add Data Tank Register Tank Adds the selected tank tot he Windows Registry UnRegister tank Removes the selected tank from the Windows Registry The tank can still be used on the local machine Test Tank Tests the connection to the server and opens and closes the tank file Reset Tank Resets the selected tank file Show Full Path Toggles detail view on and off In details view the path to the tank is displayed Refresh Tank List Ref
340. om the Tank Select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens 241 OpenEx User s Guide 242 Select Plot Type Cancel Raster Scroll Feature xY Chart Activity 2 Click Histogram The histogram plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the histogram plot displayed D Setup Properties for Histogram Plot x IM EST TA CS CIE TNI Common m SewceName Source Chonnel 0 e TimeRef Epoc Name Time Span Bin wie oor Mal View Enabled i B By Channel one elated settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Settings groups include Common pg 261 Data Source pg 263 Behavior pg 259 Multi View pg 256 Refresh Control pg 257 Scaling pg 257 X Axis Setup pg 258 Y Axis Setup pg 258 Appearance pg 193 Margins pg 189 Colors pg 256 Enter the desired channel number in the Source Channel box Channel information is available in the corresponding OpenWorkbench file Channel selection is affected by the Index value on the Devices page and by the Store Chan Offset value on the Stores page In the TimeRef Epoc Name box select an epoch or indexed event This must be selected to update the histogram In the Time Span box enter the
341. omponent Services Expand Component Services expand Computers right click My Computer select Properties and click on the COM Security tab Under Access Permissions click Edit Defaults click Add and then enter tankuser in the Enter the object names to select field Click Check Names verify spelling then click OK Make sure the group names SYSTEM INTERACTIVE NETWORK and tankuser are all present and all have Local and remote access permission If any group names are missing click Add to enter the group name as before Under Access Permissions click Edit Limits click Add and then enter tankuser in the Enter the object names to select field Click Check Names verify spelling then click OK Make sure the group names ANONYMOUS Everyone and tankuser are all present and all have Local and remote access permission If any group names are missing click Add to enter the group name as before Under Launch and Activation Permissions click Edit Defaults click Add and then enter tankuser in the Enter the object names to select field Click Check Names verify spelling then click OK Make sure the group names SYSTEM INTERACTIVE NETWORK and tankuser are all present and all have Local and remote access permission If any group names are missing click Add to enter the group name as before Under Launch and Activation Permissions click Edit Limits click Add and then enter tankuser
342. on adjacent Rows rows can be selected by holding down the CTRL key and clicking the row numbers Export All Rows Recently Used Files Exit OpenBrowser Reference Exports all rows containing data The fourth section of the File menu lists recently used files Clicking a file name opens the file Closes the OpenBrowser application OpenBrowser Edit Menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Delete Rows Insert Rows Reverses the last action taken in the Data Selection Table window Cuts the selected row s in the Data Selection Table or cuts selected data from the Data Table view Copies the selected row s in the Data Selection Table or copies selected data in the Data Table view Pastes the most recently cut or copied row s in the Data Selection Table or pastes data in the Data Table view Deletes the selected row s in the Data Selection Table If no row is selected the last row is deleted Inserts a row above the currently selected row in the Data Selection Table If no row is selected the row is added to the bottom of the table OpenBrowser View Menu Toolbar Status Bar Data View Table Data Selection Table Time Line Toggles the toolbar between displayed and hidden Toggles the status bar between displayed and hidden Toggles the Data View window between Table view and Scroll Plot view Toggles the Data Selection Table window between displayed and hidden Toggles the Time Line window between
343. onents is a limiting factor this can generate a substantial savings in components Second removing the coefficient generators decreases the cycle usage of the system In general TDT recommends using OpenController s Biquad Coefficient Generators to change filter settings However if you require precise timing for these filter changes we recommend using the ButCoef ButCoef1 or ParCoef RPvdsEx components The examples below show the circuit constructs required to implement Biquad filtering either through OpenController or directly in the compiled circuit file A Biquad filtering circuit construct is required for each biquad filter that will be implemented through OpenController o 120 120 d Biquad Biquad PnBIQ 1 231 01 ABIO FilterCoe 2 gt Coef ButCoefi 4 gt Coef J bGain 1 y O gt Delay FilterDelay FilterSetting t Fc 1000 2BW 100 OT ype LP Enab Yes Biquad Filtering Using OpenController Biquad Filtering Using ButCoef1 In RPvdsEx Filter Settings Changed from Filter Settings Changed with RPvdsEx Coefficient Generator OpenController 175 OpenEx User s Guide 176 In this example The FilterCoef parameter tag is used by OpenController to load the coefficient values for that filter setting to the Biquad The FilterDelay parameter tag is used to reset the Biquad delay lines If the delay lines are not zeroed it is possible for the filters to crash These parameter tag names are su
344. ons gt Launch Details WorkBench Browser m s m Design RPvdsEx Application startup mode Scope Lock Project Cancel L 4 Click OK to close the OpenProject Configuration window As the applications are launched an icon for each application is added to the OpenProject main window and associated application windows are stacked and attached to the OpenProject window You can switch between applications by clicking the application s icon in the OpenProject window Designing a Processing Chain and Generating a Compiled Circuit File 14 Compiled circuit files are the key to customizing your OpenEx experiment design Because compiled circuit files are generated in the RPvdsEx drag and drop interface you can customize experiments at the lowest level without any knowledge of programming This tutorial illustrates just how simple it can be to design a project from the ground up Follow along with these step by step instructions for building a simple macro based OpenEx project to learn important circuit design concepts To select the circuit design application and create a new file 1l Click the RPvdsEx 1 icon in the OpenProject window OpenEx Tutorials The RPvdsEx applications window is brought to the top of the stacked windows that are attached to the tall narrow OpenProject window HIS ox CaS OpenProject Cal File El it View Compo
345. ons to display Slider Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Primary Target Select or type the name of the primary destination target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The target should generally be the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form dddd parTag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together and the target is the source the target name will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift When the target is the destination the target name will be a lesser than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number 207 OpenEx User s Guide 208 Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must
346. ontrol To quickly create a scrolling threshold control Note Before creating the control start OpenWorkbench and open a configuration file which includes a Store for spike sorting The Scrolling Threshold control can only be used if a component such as SortSpike2 is included in the data generating construct See Type4 Signal Snippets page 323 or Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting page 325 for more information If SortSpike or FindSpike are used only the low threshold is controlled using the Scrolling Threshold Control The high threshold for SortSpike can be controlled in the Snippet Sort Control For more information see Implementing Artifact Rejection through OpenController page 161 Click the Controls menu point to Advance Controls and click Scrolling Threshold Counter The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group lll Setup Properties for ThreshCtrl xj DEFAULT f Settings groups include Common pg 206 Target s pg 216 Caption Border pg 187 O vete E Contin Ter Pal Pei 0 E a Cancel
347. ontrol is provided by a trigger line which sets a flag to start the next sweep Once the flag has been recorded the value is reset and the line is ready for the next event This Details Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference construct allows the user to define the maximum number of sweeps generated during the experimental block and control protocol behavior at the end of the sweep loop through protocol settings in OpenWorkbench This construct uses an RSFlipFlop component and two trigger lines The trigger high line Set line sets the output value of the RSFlipFlop high Once the value has been recorded or the event generated the RSFlipFlop is reset Possible inputs for the NextSweep line include an external criterion such as an external trigger or hardware trigger not generated by OpenWorkbench or the ZTRGB signal in a secondary trigger construct Also experiments that use changing sweep durations interstimulus intervals IST and so forth will require timing constructs to trigger the next sweep The RSFlipFlop acts as a switch to start the PulseTrain2 When a criterion is met the PulseTrain2 fires The firing of the pulse then resets the RSFlipFlop to zero The zSwCount parameter tag defines the number of sweeps zSwPeriod is not used in this construct because the sweep durations are not necessarily constant throughout the experiment Instead the asynchronous next sweep controls the duration and timing of each sweep The current
348. ontroller or OpenScope without permanently storing data protocol the method used to present stimuli and or acquire data R Record an OpenWorkbench protocol mode in which devices are loaded and running and data is saved to the tank RPvdsEx file a file that contains an uncompiled circuit designed in a visual drag and drop environment S scalar a single value or series of values that may be stored as data May also be used to refer to the Triggered Scalar oxScalar data construct secondary tag a parameter tag that has been defined as such on an OpenWorkbench Store By configuring a parameter tag as a secondary tag data read from the tag can be saved using the construct and time stamp association with an existing Store Using secondary tags simplifies circuit design by eliminating some components server a program that awaits and fulfills requests from client programs in the same or other computers An application may function as a client with requests for services from other programs and also as a server of requests from other programs For example TTank is a server that responds to requests for data storage and retrieval May also refer to the computer where a server program is located Standby an OpenWorkbench protocol in which devices are loaded and running but signals aren t being acquired and saved to disk This mode allows the user to modify parameter values through OpenController Store a named group of OpenWorkb
349. ontrolling HP corner frequency Floating Point enabled when Control Mode is set to Dynamic FreqLP Optional parameter input for dynamically controlling LP corner frequency Floating Point enabled when Control Mode is set to Dynamic Outputs Output 1 Output 4 Filtered data streams Floating Point Notes This macro works with both single and multi processor devices This manra nan ha unar in nlaca of the followina conctnict Rinnad filtovine Click the Setup tab or click Next To set the macro to allow for real time control to be added later select Access Tags from the Control Mode drop down box This option allows parameter tags to be assigned as targets for real time control in OpenController based upon the Tag Name field in the macro setup menu Click the Filter Shape tab or click Next To set filter shape enter 2 in the Highpass Frequency text box Enter 1000 in the Lowpass Frequency text box Click Done at the bottom of the properties dialog HP LP_Filter_4Ch Dutput 1 Input2 T Output2 Input 3 Output3 Output4 ct l Fu 2Hz fOOOHz 12dByoct 19 OpenEx User s Guide The HP LP Filter 4Ch macro should now display the tag access name Filt under the macro settings summary 3 Tag Names are used in OpenController when assigning targets A target points to the location of X the data being read or the location to which a value will be written Together with parameter tag components found in RPvdsEx
350. or use with OpenEx Several Example compiled circuit files are provided so that the user can run experiments without designing their own circuits The user must also make sure that the compiled circuit file is appropriate for the host device For example a compiled circuit file that includes a four channel circuit design might not be appropriate for a two channel device OpenWorkbench Reference Rename Device Dialog Box The Rename Device Dialog Box is used to rename an existing or newly assigned device RenameDevice NM Device Type RZ2 Device Index 1 Device Name Existing Device Names PAS 1 RP2 1 FN Device Type WorkBench automatically detects the device type part number and lists it here After you have named the device you can return to the Rename Device dialog to view the device type Device Index Each device in your system is given an index number according to its logical position in the system The index number is used to differentiate between multiple devices of the same type Device Name User specified text string used to identify a device in the context of an OpenEx project This name is used in the target selection dialog in OpenController to identify devices Tip Using a standard naming scheme simplifies using OpenWorkbench and OpenController In many cases the same OpenController configuration file will work with several OpenWorkbench configuration files if the user has implemented standard naming
351. ore name or dddd partag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together the target will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the linear gauge Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the source target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Arc Start Enter the position in degrees for the starting position of the arc display Arc Range Enter the range in degrees for the arc display For example 90 degrees for a quarter circle arc Scale Minimum Enter the minimum value for gauge values that will be displayed Scale Maximum Enter the maximum value for gauge values that will be displayed Label Precision Enter the number of digits to be displa
352. orms often called streamed data This tutorial will acquire two channels of streamed data and a simple timing tick Typical streamed events include slow wave brain recordings decimated multi channel extracellular recordings and any event that requires a chart recording of all or most of the data In this case you ll be acquiring continuous waveforms generated digitally within the project for demonstration purposes The timing tick is a standard feature of many OpenEx Projects A pulse will be generated and acquired once per second and stored as a set of scalar values The underlying programming or circuit construct for storing each type of data is different but the RPvdsEx visual design tools you will learn about in this tutorial make it easy to choose the OpenEx User s Guide correct circuit components to ensure that all data is stored and served up for display or analysis quickly and efficiently by OpenEx s TTank data server The Device System 3 includes several real time processor designs with a range of processing speeds onboard memory and input output configurations each tailored to support specific target applications OpenEx supports all of the System 3 processor devices and this tutorial is designed to work with any processor For possible hardware configurations see Connecting the Hardware page 337 or the Installation Guide provided with your system The OpenEx Applications OpenEx is a suite of applications that work in
353. ors or warnings will appear at this time fez RPvdsEx Tutorial rcx liol x 22 sie Edit View Components Implement Triggers Window Help 181 xj josga smael4e 74 eael apaag Se JN amp e Gy 5 I POR 4 c nan w Y at 8L We F lt ROCE y 9 Liss CE CoreSweepControl Primary Store Name Tick HP LP Filter 4Ch Stream Store 1 4Ch Store Demo 2Ch Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 190 7 KBytes Sec Fit fHz 1000Hz f2dE oct Page 0 Errors 0 X Processor Main Warnings Components 44 Compile succeeded 0 error s 0 warning s v Generate RCO Started Generating RP compiling object Generate RCO succeeded Output Tack ist OpenEx Tutorials Configuring OpenWorkbench During an experiment the compiled circuit file you created will be loaded to and run on one of the real time processors OpenWorkbench provides the interface used to assign the compiled circuit file to a device configure high level settings and start and stop the experiment To configure the experiment 1 2 3 Select the Workbench icon in the OpenProject window WorkBench In the OpenWorkbench window the Device Navigator sub window displays all DSP modules connected to your PC Since the project has not yet been configured at this point all devices should appear gray EINE ixi OpenProject
354. ost commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Setup Properties for LedDisplay x Server Name EFAULT C sowe Tao E C Copion Text Settings groups include Common pg 197 Target s pg 217 Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 Value Control pg 218 Appearance pg 192 Layout pg 211 Poll Period 300 Led Color Precision E v co 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box 131 OpenEx User s Guide 132 If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench Click the Es button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target dialog box 5 6 Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target 7 If the source target is a Store with multiple channels enter the channel number in the Target Channel box 8 Enter the number of digits to be displayed in the Number Digits box By default the leading unused digits will be displayed as spaces The total number of digits should be sufficient to display the desired precision 9 Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point in the Precision box 10 Click OK A basi
355. ot pass through either of the windows is given sort code 0 white Spikes passing through only Window 1 would be given sort code 1 and spikes passing through only window 2 would be given sort code 2 SortSpike3 SortSpike3 uses a different method to determine the sort code value This component generates a sort code from ORing together a series of bits based on all of the windows the waveform passes through The bit set for a particular window is determined by the following relationship 2 WindowNum where WindowNum is determined by the order in which the windows are added in OpenEx The distance measure discussed earlier is not used in this scheme For example again in the following figure we have two time voltage window discriminators Spikes that only pass through Window 1 are given sort code 1 yellow Spikes that only pass through Window 2 are given sort code 2 red Spikes that pass through both Window 1 and Window 2 are given sort code 3 light blue OpenController Reference uv 200 6 n 29 Since OpenEx will display 16 unique colors for the sort code values no more than four time voltage window discriminators should be used when using this component with OpenEx Implementing Artifact Rejection through OpenController When OpenController s spike detection feature is implemented using the SortSpike component see Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting page 325 auto thresholding can be used to set the minimum thr
356. ould be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar 130 OpenController Reference About Numeric Displays Numeric displays show a precise variable value A common use of a display would be to show the filter settings of the signal input the exact threshold setting for a discriminator or the sweep number of the stimulus Before using a numeric display the user should determine what variable is to be measured This variable must either be an OpenWorkbench Store or have a parameter tag associated with it There are two types of numeric displays the Value Watch and the 7 Segment Display Amplitude Threshold IEAM 7 Segment Display Value Watch Both displays work similarly and vary mostly in appearance The 7 Segment Display is styled to appear similar to a typical LCD numeric display There are also two small but perhaps more significant differences The Value Watch allows unit text to be added to the display by the user The 7 segment display allows the display of a positive or negative sign Creating a 7 Segment Display To quickly create a 7 segment display 1 Click the Controls menu point to Numeric Displays and click 7 Segment Display The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the m
357. out the experiment however may cause problems 67 OpenEx User s Guide 68 The maximum transfer rate for a snippet is calculated as Maximum number of events per second Block size Number of channels Data type Float Byte Single I32 or 116 For example if the maximum number events are 50 per second the block size is 32 points the number of channels is 16 and the data type is float then Events 50 per second Block Size 32 Channel Count 216 Data Type Float 4 bytes This yields the equation 50 32 16 4 102 400 bytes per second The maximum for streamed data is calculated as Compiled circuit file sample rate Decimation factor Number of channels Data type For example if 16 channels of data are acquired at 25 kHz with no decimation and in Single format 16 bit then SR 24414 0625 Channel Count 16 Decimation Factor 1 Data Type Single 2 bytes This yields the equation 24414 0625 1 16 2 2 781 250 bytes per second What about acquiring snippets and streamed data When acquiring multiple data types sum the total transfer rates For example if the data acquired was 16 channels of snippets and 16 channels of evoked potentials 1000 Hz sample rate along with decimated waveforms the calculations might look like this Snippets Events 50 per second Block Size 32 Channel Count 16 Data Type Float 4 bytes 50 32 16 4 102 400 bytes per second Streamed dat
358. p Trace When the check box is selected the plot will highlight the most recent event displayed Plot Type Select between line and dotted plot types Slider Appearance Parameters Orientation Select the orientation off the slider movement Choices are Vertical and Horizontal Ends Margin Select a value to adjust the margins from the top and bottom ends of the control Pointer Style Select the display style of the slider pointer Choices are Led Pointer Bar and Light Bar Pointer Height Select a value to adjust the pointer height Pointer Width Select a value to adjust the pointer width Pointer Color Select a color value from a color palette for the pointer Track Style Select display styles for the slide switch track Choices are Box Line Bevel Raised and Bevel Lowered Major Tick Style Select a style for the major tick Choices are None Raised and Lowered Minor Tick Style Select a style for the minor tick Choices are None Raised and Lowered Major Tick Length Select a value for the major tick length Minor Tick Length Select a value for the minor tick length Tick Margin Type a value to adjust the tick margin left or right Slide Switch Appearance Parameters Pointer Style Select display types for the slide switch pointer Choices are Led Pointer Bar Light Bar Pointer Led Color Select a color value from a color palette for the pointer led Pointer Height Select a value to adjust the pointer height
359. p and a condition are used in the same protocol the condition triggers the sweep How triggering occurs depends on the sweep nested in condition control construct used OpenWorkbench Reference ZIrgB Action on Done If the nested sweep with end tracking construct is used the option selected under zTrgB Action on Done will be applied at the end of the sweep cycle indicated by the zSwDone parameter tag within the compiled circuit file None OpenWorkbench will not issue a zBusB trigger at the end of the sweep cycle Issue Trigger OpenWorkbench will issue a zBusB trigger at the end of the sweep cycle Enable Button The zTrgB button in the System Control window will be available so that the user can control triggering of the next condition manually from the PC If timing is critical the Enable Button option should not be used Triggering with an internal trigger line or a digital trigger will yield more precise timing Condition Loop These settings are available from the OpenWorkbench Setup menu Condition Loop x Enabled The settings under Condition Count E 1 For lots Loop can be used only if Cancel condition control circuit constructs are included in the Stop When Done compiled circuit file to be used for each device that will use the condition loop Period 1000 ms 0 Handshake A condition loop controls stimulus presentation and or acquisition The Condition Loop settings allow the user to control asp
360. p processes Note Applications other than OpenWorkbench that were not loaded with OpenProject will not appear in the list 341 OpenEx User s Guide 342 Clean Running Applications f The following OpenEx applications are running and must be terminated before continuing C exettame F emame Project tame OpenProject SP0001 SP0001 2 OpenvVorkbench WorkBench xpm SP0001 Em OpenController MainCtrl xpc ISPO001 SPOD01 5 OpenScope Scope 1 xsp ISPOD01 Quit halts the project creation process closes the Clean Running Applications window and Terminate Listed Applications and Continue Terminate Listed Applications and Continue terminates all applications listed allows the current OpenEx applications to continue running The applet is launched in the following four conditions e OpenWorkbench is running and OpenProject attempts to run Choose either to terminate or quit e OpenProject is running and a new OpenProject attempts to run Choose either to terminate or quit e OpenProject or OpenWorkbench fail to close properly such as when an application quits unexpectedly and a new OpenProject attempts to run Choose to terminate e Immediately after Installation of OpenEx This occurs because the applications are being registered and that process has not been completed Choose to quit so that the registration process can continue The applications will exit on their own
361. parameter can be used to write a value to multiple targets such as parameter tags and visualization controls Selecting Targets The target can be selected using the Select Target dialog box The properties dialog box can be displayed by double clicking the control E Setup Properties for SlideSwitch E x 3 i Pence Coun Sewer Name tod fo Primary Target nt Chanda Target Chennet 5 Coton Ten roa O nno Caption tats vove iR E The Select Target dialog box can be opened by clicking the m button in the Source Target Primary Target or Alternate Target boxes in the property settings In the Select Target dialog box the user can browse through the hierarchy to find the target then click to select it Finally the selected target can be entered in the property settings by clicking OK Using the Master Channel Parameter The Primary Target or Alternate Target can also be the Master Channel parameter This special type of parameter is used to modify the Target channel parameter for a group of controls When used this parameter updates all controls in the same OpenController instance where the Target Channel 1 117 OpenEx User s Guide Controlling the Experimental Protocol OpenController allows user to directly access the protocol modes Record Preview Standby and Idle in the OpenWorkbench System Controls A special control called the Master Mode control can be configured to change the proto
362. pe includes both the control object and the graphical circuit diagram in a single file Users can generate their own compiled circuit files for use with OpenEx or select one of the standard compiled circuit files provided by TDT In RPvdsEx circuits are designed in a drag and drop interface After the circuit is designed a compiled circuit file can be generated from a simple mouse click This means that users can customize experiments in the OpenEx environment without any knowledge of programming By supporting customization all the way down to the signal processing functions being performed at the lowest levels OpenEx offers power and flexibility not available in other systems To learn more about TDT System 3 hardware and RPvdsEx see the System 3 Manual and RPvdsEx Manual OpenEx User s Guide The Client Server Environment OpenEx uses a client server approach that enables the building of powerful software environments from a number of smaller applications Individual applications can be developed to efficiently handle a set of tasks such as visualizing data or exporting data and can even run in parallel For example a data visualization application can interact with the data server where data is stored managed and served up to applications One of the many benefits of this efficient approach is that a single server application can interact with several client applications This means for example that a data server can effectively int
363. penWorkbench or OpenScope application has been added to a row in the Launch Details list a check box is available in the Tank cell Clicking the check box ensures that the tank used by that application is synchronized with the project If the tank is changed for the project it will be changed for all synchronized applications Import Column The cells in this column allow users to import an existing file for use with an added application When a file is imported the imported file overwrites the default application file but retains the default applications file s filename Lock Project This check box locks the project to prevent editing The project may be run but not modified Projects can be unlocked from the OpenProject menu 53 OpenEx User s Guide Adding Applications to an Existing Project You can add applications to an existing project by opening the OpenProject Configuration window and adding applications to the Launch list You can also add an application directly from the OpenProject window using the Add Components command on the OpenProject menu Adding Docked Applications to a Project The main area of the OpenProject window can be used to launch and navigate between applications that are attached to the OpenProject window To add a docked application 1 Right click the Docked Applications area of the OpenProject window 2 Pointto Add Component and click the application to add Launching a Floating Application The area of
364. played beginning with channel 1 4 Enter the number of columns to display in the Num Columns box Depending on the design of your experiment you might want to view a pattern that is representative of the physical or logical distribution of the channels For example if you had electrodes placed in a 4 x 4 grid around the head then it would be useful to see that pattern in OpenScope Similarly if you had electrodes in a linear pattern you might want to have either 1 column or 16 columns 5 Click OK When you animate or track data the plot will look similar to this After a multi channel activity plot has been created settings can be modified to view by sort code To modify a multi channel activity plot to view by sort code 1 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box 2 Click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View 3 Inthe View By box select Sort Code from the drop down list 4 Update the Num Views and View Index Offset values as needed 5 Click OK 255 OpenEx User s Guide Plot Settings Reference About the Plot Settings Reference The Plot Settings Reference corresponds to a parameter group in the properties dialog box How To Find These Settings Settings in this reference are available in the properties dialog boxes To open the properties dialog box for a plot double click the plot in the grid area of OpenScope Colors Parameter Group Category Coloring Set how the trace colors
365. plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the raster plot displayed W Setup Properties for Raster Plot x Settings groups include Common pg 262 Data Source pg 263 Somes nane 77 J Mu Vien pe 250 Refresh Control pg 257 Source Channel n X Axis Setup pg 258 Raster Rows Y Axis Setup pg 258 z Appearance pg 193 TimeRef Epoc Name gm Margins pg 189 Time Span 0 Colors pg 256 Multi View Enabled Category Coloring By Channel se Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group 3 Enter the desired channel number in the Source Channel box Channel information is available in the corresponding OpenWorkbench file 4 Enter the desired number of rows to be displayed in the Raster Rows box 5 Inthe TimeRef Epoc Name box select an epoch or indexed event This will define the Y Axis 245 OpenEx User s Guide 246 In the Time Span box enter a time stamp value for the maximum value of the X axis This value should usually be the time span of the indexed event according to the time stamp Click OK The raster plot is configured for viewing a single channel The plot can be positioned and resized using the mouse When you animate or track data the plot will look like this NIF 1 To modify a raster plot
366. plot s visible area Hold down the control key and double click in the center of the control to add a time voltage window bar Point to the center of a time voltage window bar then drag it into position Point to the end of a time voltage window bar and drag to resize the bar as needed You can add multiple time voltage windows To remove a time voltage bar drag it off the edge of the plot OpenScope 340 Press and hold down the Shift key and drag the mouse up or down or right and left to adjust the scale of a plot Double click a plot to display its properties dialog box Click a tank block and event in the Tank Navigator to select data for plots Data must be selected in the Tank Select window before you can create or animate a plot Because tracking always uses the current data you can animate the plot in track mode without first selecting the data Drag an event to the grid area to create a plot Add an event to the timeline by dragging it from the Events list to the Time Control window Look for the F Epoch icon to identify epoch events Epochs are defined in OpenWorkbench and used in OpenScope and OpenBrowser to organize and display data Epochs are stored events that are associated with a block s timeline Tips Tricks and Technical Information Open Browser e Selecta row before adding an Tref epoch To add the epoch right click the next available cell in the header row row 4 and select an event from the ava
367. ponding Show check boxes in the Data Selection Table window All data can be copied and pasted from the table to a Microsoft Word document or Excel spreadsheet To copy the data select the range of cells right click the selected cells and click the Copy command on the shortcut menu To paste the data into another application go to that application and press CTRL V In the example below the event time stamp in this case the spike times channel number and epochs are displayed ie OpenBrowser Server Local Ee cona Retreat Ee cons Rees Ee cone reren 2 Block 10 Snip 1791754 fi 1000 a Blck10 snip 1892228 1 1000 Block 10 Snip 1992745 f 1000 Block 10 Snip 2093179 f1 1000 Alack 4n Enin 2 10365A 4 anon in Using the Time Line Window 276 The Time Line window provides a timeline and vertical line indicator that moves as data is animated in the Scroll Plot view of the Data View area The Time Line window can also be used to move to a particular time or event in the Data View area Epoch events that are included in the selected data area are also added to the window The Time Line window gives a precise description of when data was collected 4 076 6 114 8 152 adi 3 OpenBrowser Reference Timeline by Time Stamps T 10 190s 0 000 2 038 4 076 6 114 8 152 10 3
368. pplications that access the OpenEx servers TTank and OpenWorkbench OpenBrowser is a data export and viewing application that accesses data through the TTank data server Data from one or more data tanks can be selected previewed and exported to a standard ASCII file format or formats for Plexon s Offline Sorter or NeuroExplorer Add on Clients TDT continues to develop client applications that can be added to the OpenEx core suite to round out functionality including tools for data analysis such as OpenExplorer and OpenSorter OpenEx Overview Real Time Control Real time control and precise timing control are critical to good experimental design Traditionally systems offering these important features have been built on fixed hardware software platforms as a result they are inflexible and cannot easily be expanded TDT s System 3 real time processors and RPvdsEx circuit design software address this traditional shortcoming by offering an easy to program development environment that allows users to customize the function of each processing device in their system TDT processors are controlled by circuits within a compiled circuit file either rco or rcx format Circuits designed for OpenEx include parameter tags that allow users to control timing triggering data storage and modification of other parameter values By utilizing these tags OpenEx allows users to control the experiment in real time Users can send values to the tags from
369. provides a timeline and vertical line indicator that moves as data is animated The Time Control Window can also be used to move to a particular time or event Epochs or indexed events are also added to the window The Time Control window gives a precise description of when data was collected Timeline by Time Stamps T 0 544s i 0 000 0 121 0 241 0 362 0 483 0 603 b T 0 544s The current time stamp Moves the indicator back by time stamps Moves the indicator forward by time stamps 229 OpenEx User s Guide Scale Controls gt k Expands scale in small steps E b Shrinks scale in small steps k Expands scale in large steps p Shrinks scale in large steps B E Timeline by Events Lo fo 8 The name of event displayed on corresponding line Tick Moves the indicator back by events E Moves the indicator forward by events 0 The current event value Using the Select Tank Window 230 The Select Tank window is accessed from the Data Source command on the File menu and can be used as an alternative means of selecting data for animation when the Tank Select window Tank Navigator is not displayed Detailed information about the data is displayed in the three interdependent areas of the window and commands for each area are available from a shortcut menu right click The TANK area lists tanks that have been added to the OpenEx registry Selecting a Tank di
370. r 1 Click the Controls menu point to Advanced Controls and click Biquad Coefficient Generator The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box 12 OpenController Reference The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group W Setup Properties for FiltGen xj Settings groups include Common pg 198 Caption Border pg 187 Server Name Loca Polling pg 213 CoefTaget Jad Filter Specification pg 189 Belay tine Ta Target Channel Caption Text E Auto Caption Default Filter Frequency ERES Initialize Mode None E Filter Type Highpass Bandwidth 1 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench In the Coef Target box select the parameter tag associated with the gt Coef line in the Biquad component The parameter tag will be in the following location in the Select Target Tree DeviceslNamelBuffersl In the De
371. r entered in the Num Views box Click OK Creating Activity Plots Activity plots are used to view the amount of spike or other activity occurring on a given channel or group of channels Activity plots make it easy to view spike counts or to compare spike rates between acquisition channels Activity plots use time stamped values from a variety of data Stores for graphic presentation The most common of these are snippets but lists and even buffers can be included as long as a time stamp is part of the acquired value Users define the minimum and maximum value to be displayed assign a color to minimum and maximum and choose a parameter for refreshing the plot As the plot is animated the color of an activity cell varies in intensity across a range corresponding to the minimum and maximum defined values To quickly create an activity plot for combined data for all channels of the selected data 1 Drag a data event from the Tank Select window to the grid area The Select Plot Type box opens 253 OpenEx User s Guide 254 Select Plot Type 2 Click Activity Cancel The activity plot is added to the grid area and the Setup Properties dialog box opens with the most commonly used settings for the activity plot displayed lll Setup Properties for Unknown xj IM TESTIS CH FIERI TI Common Y SewceNane Sn a co aM EN Multi View Enabled NumCohmn Refresh Epoc Name mg ons
372. rameter tags Be aware of reserved tags and tag prefixes especially when adding a data construct Store If the correct reserved tags and prefixes are not used then OpenEx might not be able to control the circuit or store data correctly e After changing a value related to a Store in the circuit for example changing the block size of an OxStream any OpenController controls that use the corresponding Store as a target will not work properly Double click on each of these controls and re select the Store as the Data Target and then they will work again 339 OpenEx User s Guide OpenEx Cheat Sheet The cheat sheet provides a quick reference to some of the shortcuts and non menu driven features of the OpenEx applications Click an application below to see the quick list for that application OpenController Press and hold down the Shift key and drag the mouse up or down or right or left to adjust the scale of a plot control Double click a control to display its properties dialog box To display the properties dialog box for the Controller window double click the grid area Design mode The dialog includes parameters for behaviors such as Auto Run and Lock on Stop Right click the scrolling threshold or snippet sort controls to display the auto sorting and auto thresholding commands Snippet Sort Control Adjust the scale of the Snippet Sort plot as described above to show threshold markers that are not positioned in the
373. red on the same computer where OpenController is running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench 139 OpenEx User s Guide 140 8 Click the B button in the Source Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target The source target should be an OpenWorkbench Store Chart plots are often used to view snippets A Tip look for this icon to identify snippets in the Select Target dialog box If the source target is a Store with multiple channels enter the channel number in the Target Channel box Click OK A basic chart plot is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar Creating a Scrolling Plot To quickly create a scrolling channel plot 1 Click the Controls menu point to Plots Graphs and click Scrolling Plot The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group S
374. reshes the Tank box display Show Legacy Tanks Displays registered legacy format tanks in the tank list Find Legacy Tanks Opens the Select Tank File dialog box and allows users to browse for tanks stored in the legacy format by showing files with a tbk file extension Opening an Existing Tank To open an existing new format tank that is not listed in the tank window click the Open Existing Tank icon to open the Browse for Folder dialog and navigate to the desired tank folder Note Clicking OK out of this dialog selects the tank and also closes the Select Tank dialog To open an existing legacy tank right click and select Find Legacy Tank TTank Reference Creating a New Tank To create a new format data tank click the Create New Tank icon el This opens the Add Data Tank dialog Select a path for the data tank folder and provide a unique name for the tank Registering Unregistering a Tank Users can register or unregister a tank by right clicking in the Tank box and selecting the appropriate option from the shortcut menu These actions can be performed on new format and legacy format tanks Unregistering a tank does not delete the tank files however only registered tanks will be listed in the Tank window Debug Box v Debug Active Processed Event 2 iRd 95 nCached 1 LS 92 999762 B 4 Cached Events 2 nLoop 1600000 iwr 100096 iRd 95 r Processed Event 1 iRd 100095 nCached 2 LS 93 9997 Processed Event 2 iRd 100096 nCached 1
375. rimary store Ca The Epoc Store 1 4Ch macro stores scalar data according to a rising trigger edge It is useful for simple scalar recording oe eee oe The Epoc_Store_with_Offset offers the same functionality of the Epoc_Store macro but also allows buddy epochs to be set For more information see About Epoch Events page 82 Uses The Epoc_Store macros are typically used to store scalar values such as stimulus variables Description Epoc_Store macros store an Epoch value on the rising falling or either edge of the selected trigger Users can choose to use the macro Trigger input the onset of each system sweep or whenever the value of the primary input changes as the trigger Up to four secondary Stores can also be enabled to store other values on each trigger which reference the primary store Secondary Tags Secondary tags are a way of sharing time stamps between data Stores and are defined in the Stores section of OpenWorkbench In some cases there are multiple pieces of data that are always stored at the same time For example stimulus parameters such as amplitude and frequency might need to be saved once per sweep In these situations it is convenient to use Secondary Tags Many data saving macros allow secondary tags to be configured easily requiring only the primary store to be specified For example the Epoc_Store macro offers up to four secondary tags to be stored in reference to its primary store After the primary
376. ronization target changes On Tag True the table will be synchronized with the synchronization target and values will be sent whenever the synchronization target value equals true Synchronization Target Select a target to which the data table will be synchronized Click the lookup button to open the Select Target dialog box 199 OpenEx User s Guide 200 Feature Plot Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Source Target Select the data event Store name to be plotted Target Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number Caption Text Type caption text to display on the plot The Auto Caption check box must be cleared before caption text will be used Auto Caption Select the check box to display an automatically generated caption for the plot The auto caption is generated using the Store name Clear the check box to hide the auto caption The auto caption should be hidden if no caption is desired or if a user defined caption should be used Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Channel Selector Visible Select the check box to display a channel selector as part of the control The channel selector is a slider that can be used to control which channel of data is used to animate a s
377. rowse for and select a target 7 Inthe Button Text box type text to be displayed on the button 8 Inthe Value when On box specify a value for when the button is on 9 Inthe Value when Off box specify a value for when the button is off 10 Click OK A momentary switch button is created Before running the control the corresponding OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be running To run the control click Run on the menu bar 146 OpenController Reference Creating a Slide Switch To quickly create a Slide Switch 1 9 Click the Controls menu point to Switches and click Slide Switch The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group lll Setup Properties for SlideSwitch xj Settings groups include Target s pg 216 Server Name DEFAULT Caption Border pg 187 Polling pg 213 1 Value Control pg 218 Appearance pg 193 Z Layout pg 212 Switch Position pg 191 Position Labels On on If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data
378. rt codes based on a time amplitude windows The feature space of the two plots based on peak 1 and peak 2 is displayed on the feature plot on the right OpenController Reference SSPK Feature Plot 600 6 uy vi e 4 600 6 b 5 Ve 4 5 About Value Inputs n 29 Value inputs are used to modify a variable In the input box users input the variable and press the send arrow to change the value of a parameter tag Value inputs can be used to set filter values a single frequency or intensity value that will change or a number such as the number of sweeps between stimuli E Modifiers Input Box Creating an Input Box To quickly create an input box 1 Click the Controls menu point to Value Input and click Input Box The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group 143 OpenEx User s Guide lll Setup Properties for Input E xl Server Name DEFAULT a C Pima Target Target Channel fe Cention Text tritatze Value 0 Punts Text Settings groups include Common pg 200 Target s pg
379. rt configuration during the data selection process That way if you use copy and paste to add rows the export configuration will also be copied Be sure to use one or more of the Append File Name by check boxes to ensure that each row ill have a unique file name 4 If exporting only selected rows select the rows to export and click Export Selected Rows on the File menu 5 If exporting all rows click Export All Rows on the File menu 6 Review the messages in the Export Status dialog box and click OK Export to a Single File Note if exporting multiple channels to a single PLX file for use in Offline Sorter s Tetrode Mode use a single row not different rows for each channel 1 10 11 12 When exporting to a single file ensure that the Multi File check box in cell A3 of the Data Selection Table window is not checked If exporting a single row select the row and click Export Current Row on the File menu If exporting only selected rows select the rows to export and click Export Selected Rows on the File menu If exporting all rows click Export All Rows on the File menu In the Data Export Format Configuration dialog box ensure that PLX is selected in the File Type box Enter the gain and scaling factor for each type of data to be exported If both streamed and snippet data are being exported to the same file values can be specified for each type of data in a single export configuration dialog box If only one type
380. rties of the system For example an epoch can be set when an event such as a button press or an update of a stimulus paradigm from OpenController occurs Epoch events can be continuous or intermittent and are marked as sections within a block Each section is associated with a scalar value Standard strobed events are continuous That is when one epoch ends the next begins The strobe type ONset or OFFset determines whether the time stamp occurs at the start or the end of the epoch Two epoch Stores one ONSET and the other OFFSET can be declared as buddies to create an epoch that is not continuous This creates a single epoch that starts at the occurrence of the ONSET epoch and ends at occurrence of the OFFSET epoch For example Store Strobe Type Buddy Epoch Pre ONset Strobe Pre OFFset Strobe Pre SwpN ONset epoch Timeline in OpenScope 0 765 1 147 Onset Strobe Pre Offset Strobe Pre Using buddy items will decrease the size of the tank and minimize storage of extraneous information Creating Epochs A Store that includes a sync and time stamp parameter can be set as an epoch event in OpenWorkbench by setting the Strobe Type parameter in the Storage Specification Table you might have to right click and select Show All Fields to view this data column The strobe type determines whether the time stamp occurs at the start or the end of the epoch Open
381. ruct only one s variable is required Data Form Float Channels 0 TimeStamp 1 6 0 The time stamp and all channel values will have the same Store qum SerStore sequence position in each of the buffers Size 1000 pest Fp praco Sec i Index 0 7 SFr The data Store contains the variable information for the list In gt gt Data ak tFreq 5 5 addition secondary tags can be added that are stored with these pa store 1 11 0 values See Secondary tags page 69 of Freq d SerStore Size 1000 p SRst 0 The secondary tag has a different Tag root from the primary Stores WrEnab 1 k Index 0 l dFre Secondary Tag 1 13 0 For Level SToneLev SerStore Size 1000 Rst 0 WrEnab 1 Index 0 dLev b dE r Type 4 Signal Snippets Also see Signal Snippets with Spike Sorting page 325 oxSnippet Tag_Root BIk Size 32 Data Form Float Sort CodezNo Dec Factor 1 Channels 0 About the oxSnippet Component Tag_Root identifies the base parameter name Parameter tags in the circuit that use the base parameter name will be associated with the oxSnippet component Blk_Size indicates the block size of the snippet acquired The value set here needs to match the width of the snippet as defined by the spike detection component or processor type such as SortSpike SortSpike2 SortSpike3 or FindSpike Data_Form is the format of the data Most snippet data is in floating poi
382. rver name The default value of Local selects the local server Coef Target Select the parameter tag associated with the gt Coef line in the Biquad component Delay Line Target Select the parameter tag associated with the gt Delay line Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the coef target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Default Filter Frequency Enter the default filter frequency to be used if the initialize mode is Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load Filter Type Select the filter type from a drop down list Choices are Lowpass Highpass Bandpass and Notch Bandwidth Select the bandwidth of the filter in octaves This setting is used only if the Filter Type is set to Bandpass Chart Plot Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Source Target Select the data event Store name to be plotted Target Channel Selects the cha
383. s OpenWorkbench through the zSwDone parameter tag to indicate that the last sweep has been reached Using the Standby on Stop check box and the Stop When Done check box under Sweep Loop the protocol can be set to go to Idle check boxed cleared or Standby check box selected mode when the zSwDone parameter tag value is set high A trigger ZI rgB can also be generated and controlled by the user via the zSwDone parameter tag Control of the trigger is based on settings found under ZTrgB Action on Done The zSwNum parameter tag is an optional tag that points to the current sweep number When zSwNum is used OpenWorkbench will display the value on the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Note The zSwPeriod zSwCount and zSwDone parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Asynchronous Next Sweep Control Uses Description 1 11 0 PulseTrain2e amp SwFie zSwCount nPer 25000 pa ae _ponPulse 8 RSHipHop ate PLate 0 n PCount 0 lt zSwNum 1 14 0 ECCE aT ANNE gt iCompare pag zSwDone zSwCount gt 9K 8 Test GE Used in circuits where manual or external control of the next sweep is required Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will use a sweep must include some form of sweep control construct In this construct asynchronous next sweep c
384. s created within the project s RCOCircuits folder this local copy behavior is controlled by a preference within OpenProject In version 2 0 the control circuit file path seems correct and a local copy is generated however the project is still pointing to and using the original browsed version of the circuit Therefore changes made to the local copy of the circuit have no effect A channel of streamed data might fail to be stored when acquiring data using OpenEx The probability of this occurring is very low It has been observed only for continuous data and only when using mirror devices However there is no guarantee that the problem is restricted to these conditions We recommend avoiding putting OpenWorkbench in Idle mode until the end of the experiment Instead use Standby mode when acquisition must be stopped First noted in 1 57 An error message such as unable to connect to specified device might be generated when OpenWorkbench attempts to reset multiprocessor devices RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8 To avoid this issue change OpenWorkbench preferences so that hardware is not automatically reset on launch See Tech Note 0156 for more information First noted in 1 57 Values in the OpenController Data Table are displayed with a precision of 1 However the actual value is retained For example a value of 0 0001 is displayed as 0 0 but 1 0001 will be passed to the target OpenController crashes and an error appears stating MainCtrl cause
385. s menu point to Switches and click Switch Button The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the grid area 3 Double click the control to display the properties dialog box The dialog box opens with the most commonly changed settings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group lll Setup Properties for Switch xj Settings groups include Target s pg 216 Server Name DEFAULT Caption Border pg 187 Pinan Taner Poling pe 213 1 Value Control pg 218 a Behavior pg 197 Weise Vale C Vawe when ojo ons 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench Click the B button in the Primary Target box to display the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog browse for and select a target In the Button Text box type text to be displayed on the button In the Value when On box specify a value for when the switch is on 2E Or cd In the Value when Off box specify a value for when the switch is off 10 Click OK A basic switch button is created
386. s to existing projects or to change the launch modes of previously added applications After a project has been created the OpenProject Configuration window can be accessed through the Configure Project command on the OpenProject menu OpenProject Configuration x Project Name 1ChanAcq File Location C TDT OpenExtExamples Description 1 channel acquisition example Uses 1 RP2 collects spikes and streaming data View Edit Applications gt Launch Details Application 1Chan amp cq WorkBench Browser 1ChanAcqCtr Design 1ChanA amp caqScope ldle Iri Controller RPvdsEx A Scope Lock Project D Cancel Project Name The name of the folder that will be created to store all files for the project File Location The location where the project folder will be created Type a path in the File Location click the browse button to browse for a path or click the arrow to select a recent location from a drop down list Description An optional text description associated with the project The View Edit button can be used to add edit the description or to view lengthy descriptions Applications Displays an icon for each application type that can be added to a project OpenProject Reference Double click an icon or drag an icon to the Launch Details area to add the application Multiple instances of client applications such as OpenScope and OpenController may
387. scheme Many of the Device Names in the OpenEx examples follow the form Stim stimulus devices Ampl Amp2 etc acquisition devices To configure a device 1 Select the device by clicking its icon in the Device Navigator 2 Clickthe m Browse button to the right of the File Name box 3 Browse to the desired file either rco or rcx format 4 When you select the compiled circuit file and click Open a Rename Device dialog box is opened Here you can give the device a descriptive name such as Amp or Stim This dialog is also available from the Rename Device command on the Device menu 5 Type a device name and click OK to complete configuration of the device 95 OpenEx User s Guide Storage Specification 96 When a compiled circuit file has been assigned to a selected device Workbench reads the compiled circuit file and displays information about the data storage constructs in the Storage Specification table The user can view disable enable or fetch from a list of data storage circuit constructs found in the compiled circuit file that will run on the selected device When the Workbench file is saved any user defined values are saved as part of the Workbench configuration and are used to populate the table the next time the project is loaded Storage Specification Remum eese r E Store Wave Wave Type 5 Cont Waveform 244141 25K blocks of 2048 floats Store Tick Tick Type 3 Scaler List s Single
388. ser Controller RPvdsEx Application Lock Project D Cancel al 2 In the OpenProject Configuration window you can enter a project name and description The project name will be used to generate a folder where all the project files will be stored In the Project Name box type Tutorial 3 In the File Location box the default location for new project directories the My Projects folder is displayed We recommend keeping all your projects under this folder so leave the File Location information as is Note If the My Projects folder is not displayed click the down arrow to select it from the drop down list or the n Browse button to locate it manually 4 To add a description click the View Edit button click the Edit check box and type a description View Edit Description Acquires 2 channels of continuous waveforms 13 OpenEx User s Guide 5 Click OK To add applications 1 Double click the WorkBench icon to add OpenWorkbench to the project The application is added to the Launch Details list 2 Double click the RPvdsEx icon to add one instance of RPvdsEx to the project 3 Double click the Controller icon to add one instance of OpenController to the project OpenProject Configuration XI Project Name Tutorial File Location CATDT OpenEx MyProjects x Description acquires 2 channels of continuous waveforms Ea View Edit Applicati
389. sers can get started with common experimental paradigms right away As users become more familiar with OpenWorkbench they can modify those configuration files or design their own The OpenWorkbench interface is streamlined so that the most frequently utilized features are in view A menu bar is also provided for easy access to additional commands The Main Window displays device configuration details and storage specifications during set up and toggles to plotting during data collection or preview J ioxi The Device Navigator Ele Setup Device Stores Control View Help provides a drag and drop y interface for configuring 5 EH Amp1 Fie Name Standard ACOs the devices in your Complete 64 Channel EC_macros rcx ES system Circuit Notes Biocessor Storage Specification me DEDE ee Sa a Store Tick Tick Type 3 Scaler List s Single blocks of 1 floats Store Snip Snip Type 4 Signal Snippet 244141 25K 64 aixi m blocks of 32 floats Record 100 p Store PDec PDec Type 5 Cont Waveform 381 5 64 Dm blocks of 32 shorts The System Control ioe 50 E Store LFPs LFPs Type S Cont Waveform 381 5 e4 s K Standby blocks of 32 floats window provides control gt Ide over running protocols Triggers Pee M x Device Amp1 Halting 2 Pause Device PAS 1 Hating V Verbose Store Tick Idling Store Snip Idling
390. settingname e g FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected Initialize Value Type a value to be used as an initial value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load Button Text Type text to be displayed on the button Value when On Type value when on Value when Off Type value when off Value in milliseconds for On time Type the length of time for the control to stay on when clicked Scope Pile Plot Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Data Target Select the data event Store name to be plotted Target Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number Caption Text Type caption
391. signals used in other macros in a way that is transparent to the user OpenWorkbench triggering sweep duration and sweep count are implemented within this macro Double click the macro icon in RPvdsEx to view detailed help for the macro 65 OpenEx User s Guide StandardTimeControl StandardTime Contr ol Standard Stim Control The Standard TimeControl macro is used to time and record information for repetitive sweep based e g stimulus or acquisition control periods OpenWorkbench sweep settings used to set the onset delay and duration of a sweep are implemented in this macro Three timing signals are generated relative to the onset of each sweep These indicate the onset offset and duration of a control period and are available as macro outputs named On Off and Control These would be used in turn to control acquisition or stimulation components in later stages of the processing chain Three optional Stores are included to record Epoch events scalar values at the onset or offset of the control period These are normally used to store the stimulus or control parameters that are active at the start or end of the control period and should be used only for signals that are synchronous with it Regardless of whether the onset or onset offset mode is assigned to the primary Store Stores A and B are acquired at the sweep onset and require the primary Store for their timestamp Double click the macro icon in RPvdsEx to view det
392. sing the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The target should generally be the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form dddd parTag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together and the target is the source the target name will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift When the target is the destination the target name will be a lesser than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g FreqSlider Value Shift Alt Target 1 Select an alternate destination target See Primary Target above Alt Target 2 Enter an alternate destination target See Primary Target above Alt Target 3 Enter an alternate destination target See Primary Target above Target Channel Enter the channel number Plots and Graphs Target Parameters My Name A unique name for the control A name will be automatically generated or the user can enter a name of their choice When controls are linked this value can be used as a part of the target path OpenController Reference Server Name
393. sociated epoch event value is less than or equal to the high range value Leave at default value of 1 if a range will not be used Time Span Define the time span if the Respect TRef Duration check box is cleared The X axis will be equal to the value set for Time Span divided by the value set for Bin Width Bin Width Define the Bin Width The X axis will be equal to the value set for Time Span divided by the value set for Bin Width Pile Behavior Parameters Pile Depth Set the minimum number of traces that will be displayed The maximum number of traces will be twice the value set The plot will refresh when the maximum number is reached Raster Behavior Parameters Raster Rows Select the number of rows to display TimeRef Epoch Name Defines the epoch or indexed event that will be used for the raster rows Click the value box to view a list of events Valid choices are preceded by an F epoch event icon Respect TRef Duration When checked the plot s X axis scale is equal to the duration of the epoch event selected in the TimeRef Epoch Name setting TRef Epoch Low Range Use to set the low value for the X axis range according to the defined TimeRef epoch event As data is animated the next data will only be displayed if the associated epoch event value is greater than the low range value Leave at default value of 0 if a range will not be used TRef Epoch High Range Use to set the high value for the X axis range according to the d
394. sors and Optibit PC Interface are recommended for most applications See the System 3 Installation Guide for hardware installation and set up instructions Organization of the Manual This manual will help you get started using OpenEx software and serve as a long term source of reference information In the OpenEx User s Guide you will find Overview The overview briefly describes the OpenEx applications how they work together and important OpenEx concepts Getting Started with OpenEx A Tutorial The step by step tutorial provides an introduction to many important OpenEx concepts and techniques Reference Guides A reference is provided for each component of OpenEx Reference guides include step by step instructions for basic tasks and detailed references for windows menus dialog boxes and settings Tips Tricks and Technical Information If you can t find it anywhere else maybe you can find it here The tips tricks and technical information section provides answers to commonly asked questions and revisits important OpenEx concepts OpenEx User s Guide OpenEx Overview OpenEx User s Guide OpenEx Overview About OpenEx The OpenEx Software Suite is a powerful experimentation platform that provides researchers with flexibility and configurability found in no other commercial system OpenEx includes several client and server applications for the System 3 hardware platform The diagram below illustrates the
395. splays its blocks and events OpenWorkbench Stores in the corresponding areas The BLOCK area also provides access to the block information entered at the time the block was acquired Block notes for a selected block can be accessed using the Information command on the BLOCK area shortcut menu OpenScope Reference Select Tank x amp Block 1 Sep 15 2 00 00 02 amp Block 2 Sep 15 2 11 10 20 00 00 00 Cmca BDemoTani Block 3 Sep15 2 11 10 22 00 00 00 B TANK G9 Block 4 Sep15 2 11 10 24 00 00 00 amp Block 5 Sep 15 2 11 17 28 00 00 01 Server Block 6 Sep15 2 11 17 50 00 00 00 amp Block 7 Sep 15 2 11 24 44 00 00 04 Refresh v Details Information Erase Block Strobe Double 0 0 J Snip Snip Float 32 24414 1 vv PDec Stream Short 32 381 5 Stream Float 16 190 7 OK Button The OK button updates OpenScope to use the selected Tank and Block for data animation Cancel Button The Cancel button closes the Select Tank window without updating the selected Tank and Block in OpenScope Note Changes such as erasing tank data or erasing blocks are NOT canceled Server Button The Server button displays the Select Server window allowing users to view add remove or test servers The shortcut menu is displayed by right clicking the SERVER area W Select Server xi SERVER Cancel EIS Refresh Details FEL Add Server Remove Server 2
396. ssions but do not want to divide the data into several OpenEx Blocks can still limit the amount of data being acquired One way to do this when acquiring spike data is to pause active event acquisition without actually pausing the recording session The technique described here might be suitable for experiments in which there is a lengthy delay between delivering a stimulus and some response of interest It allows the user to record selected periods of interest in a single block This is especially helpful when each OpenEx block will be individually processed offline Reducing the number of blocks reduces time spent in demanding offline processing Pausing Event Acquisition Without Closing the Block The circuit segment below shows how the user can create such a pause using the threshold Thresh parameter of a SortSpike2 component This technique will also work with the threshold ThLo parameter of a SortSpike component Data Form Float Sort Code Yes Dec Factor 1 Channels 4 4 231 0 4 231 0 SortSpike2 SerStore 4 231 0 AO nWid 4 8 Size 1000 ConstF gt ScaleAdd Thresh 1 Rst 0 BUseSign 1 WrEnab 1 aEA 1 3 nd ts gt 9Enab Rst 1 Index 0 lt lt SEA 1 J a J 3Tag dEA 1 Data Strobe 0 4 r Coef 4 iTime P Data CEA 1 Usually the aEA 1 tag is linked directly to the threshold parameter In this case a ConstF and ScaleAdd have been added between t
397. ssseseseeene ener entere nns sn nrte enne s nnns sn nn nnne 337 Table of Contents Tips for Working in OpenEx sssssssseseseeeeeee ennemis treten nns 339 OpenEx Cheat Sheet nee e t aa ee dea ed ta A a ERR RR Race es 340 Clean Running Applications ai 2 reci ctu acte t e Ce e d rond eeu ASERTA 341 Optimizing Performance for High Data Transfer Rate Operation ssessssss 343 Working with Long Blocks ssessssssesesesseee eene nennen snnt en nente sinn nn inrer nnns 344 FAQS uite e tette deitate dee shaft feries utu PA cose reu eee uetus 345 Kn wn NITOnElI prp 347 Resolved Anomalles 2 2 1 get Let erar qtu ane eder site d eec due ah ed 349 Beitr M S 351 AGI EE TA A ANE E E E A OEE OE EEE E AEO EA 353 TaT L cC 359 OpenEx User s Guide vi OpenEx User s Guide Before You Begin Installation The OpenEx Suite can be installed from the TDT Installation CD or downloaded from the TDT website Always uninstall old versions before installing a new version of OpenEx TDT Drivers should be installed before installing OpenEx The recommended operating system for all TDT systems is 32 bit Windows XP TDT System 3 does NOT support 64 bit operating systems such as Windows Vista or 64 bit Windows XPG at this time Hardware Requirements The OpenEx suite supports all System 3 processors however RX or RZ High Performance Proces
398. sweep number is compared to the total number of sweeps zSwCount to determine when the sweep loop is complete When this occurs the output value is set high and this flags OpenWorkbench through the zSwDone parameter tag to indicate that the last sweep has been reached Using the Standby on Stop check box and the Stop When Done check box under Sweep Loop the protocol can be set to go to Idle check boxed cleared or Standby check box selected mode when the z5wDone parameter tag value is set high A trigger ZTrgB can also be generated and controlled by the user via the zSwDone parameter tag Control of the trigger is based on settings found under ZTrgB Action on Done The zSwNum parameter tag is an optional tag that points to the current sweep number When zSwNum is used OpenWorkbench will display the value on the Block Info sheet while the experiment is running Note The zSwCount and zSwDone parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Basic Condition Control zCdPeriod 1 12 0 zCdCount d PulseTrain2e 6 CdFire pnPer 25000 enPulse 8 r J 2Rst Run PCount 0 zCdNum Uses Rh oce Used in circuits for basic condition based control of stimulus or acquisition 309 OpenEx User s Guide 310 Description Details An OpenEx circuit that requires condition control must use some form
399. t Input Signal Resolution minimum input step size that can be resolved To obtain the signal resolution divide the voltage range by the number of bit values E g for a 1 Volt 16 bit ADC this value is 2 2 or 0 0000305 X Location optional text information about the X coordinate of source in meters Y Location optional text information about the Y coordinate of source in meters Z Location optional text information about the Z coordinate of source in meters High Freq Cutoff high frequency cutoff in Hz of the source signal filtering High Freq Order order of the filter used for high frequency cutoff High Freq Filter Type optional text information to describe the type of filter used for high frequency cutoff Low Freq Cutoff low frequency cutoff in Hz of the source signal filtering Low Freq Order order of the filter used for low frequency cutoff Low Freq Filter Type optional text information that describes the type of filter used for low frequency cutoff Probe Info optional text information about the signal source Exporting to ASCII 282 Exporting to the standard ASCII format allows users to access data in a format readable by most statistical and graphic packages as well as Microsoft Excel spreadsheets When data is exported in the ASCII format the first six columns always denote the block name event time stamp channel sampling frequency and number of points in each record Subsequent columns contain
400. t oxList oxBuffer or oxStream component and must be included in each related parameter tag For example a related group of parameter tags might be named sFreq tFreq and dFreq These tag roots are used to identify the parameter tags that are associated so that data can be stored to the data tank By default the tag root will be used as the Store ID in OpenWorkbench Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference In general Store IDs should begin with alpha characters that is letters a z and A Z Store IDs must NOT begin with any of the following characters lt gt I a space or any number 0 to 9 Keep these limitations in mind when defining the tag root The following tag prefixes are used for the stored data S Sync The s prefix identifies the parameter as an index value Data that is not scalar requires a parameter with an s prefix associated with the buffer to indicate the position of the buffer This tells OpenEx how many points are to be downloaded to the tank or if any points at all require downloading t Time The t prefix identifies the parameter as a time stamp Data that is time stamped such as scalars lists and buffers use a parameter with a t prefix d Data The d prefix identifies the parameter as a data value All Data constructs require a parameter with a d prefix c Coefficient The c prefix identifies the parameter as a coefficient value n Number of Points The n prefix ident
401. t Sort Controls Manually page 156 for more information The Snippet Sort control is animated with snippet waveforms and a threshold marker green line is displayed for the window discriminator Because threshold is controlled from the Scrolling Threshold control the user need not adjust this marker If SortSpike is used an upper threshold pink line might appear This marker is controlled manually To sort spikes automatically e Right click the plot and click Auto Sort or Auto Sort All on the shortcut menu 155 OpenEx User s Guide 156 Snip 1 Auto Sort sorts spikes for the current channel Refresh Auto Threshold All sorts spikes for all Auto Sort channels in the data target Store defined in the Auto Sort all i control s properties Clear Sort Clear All Sorts D n 29 The auto sort feature uses a basic system for determining the number of potential units acquired on a channel A simple algorithm is used to separate out candidate spikes A series of cumulative frequency plots of the voltage distribution at each time interval is generated Distributions that have inflection points i e that are bimodal or multimodal will be used to determine the time voltage window While sorting is ongoing a progress bar is displayed When sorting is complete time voltage bars are added and positioned automatically 300 uv 300 D n 29 Note Gray traces are snippets that wi
402. t application file filename does not change When an OpenWorkbench file is imported by default a copy of the RPvdsEx circuit file is added to the project folder Important Tank files are NOT copied or imported when an OpenWorkbench file is imported They remain in their original location and should not be moved or deleted Moving or deleting tank files may result in loss of data New Projects If the user is creating a new project it is a good idea to import files in the OpenProject Configuration window To import files in the OpenProject Configuration window Add an application to the Launch list Click the Import cell for the desired application row In the Open dialog box browse to the file to import ee he cn Select the file to import and click Open 5 Repeat this process for each file to import Existing Projects If the user is adding an application to an existing project a corresponding application file can be imported directly in the OpenProject window To import a file in the OpenProject window 1 Add an instance of the desired application 2 Right click the new application icon Caution Importing a file to an application instance other than a newly created application may result in lost configuration information 3 Click Import on the shortcut menu 4 Browse to the desired file and click Open 5 Click Yes if prompted to discard current settings 6 Repeat the process for each file to import Note
403. t applications such as OpenScope and OpenBrowser request data from the tank and present it to the user in the desired format OpenDeveloper can also be used to create custom client applications that may request data or provide instructions for data storage Storage files are created by the TTank data server according to information configured by the user through OpenProject or the OpenWorkbench application Tank Monitor provides quick and easy access to the TTank data server Users can view information about TTank activity or perform basic maintenance such as adding or removing tanks OpenController is a visual interface that allows users to control experimental parameters such as filter settings threshold settings for unit activity and stimulus presentation variables and access acquired data and parameter variables in real time OpenController accesses the hardware through the OpenWorkbench Server OpenScope is a user customizable display and analysis application The TTank data server sorts and serves data to the OpenScope plots which are updated as each of the selected data tank elements becomes available This means that stored data can be displayed dynamically during the course of an experiment or that the entire experiment can be re played later as if the data were just being acquired OpenDeveloper is a group of ActiveX controls that can be used with programming languages such as MATLAB Visual Basic and Visual C to generate client a
404. t or parameter tag To display the Target Initialization settings 1 Select the desired device in the Device Navigator 2 OntheStores menu click Other Options 3 Inthe Advanced Setup dialog box click the Target Initialization tab Advance Setup x Target Initialization Sampling Rate Setup J romme we MonGain 10 Edit Remove Set initialization values For the targets Wild char may be used Note Tags can also be initialized in OpenController in the Value Control Parameter Group for a modifier control To add a Tag Initialization Setting 1 In the Advance Setup dialog box click the Add button to the right of the list The Tag Initialization Value dialog box is displayed 2 Type or select a tag to initialize from the Tag Name drop down list Tag Initialization alue xj Tag Name Value Thresh 3d me 100 OpenWorkbench Reference Clicking the Tag Name box displays a drop down list of all the parameter tags included in the control file assigned to the selected device 3 In the Value box type an initial value for the tag To edit or remove an existing value select the desired entry and click Edit or Remove 4 Click OK The new setting will be added to the Target Initialization list Initializing a Series of Channels A series of channels can be initialized using a single entry by using a number sign in place of the channel number For e
405. t will refresh when the maximum number is reached 261 OpenEx User s Guide 262 Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When multi view is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Raster Common Parameters Source Name Select the data event Store name from the currently selected tank Source Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number To view multiple channels set to 0 and enable multi view Raster Rows Select the number of rows to display TimeRef Epoc Name Defines the epoch or indexed event that will be used for the raster rows Click the value box to view a list of events Valid choices are preceded by an strobe indexed event icon Time Span Define the maximum value of the X axis using a time stamp value Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When multi view is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 N
406. ta Powerful tank sorting algorithms sort and serve data to the OpenScope plots which are updated as each of the selected data tank elements become available This means that stored data can be displayed dynamically during the course of an experiment or that the entire experiment can be re played later as if the data were just being acquired Unlike traditional turn key applications OpenScope and the data tank sorting algorithms allow for the relationships between selected data elements to be calculated and displayed dynamically For example data corresponding to user specifications such as a subset of stimulus parameters can be sorted into individual plots as they are stored to the tank Moreover a single data set can be simultaneously displayed in a number of perievent histograms each synchronized to different user selected events OpenScope provides eight customizable plot types including pile scroll raster XY feature chart histogram and activity A single OpenScope file can include a variety of multi view and single channel plot types to display different types of data For even greater flexibility several OpenScope windows each viewing data from a different data tank can be opened simultaneously As part of the OpenEx suite OpenScope can be used on any computer with local or network access to the data tank This provides users the ability to share information across a network Getting started with OpenScope begins with selec
407. tanks view block information and erase blocks The third section of the File menu lists recently used files Clicking a file name opens the file Closes the OpenScope application 233 OpenEx User s Guide 234 OpenScope Edit Menu Cut Copy Paste Paste Special Add Plot Remove Selected Plot Modify Plot s Group Ungroup Preferences Cuts the selected plot or plots Copies the selected plot or plots Pastes the most recently cut or copied plot or plots Pastes a new plot type using the data source from the most recently cut or copied plot Opens a sub menu of plot types Clicking a plot type adds a blank plot of that type to the grid area Removes the selected plot Opens the Plot Setup dialog box for the selected plot Groups selected plots so that they can be labeled and moved together Ungroups plots in a selected group Opens the Setup Preferences dialog box This dialog box can be used to customize the appearance of the grid area OpenScope Control Menu Animate Track Active Halt Animates plots with data in the block selected in the Tank Select window Animates plots with tracked data Stops animation or tracking OpenScope View Menu Toolbar Status Bar Tank Navigator Time Navigator Control Window Toggles the toolbar between displayed and hidden Toggles the status bar between displayed and hidden Toggles the Tank Select window between displayed and hidden Toggl
408. tarted with OpenEx is a hands on tutorial in which you ll learn to design create and run an experiment in the OpenEx environment This tutorial takes you through the process step by step while introducing important OpenEx concepts The concepts and techniques introduced can be applied to any type of experiment This tutorial will help users become more familiar with the OpenEx software suite In this tutorial you will 1 Plan and create an OpenEx project 2 Design a processing chain and generate a compiled circuit file rcx format 3 Build the OpenWorkbench experiment 4 Adda real time filter control using OpenController 5 Visualize and store data using OpenEx The project in this tutorial will acquire and store two channels of filtered data and display the acquired data streams in real time A filter control will allow real time adjustment of low pass and high pass corner frequencies in OpenController Keep an eye out for key OpenEx concepts These concepts are extremely important when using OpenEx Planning the Project When you plan a project you will need to 1 Determine what type of data will be acquired 2 Determine what device s you will use 3 Determine which OpenEx applications you will need The Data First consider the type of data that will be acquired In general data can be categorized into three basic data types scalar values discrete waveforms often called snippets or segments and continuous wavef
409. ted High uses the largest block taking the longest time and small uses the smallest block to calculate the threshold the quickest Auto Threshold Polarity Select Either Positive Only or Negative Only to determine if the threshold will look for positive going signals negative signals or signals in either direction A fixed polarity can be use to separate different waveforms Scroll Sections Selects the number of scroll sections to display OpenController Reference Slider Behavior Parameters Key Arrow Step Size Enter a step size for slider movements when using the arrow keys on the keyboard to control the slider Key Page Step Size Enter a step size for slider movements when using the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard to control the slider Snippet Sort Behavior Parameters Sort Thresh Mark Persistence Select Dynamic or Saved to determine if the threshold and sort values are saved when the control is stopped Select dynamic to reset the threshold and sort values each time the control is run Select Saved to retain the settings until the settings are changed manually or using the auto sort feature Training Sample Size Enter a value to determine the maximum number of samples used to sort spikes Using more spikes an increased sample size allows individual units to be separated more effectively and rare units are more likely to be detected However if unit activity is low using a large sample size can take an inordin
410. ted the protocol will automatically switch to Standby mode when the last condition and or sweep loop is completed The use of the Standby on Stop check box requires that the corresponding sweep condition or nested loop control construct includes end checking The Stop when Done check boxes under Condition Loop and Sweep Loop should never be used together 106 OpenWorkbench Reference Start Stop Timing The start stop timing settings allow users to specify a time delay for starting the circuit turning on the zBusA trigger turning off the zBusA trigger and halting the circuit Delay on Start ms These settings control the time delay for starting the circuit and turning on the zBusA trigger Circuit Run Specifies a time in milliseconds to delay before running the circuit For example if Circuit Run is set to 300 then after clicking Preview or Record OpenEx will wait 300 ms before running the circuit ZIrgA On Specifies a time in milliseconds to delay between starting the circuit and turning on the zBusA trigger For example if the Circuit Run delay is 300 ms and the zIrgA On delay is 500 ms then after clicking Preview or Record OpenEx will wait 300 ms before running the circuit and after that another 500 ms will pass before the zBusA trigger is turned on Delay on Stop ms These settings control the time delay for turning off the zBusA trigger and halting the circuit ZIrgA Off Specifies a time in milliseconds to
411. ternative means of selecting data for animation when the Tank Select window Tank Navigator is not displayed Controlling Data Visualization The Control Window provides controls for animating stored data or tracking data as it is acquired Both methods utilize data stored in the tank however tracking ensures that the most recently stored data is being viewed A control is also provided for selecting the speed at which tank data is displayed during animation Animation of the block of data selected in the Tank Select window begins at the time stamp indicated in the Time Control window The animation then returns to the beginning of the block and plays in a loop until a new block is selected When tracking data animation speed settings and block selection are not needed and are unavailable ruere rox The Animate button toggles plot animation on and off a EN The Track button toggles tracking on and off Animation Speed The Animation Speed control scrolls right or left through a list of 4 Double animation speed choices 227 OpenEx User s Guide Animation Speed choices include 8th Half Double Octal Quarter Normal Quad Using Setup Properties Dialog Boxes 228 The appearance and behavior of each plot can be modified using the Setup Properties dialog box The Setup Properties dialog box contains all of the customizable settings for a selected plot To open the Setup Properties dialog box for a plot double click the p
412. tes Sec This macro will accept floating point data streams for storage at a specified sampling rate Be aware that the sampling rate for the storage will change if the circuit sampling rate is changed after this macro setup Depending on the Store Format parameter setting one of five data formats will be used for storage 32 bit floating point 32 bit integer 16 bit integer Short 8 bit integer Byte or 32 bit integer for plot decimation If the data is being compressed before storage scale the input data stream to best match the range of the destination data type See the Options tab for more information Inputs Description Data Type Store 1 Store 4 Input data streams the number of macro inputs enabled is determined by the nChannels parameter Floating Point Notes This macro is only to be used with OpenEx and can be used with both single and multi processor devices This macro can be used in place of the following construct Continuous Waveform The Overview page of the properties dialog provides summary information and general documentation Subsequent tabs include both settings and documentation Click the Setup tab or click Next 17 OpenEx User s Guide Adjust Properties for Stream Store 1 4Ch E xj Overview Setup Options Store Name Wave Change Click button to edit store name nChannels 1 Set the number of channels for storage Sampling Rate 24414 06 Hz Change Click the button to set the sampli
413. text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the led indicator Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is selected a caption will be automatically generated and applied to the control The auto caption is based on the source target value Clear the Auto Caption check box to use a caption defined in the Caption Text box Poll Period Enter a value in milliseconds to set the poll period The poll period is a defined interval at which OpenController accesses control targets Led Color Select a color for the led from a color palette On Off Threshold Type the threshold If the value change is greater than the threshold the indicator will be toggled off or on Linear Gauge Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Source Target Select or type the name of the source target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button 4 to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The source target should be either the Store name from the OpenWorkbench file or the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form ssss for St
414. the acquisition relative to the beginning of a condition or sweep and the zAqDur parameter tag defines the duration of the acquisition Note The zAqDelay and zAqDur parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered 314 Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference Basic Stimulation Control 1 6 0 1 7 0 gt 9 JP N1 0 zStimDur nHi 1000 zStimDelay oN2 1 OnEnab 1 Uses Used in circuits where stimulation will occur and the user will set the stimulation delay or duration Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will be used for stimulus presentation must include some form of stimulation control construct Description This construct allows the user to control the delay and duration of stimulus presentation from OpenWorkbench protocol settings Details The SwFire line is generated by the sweep control construct The StEnable line Hop will control gates for turning stimuli on and off The zStimDelay parameter tag defines the length of the delay for the start of the stimulus relative to the beginning of a condition or sweep and the zStimDur parameter tag defines the duration of the stimulus Note The zStimDelay and zStimDur parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Other Timing Control 1 13 0 1 14 0 TTLDelay2
415. the software and the VSG hardware Example nDev is the device handle for the VSG2 5 Closes communication with the VSG device Form VSG Close nDev VSG_SetMode long nDev Long Sets the Stimulus Parameters for accessing the long mode long value image Use SetMode at the start of the VB script Example nDev is the device handle for the VSG2 5 Varl is the Stimulus number which is used for all other connections Var2 indicates the sync signal out parameters used Form VSG_SetMode nDev Varl Var2 VSG WriteDirect long Long Sends SDL commands to the VSG2 5 hardware devHandle String Write direct is used to send all SDL commands command to the hardware system Example nDev is the device handle for the VSG2 5 command is any SDL command All commands must start with a quote and end with a semicolon and end quotes To include variable names ampersands should be used VSG WriteDirect nDev size 1 amp width amp 8 This will change the size of target 1 to the set width Note the need for the quotes and the ampersands 173 OpenEx User s Guide 174 Running VBScriptEx control scripts The VBScriptEx control can run only one script at a time However multiple OpenController applications can be running at the same time with each containing a script control The script control can be run in either hidden or non hidden mode Hidden when running the editor will be hidden from view This mode is normally
416. they provide a means of interacting with specific inputs and outputs In our case we have chosen to use the Tag Name Filt This combined with the Access Tags option defined earlier in the macro setup makes two parameters available in our compiled circuit FiltHP and FiltLP These two parameter tags will be assigned later in our controller as targets of our real time filter controls Adding the Signal for Demonstration Purposes To add the demo signal 1 Adda Tone generator component to the workspace a Click the Components menu click Waveform Generators and click Tone Select component to place x Select Category wavetorm G enerators Generates a Tone Select Component RampT ooth SawTooth Random GaussNoise req 1000 Phse 0 Rst Run b Click OK and click the workspace to place the component c To set the frequency of the Tone generator to 2 Hz double click the component click in the Freq box and type 2 20 OpenEx Tutorials Edit Component Parameters 4 zi Tone gt Generates a Tone Help Name NoName A Default Amp 1 Peak output level Default Sht 0 DC shift added to output Default Freq 2 Frequency in Hz Default Phse 0 Phase shift in degrees Default Rist Run Phase reset EEIEEE Time Slice o Cancel d Click OK Add a GaussNoise generator component to the workspace a Click the Components menu click Waveform Generators and click G
417. this application in your project The multi application approach also offers a more distributed system whereby multiple computers can be used to process and visualize your data in real time This client server advantage comes at the expense of a higher level of system complexity In addition to having more applications to keep track of and navigate on screen there are more associated support and configuration files OpenProject provides the solution for both of these problems The OpenProject Interface The OpenProject interface allows users to open and close an entire OpenEx configuration with a single mouse click Window handling and desktop layout are also controlled easily through OpenProject A program navigation bar provides easy paging through each of the applications in your project This includes multiple instances of applications like OpenController with each given a logical name like Sort Control and Amplifier Control Programs are automatically sized and stacked together with the default load on top page defined by the user Applications can also be floated so they can be positioned anywhere on the screen for simultaneous viewing OpenProject File Management Each application in your OpenEx project has one or more associated files For example OpenWorkbench uses a single xpm file to store configuration information about timing devices and so forth and each OpenWorkbench configuration references one or more device circuit rco
418. times per second Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects EEG SP3002 SP3002 wsp Standard Hardware RA16BA Medusa Base Station and RA4PA or RAI6PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires four channels of EEG data and filters for alpha and beta waves Stores raw data continuously and stores RMS of the alpha and beta waves 12 times per second Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects EEG SP3003 SP3003 wsp Standard Hardware RA16BA Medusa Base Station and RA4PA or RAI6PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires one channel of EEG data and filters for alpha beta delta and theta waves Stores raw data continuously and the levels of filtered waveforms are calculated to deliver a stimulus when the energy factor reaches a certain value Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects EEG SPM0504 S PM0504 wsp Standard Hardware RX5 Pentusa Base Station and RA16PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires 16 channels of EEG data and filters for alpha beta delta and theta waves Stores RMS for Alpha Beta and Theta waves Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects EEG SPM0505 SPM0505 wsp Standard Hardware RX5 5 5 DSP Pentusa Base Station and four RAI6PA Medusa PreAmps Overview Acquires 64 channels of EEG data at 6103 Hz and stores the data in short 16 bit format Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects EEG SPM0506 S PMO0506 wsp Standard Hardware RZ5 BioAmp Processor and RA16PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires 16 channels of EEG data and filters for alpha beta delta and theta waves Stor
419. ting data Once the data tank has been identified plots can quickly be added and customized to meet a variety of research needs Plot configurations can be saved in a file that includes information about the tank and block where the data is stored A file can also be used to view other similar data sets Simply open the file and select a new tank and block containing the same data events TDT provides several example files that can be used for common data types or modified for use with similar data About Adding Plots An auto generated multi plot similar to the one found in OpenWorkbench can be added by dragging a Block from the Block list to the grid The multi plot will contain a plot for each data event or Store found in the block Users can make limited modifications to suit their needs Individual plots can be added to the grid area by dragging a data event to the grid or by using the Add Plot command on the Edit menu Either option provides several plot types to choose from When a plot is added using the Add Plot command the data source must be defined Other settings such as Source Channel Scaling and Appearance use default values until the settings are modified See the Plot Types section page 235 for step by step instructions for adding specific plot types After one or more plots have been created they can be copied and pasted or pasted as a new type This method works well when several similar plots are needed Copied plots can be mo
420. tings displayed Related settings are grouped together by color Other settings are available by clicking the Parameter Group box and selecting a settings group Ml Setup Properties for ModeCtri x Settings groups include m z Common pg 204 arameter Group ommon m Target s pg 216 Server Name DEFAULT w Caption Border pg 187 Caption Text Behavior pg 195 Mode on Run Run v Mode on Stop Standby Delay to run secs Delay to stop secs 4 If needed type the server name and path in the Server Name box If the data is being stored on the same computer where OpenController in running the default setting is fine The server name can be found in the Data Tank Data Storage dialog box in OpenWorkbench OpenController Reference 5 Click the Mode on Run box and select the protocol mode to be used when the OpenController Run button is clicked 6 Click the Mode on Stop box and select the protocol mode to be used when the OpenController Stop button is clicked 7 Click OK The Master Mode Control is created Before the control can be used an OpenWorkbench file must be open and a protocol should be selected Data Tables Creating a Data Table To quickly create a data table control 1 Click the Controls menu point to Tables Scripting and click Data Table The pointer changes to indicate that the control can be added 2 Click the grid to position the upper left corner of the control The control is added to the
421. tion When the Store Alias option is used a channel offset must also be used For example Snip 16 If an offset is not provided the data will be superimposed on the data in the Store Alias When a Store Alias has been assigned the data for that Store will be saved in the tank as a part of the Store Alias and not as the original Store name For example if a Store named SNP1 has been selected as the Store Alias for a Store named SNP2 the tank will only contain the SNP1 Store SNP2 will not appear in the tank but its data will be stored with the SNP1 Store data Note Aliases are assigned when data is stored to the tank Therefore aliases will only appear in applications that directly access the tank Because OpenController accesses data from OpenWorkbench data from the aliased Store does not appear with the data from the Store assigned in the Store Alias box To view all data in OpenController use the original Store names Setting the Sampling Rate The effective sample rate for each Store is displayed in the Storage Specification table when the corresponding device is selected in the Device Navigator Sample rates for the device may be determined by the compiled circuit file or set by the user 98 OpenWorkbench Reference To display the Sampling Rate settings 1 Select the desired device in the Device Navigator 2 OntheStores menu click Other Options 3 Inthe Advanced Setup dialog box click the Sampling Rate Setup tab Advance Se
422. to write VB Script that can control the CRS VSG2 5 stimulator using the underlying Stimulus Description Language SDL The CRS system gives experimenters the ability to precisely match stimulus presentation with acquired signals from evoked potentials or single unit neurophysiology The ability of one application to control both stimulus and acquisition simplifies the integration process 171 OpenEx User s Guide How It Works TDT s OpenController runs a modified version of Visual Basic Script Method calls to the System Description Language have been incorporated into the VB Scripting procedure All methods that run under the SDL also run under VB Script Since the method calls are all done in VB script all values are sent as variants and are returned as variants There are two sets of methods System Status Calls Most of these System Status Calls are not required for communication with the VSG2 5 They are included to insure compatibility with the CRS VSG2 5 hardware and software The following table lists a description of the VSG System Status functions oo SS VSG_GetDeviceCommsType long Long nDev String PortID ae VSG GetDevicelDstring long String nDev VSG_ErrorMessage long errorCode String r VSG_GetLogonState long nDev Long E gt VSG GetString long nDev String gt _S VSG_GetDeviceType long nDev Long 172 Prototype case insensitive Returns Des
423. tor gt Secondary Trigger gt Cycle Usage Main Trigger 1 1 0 1 2 0 Src zBusA 19 EdgeDetect pEdge Rising J Uses Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device that will be used by any OpenWorkbench Store must include this construct Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference Description This construct provides the main circuit reset and enable for control across all devices using the zBusA trigger By default OpenWorkbench will send a ZBusA trigger to all devices when it goes into Preview or Record mode The trigger stays high until OpenWorkbench is switched to Standby or Idle modes Details zBusA is a feature of the TrgIn component It generates a synchronized trigger across multiple devices The Enable line Hop stays high until halted from OpenWorkbench This high line is sent to multiple components circuit constructs to control stimulus presentation data acquisition or other actions The Reset line Hop is a synchronizing pulse that is sent to multiple components to ensure that all components constructs are started at the same time Clock Generator me zTime 1 4 0 SimpCount iTime S Enable 1 Uses Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device that will be used by any OpenWorkbench Store must include this construct The clock generator is used whenever the circuit must read back time to OpenWorkbench Description The clock generator is critical for time stamping data The clock incremen
424. troller windows modify the same parameters such as stimulus frequencies the OpenWorkbench memory map can become corrupted For each parameter tag only one modifier control should be active and running Note this does not apply to visualization controls In Run mode the control set can have several states Understanding and using these states correctly can help the user avoid memory map corruption Running and active By default controls are loaded and active when the user places OpenController in Run mode The state of the OpenController configuration can then be controlled using the Run and Stop buttons on the toolbar When the controls are running and active the frames around each control s borders are gray Ab xl Control set is running and a bl ae gt amp tuu OpenWorkbench protocol is running When the OpenWorkbench protocol is in Standby mode the controls will appear to be running and active gray borders but data is not read and updated This may result in blank plot screens in the running and active state 125 OpenEx User s Guide 126 Running with one or more controls inactive When the corresponding OpenWorkbench file is not open or its status is idle the targets will not be found and a yellow border appears around the control In the following example the target for the SSPK plot can not be found because the Open Workbench protocol is set to Idle Control set is running and Open
425. ts on each tick of the sample clock Details The Reset line is generated by the triggering construct and starts the clock at zero The clock is reset to zero for each Block in the data tank The output of the SimpCount is used by other constructs to time stamp data via the iTime line The time value is measured in number of samples since the Reset line went high and is automatically converted to seconds by OpenWorkbench when time stamping data OpenWorkbench uses the zTime parameter tag to display the current time and to make sure that the device is running correctly Note The zTime parameter tag is an OpenEx reserved tag name and must be included in this construct Secondary Trigger 1 5 0 1 6 0 Src Soft fl EdgeDetect pEdge Rising Uses Used in circuits requiring a secondary software or external trigger Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench which will use secondary triggering must include this construct 305 OpenEx User s Guide 306 Description This construct can facilitate secondary system wide synchronization It can be used to implement any secondary trigger desired by the user It can also be used with an asynchronous next sweep or condition construct to allow triggering of a next sweep or condition from the z Trigger B button in OpenWorkbench Details The zTrgB line can be used to trigger other circuit components When used with an asynchronous next sweep or condition constru
426. tting 2 850 0 600 0 gt 350 0 100 0 Control Settings Reference About the Control Settings Reference In the Control Settings Reference each topic corresponds to a parameter group in the properties dialog box How Topics Are Arranged Some settings such as the settings in the Captions Borders parameter group are the same for each control that includes these settings Other settings vary by control When settings in a parameter group vary by control the topics for each control type have been arranged in a folder for that parameter group Within each folder topics are arranged alphabetically How To Find These Settings Settings in this reference are available in the properties dialog boxes To open the properties dialog box for a control double click the control in the grid area of OpenController s Design mode Caption Border Parameter Group Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box must also be selected Caption Align Select an alignment for the control title Caption Color Select a color for the caption from a color palette Caption Visible Select the check box to set the control title area to be visible Clear the check box to hide the control title area Caption Bevel Visible Select the check box to give the control title area a beveled appearance Auto Caption When the Auto Caption chec
427. ttings to enable and control display of multi channel viewing When multi view is not enabled plots show results from a single channel or sort or all channels or sorts displayed together Behavior The Behavior group contains settings unique to the plot type Pile The Behavior group for the pile plot includes a setting for the pile depth Scroll The Behavior group for the scroll plot includes a setting to determine how many sections will be displayed before scrolling Histogram The Behavior group for histograms includes settings to control the event used for time time values for refreshing time span and bin width Raster The Behavior group for raster plots includes settings to control the event used for time time values for refreshing and time span XY Plot The Behavior group for XY plots includes a setting for time span to be displayed on the x axis Feature Chart Activity Refresh Control Scaling X Axis Setup Y Axis Setup Appearance Margins Colors Filtering OpenScope Reference The Behavior group for the feature plot includes a setting for the minimum number of cloud points to be displayed The Behavior group for chart plots includes a setting for time span to be displayed on the x axis The Behavior Group for activity plots includes settings for minimum and maximum values and corresponding color selections The Refresh Control group includes settings to control how and when the plot is r
428. tup E X Target Initialization Sampling Rate Setup r MV Use sample rate from RCO file To use the sample rate defined in the compiled circuit file e Ensure the Use sample rate from RCO file check box is selected This is the default setting Note Compiled circuit files are interchangeable among devices but not all devices will run all sample rates Many compiled circuit files include the sample rate in their name To specify a sample rate 1 Clear the Use sample rate from RCO file check box not checked A Bandwidth and Timing area is displayed Advance Setup x Target Initialization Sampling Rate Setup V Standard Synchronization p M r Bandwidth and Timing Standard Sample Rate 25k SR 24414 0625 2 Selecta sample rate from relevant choices for the device or if the device allows arbitrary sample rates enter a value in the selection box provided then click Check Realizable 3 Click OK to save the new settings Note The Standard Synchronization option is not implemented at this time 99 OpenEx User s Guide Initializing Tags Target Initialization In the Advance Setup dialog box the user can enter initial values for parameters controlled by parameter tags within the circuit This allows users to predefine parameters such as the filter settings frequency or level of a stimulus If a tag is not initialized it will take on the initial value of the componen
429. uires manual or external control the value should be set to 1 through the OpenWorkbench protocol Condition Control To use the Condition constructs the following names are required zCdPeriod The period of the sweep duration This is set in OpenWorkbench and can not be modified during block acquisition If it is necessary to change this value during the experiment an asynchronous next condition control circuit construct should be used See Asynchronous Next Condition Control page 311 for more information zCdCount The maximum number of conditions before the signal is terminated If this requires manual or external control the value should be set to 1 through the OpenWorkbench protocol Acquisition Control To use the acquisition control circuit constructs the following name is required zAqDur The duration of the acquisition To use the acquisition control circuit constructs with a delay the following name is required zAqDelay The delay for the start of the acquisition Stimulation Control To use the stimulation control circuit constructs the following name is required zStimDur The duration of the acquisition To use the stimulation control circuit constructs with a delay the following name is required zStimDelay The delay for the start of the acquisition Data OpenEx also uses tag roots to group related parameters The tag root is the suffix used in the parameter tag name It is identified in the oxScalar oxSnippe
430. um Columns Select the number of columns to display Category Coloring Selects the trace coloring method Traces can be seen in a single color None one color per channel By Channel or one color per sort code By SortCode Scroll Common Parameters Source Name Select the data event Store name from the currently selected tank Source Channel Selects the channel for viewing To view a single channel of data enter the desired channel number To view multiple channels set to 0 and enable multi view Scroll Sections Selects the number of scroll sections to display Multi View Enabled Enables multi view for viewing multiple channels When Multi View is enabled Source Channel should be set to 0 Num Views Select the number of channels or sort codes to view By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 Num Columns Select the number of columns to display Leave this value set to 1 to see one channel per row Confine Plotting Data In Cell Boundary When the checkbox is selected plot data will not cross its cell boundaries When disabled plot data can exceed the boundary Plotting Margin Percentage Select a value to increase or decrease the margin percentage for displaying data while multi view is enabled OpenScope Reference XY Common Parameters Source Name Y Axis Define the Event ID Store name for the Y Axis of the plot Click El to display a list of available event IDs Source Channel Set to 0 to
431. um value in the data set Select a Gain setting Gain is expressed as an integer from 1 to 32 The gain is used to display data in Offline Sorter or Wave Tracker using the correct units such as n Vs When unit information is not important the gain can be safely set to 1 to simplify the formula for determining the scaling factor Calculate Scale Factor for Stream and or Snippet data The scaling factor can be determined using the following formula where G gain SF scaling factor and H the highest absolute value in the data set Note that when processing spike data setting the gain to 1 and the scale factor to 1 x 106 is usually acceptable For streamed data SF x G 5 x 10 H For spike data SF x G 23 x 10 H To better understand how the SF G formulas are derived begin by considering these facts Data collected in OpenEx are stored as floating point values while Offline Sorter expects data stored as 12 bit signed integers A 12 bit signed integer yields a maximum value of 2047 In Offline Sorter the maximum voltage for streamed data is 5 Volts and the maximum voltage for spike data is 3 Volts OpenEx data is typically viewed in the microvolt range 1e 6 OpenBrower uses a user specified scaling factor SF and gain G when exporting tank data to a PLX format For the highest value H in the tank data the specified SF and G must yield a value that can be expressed within Offline Sorters dynamic range This
432. umber of columns to display in the Num Columns box Depending on the design of your experiment you might want to view a pattern that is representative of the physical or logical distribution of the channels For example if you had electrodes placed in a 4 x 4 grid around the head then it would be useful to see that pattern in OpenScope Similarly if you had electrodes in a linear pattern you might want to have either 1 column or 16 columns Click OK When you animate or track data the plot will look similar to this After a multi channel histogram plot has been created the settings can be quickly modified for viewing a range of channels To modify a histogram plot to view a range of channels l 2 Double click the plot to display the Setup Properties dialog box Enter the total number of channels of data to be viewed in the Num Views box By default channels will be displayed beginning with channel 1 To display multiple channels beginning with another channel modify the index offset 243 OpenEx User s Guide 3 3 To modify the index offset value click the Parameter Group box and click Multi View In the View Index Offset box enter the number of channels to offset W Setup Properties for Histogram Plot x EEA CH FIT BI M ulti View m Multi View Enabled View Index Offset 4 08 Show View Index one For example to begin viewing from channel 5 enter an Index Offset value of 4 The plot w
433. uration of the overload Flush flushes the current read and ensures that any data before the overflow is saved correctly to the tank 105 OpenEx User s Guide Triggers and Mode Switching These settings are available from the OpenWorkbench Setup menu Triggers and Start Stop Timing xj r Trigger Options 3 IV Use zTrg Use zTrgB a v Standby on Stop r Delay on Start ms Circuit Run n 2Trg4 On fo Delay on Stop ms Triggering and timing circuit constructs must pado od utn aenmn ere te enabled in the OpenWorkbench file Trigger Options zBus triggers provide a trigger to racks that contain devices used and enabled in the OpenWorkbench file There are two possible triggers and users can use one or both for triggering components At least one trigger is required to start the experiment Use zTrgA Selecting the Use zTrgA check box enables the zBusA trigger The zBusA trigger must be present in the compiled circuit file Use zTrgB Selecting the Use zTrgB check box enables the zBusB trigger The Use zTrgB check box must be selected if the zIrgB Action on Done settings Under Sweep Loop will be used The zBusB trigger must be present in the compiled circuit file Standby on Stop The Standby on Stop check box is used in conjunction with either of the Stop when Done check boxes under Condition Loop and Sweep Loop When the Standby on Stop check box is selec
434. urce target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The source target should be either the Store name from the OpenWorkbench file or the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form ssss for Store name or dddd partag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together the target will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number 217 OpenEx User s Guide Value Control Parameter Group 218 Visualization Modifier Control Value Control Parameters Value Type the target s value if the initialize mode is None Initialize Value Type the value to be used for initializing when the initialize mode is Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select an initialize mode to determine how the value will be initialized None sets input value to the Value Init On Run sets the input value to the Initialize Value when running Init On Load sets the input value to the Initialize Value when loading Value Scale Enter a value such that the inp
435. used with this construct Note The zSwPeriod and zSwCount parameter tags are OpenEx reserved tag names These tag names must be included in the construct and must not be altered Sweep Control with End Checking End checking is also provided with Asynchronous Next Sweep Control Nesting Control with End Tracking zSwPeriod 1 7 0 zSwCount gt Rst Run PulseTrain2 p nPer 25000 me PCount 0 zSwNum 1 9 0 3 iCompare 6 gt zSwDone zSwCount K 8 PTest GE A 307 OpenEx User s Guide 308 Uses Description Details Used in circuits for basic sweep based control of stimulus or acquisition when end checking is required End checking can be used to initiate some action at the end of the sweep loop Each compiled circuit file assigned to a device in OpenWorkbench that will use a sweep must include some form of sweep control construct When this construct is used OpenWorkbench protocol settings can be used to initiate actions such as stopping the protocol or generating a secondary trigger when the sweep loop is done The zSwPeriod parameter tag defines the period of the sweep and the zSwCount parameter tag defines the number of sweeps The current sweep number is compared to the total number of sweeps zSwCount to determine when the sweep loop is complete When this occurs the output value is set high and this flag
436. user manual for more information on how to use pages To assign the second macro to another DSP 1 Adda DspAssign component to the workspace 2 Click the Components menu click Multi Processor and click DspAssign Select component to place x Select Category Multi_Processor X Local DSP assignment box Select Component 3 Click OK and click the workspace to place the component 37 OpenEx User s Guide Resize the DspAssign component using standard windows drag techniques so that the secondary Stream Store MC macro is inside the DspAssign window Double click the DspAssign component select Aux 1 RZ DSP 2 from the DSP drop down box Click OK Your circuit should look similar to the one pictured below CoreSweepControl Stream_Store_MC SweepNum Store nChan 16 Eda SweepDone Br Store Wavel 16 Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 1525 9 kBytes Sec Primary Store Name Tick DSP Aux 1 Stream Store MC Store nChan 16 cea ea Store Wavett7 32y Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 1525 9 kBytes Sec Adding the Signal for Demonstration Purposes 38 This tutorial will utilize a test signal for demonstration purposes Real world circuit applications will acquire signals from a preamplifier or other device output The pooled stores themselves would be configured in the same manner To add the demo signal 1 cem de wr op Click the Insert Macro icon select the Test Spike MC macro from the Macrosl
437. users to develop several graphs each associated with a unique event Data can then be compared across event parameters OpenScope Reference Untitled OpenScope Ele Edt Control wew Heb OSA utt j TANK TEMPTANK 4 Raster Plots with different Behavior settings The OpenScope plots show two raster plots that differ in their behavior The top plot displays all the data and the bottom plot displays only data in events that have the value 2000 The difference between the two plots is how the behavior settings use epoch events In the bottom plot the behavior of the plot is controlled by setting limits on the range of epoch events that are displayed Using Refresh Control Settings Refresh Control settings determine when displayed data is removed from the display Epoch events can be used to control what set of data is shown on screen For example a pile plot can be set to remove old data and show only new data each time the epoch event changes This would allow users to examine spike patterns that are associated with an event such as a single stimulus event To view data for a single event value at a time 1 Select the desired epoch event in the Refresh Epoch Name box in the plot s refresh Control parameter group settings 2 Enter the high and low epoch values for the range over which the plot should refresh in the Strobe Epoch Low Range and Strobe Epoch High Range boxes 225 OpenEx User s Guide 3 Select the Refresh o
438. ut inputs outputs and properties of each macro can be found within the macro s tabbed properties dialog box CoreSweepControl StandardTimeControl HP LP Filter 1Ch 4Ch HP LP Filter MC Block Store 1 8 Ch Block Store MC Stream Store 1 8 Ch Stream Store MC single and multi processor devices single and multi processor devices single and multi processor devices multi processor devices only single and multi processor devices multi processor devices only single and multi processor devices multi processor devices only generation of the core timing amp control signals used in every OpenEx circuit this macro must appear once and only once in each circuit that uses other macros and is used in OpenEx generation and storage of the basic timing control signals needed to drive various stimulation or acquisition structures filtering of floating point data streams through cascaded highpass HP and lowpass LP filters continuous or decimated block storage of floating point data streams Circuit Design Reference Epoc Store single and multi processor storage of scalar Epochs on devices transitions of control or signal inputs Slow Store 1 8 Ch single and multi processor triggered storage of floating devices point or integer data streams Slow Store MC multi processor devices only Spike Store 1 8 Ch single and multi processor spike thresholding and sorting of devices floating poi
439. ut value value value scale value shift Value Shift Enter a value such that the input value value value scale value shift SigGen Engine Control Value Control Parameters SGI This setting always reflects the current SGI value and can be used as the target of another control allowing the SGI to be modified by another control such as a slide switch Initialize SGI Type a value to be used as an initial value if the initialize mode is set to Init On Run or Init On Load Initialize Mode Select a mode from the drop down list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load OpenScope Reference In the OpenScope Reference you will find A reference guide to the OpenScope Workspace and the basics of adding and modifying plots Plot Types Step by step guides to creating each of the seven available plot types Plot Settings Reference An in depth reference covering many of the plot settings available from the Property Settings dialog box 219 OpenEx User s Guide 220 OpenScope Reference About OpenScope OpenScope is a user customizable display and analysis application It is designed for visualization of data stored in the OpenEx data tank format A wide variety of plot types and flexible settings provide the user with the ability to view the desired data in the most useful way The source of this flexibility is the data tank format which allows for the rapid sorting of many megabytes of stored da
440. v Stimulation used if stimulus control Delay o ms circuit constructs are included in the compiled CAES circuit file to be used for 100 ms each device that will be used to present the stimulus Duration The settings are enabled when the Stimulation check box is selected When the settings are disabled the stimulus will start when the sweep fire line SwFire within the compiled circuit file is triggered Delay Defines the length of the delay for the start of the stimulus relative to the beginning of a condition or sweep via the zStimDelay parameter tag within the compiled circuit File Duration Defines the duration of the stimulus via the zStimDur parameter tag within the compiled circuit file Acquisition Timing These settings are available from the OpenWorkbench Setup menu Timing controls are used to control the start and duration of acquisition stimulus presentation and other actions Different stimulus and acquisition timing controls provide independent control over the experimental paradigm Before setting timing controls the sweep and or condition controls must be enabled Acquisition Acquire Timing x The settings under Acquisition can only be JV Acquisition used if acquisition control circuit constructs are Delay 0 ms Duration 100 ms included in the compiled Cancel circuit file to be used for each device that will be used for acquisition OpenWorkbench Refer
441. vent name Output File Name allows the user to browse to a network or local folder and saves the file with a set name Append File Name By allows the user to select to automatically add the block event channel number and or row number of the exported data to the saved file name This is very useful when the Multi File option is selected Note The NEV export function is no longer supported NsN Export Specific Settings For more information regarding the NeuroShare Native NsN file format refer to the NeuroShare website at http neuroshare sourceforge net index shtml Output File Name specifies the path and filename for the exported nsn file File Type Descriptor specifies the file extension for the exported data file This should be set to nsn Time Stamp Resolution minimum timestamp resolution in seconds Digitization Scaling Factor in nV not used Scaling Factor to Convert Tank Data to pV scale factor used for buffer type 2 snippet type 4 or continuous type 5 data Recommended value is 1 Scaling Factor to Convert Event Tank Data scale factor used for scalar type 1 or list type 3 data Recommended value is 1 File Comment 256 character comment line 281 OpenEx User s Guide Min Input Signal minimum possible value of the input signal in Volts Max Input Signal maximum possible value of the input signal in Volts Units Enter a text value to specify the recording units of measuremen
442. vice Stores Control View Help ee eu cic i gt Maio Ix Record 100 Preview 50 Standby Idle b Fingers t Time 00 00 04 Device Cycle Usage Condition of ws Tutorial2 EM Sweep 4 F 4 Event Rate 273 5 Data Rate 2186kb s Status Messages Ready Hardware Loaded Data Storage C TDT OpenEx Tanks TutTank Block 13 What s Next In this tutorial you created a project from the ground up using RPvdsEx macros and configured individual pooled stores across separate DSP processors Refer to the OpenEx reference sections for more information on each application in the OpenEx Suite 42 OpenEx Tutorials Additional Standard Project and Example Files When OpenEx Suite is installed a number of project files are installed for your use These projects can provide a means of getting basic experiments up and running quickly and can be modified to meet the needs of your paradigm The RCO Files used by each project are targeted for specific typical hardware configurations but can often be modified for use with other hardware combinations See the RPvdsEx Manual for circuit design techniques EEG Projects Project File TDT OpenEx StdProjects EEG SP3001 SP3001 wsp Standard Hardware RA16BA Medusa Base Station and RA4PA or RAI6PA Medusa PreAmp Overview Acquires four channels of EEG data and filters for alpha beta and theta waves Stores raw data continuously and stores RMS of the alpha beta and theta waves 12
443. waveform s and the associated time stamp each time OpenWorkbench is polled When used with multiple channels data acquired at different rates and times asynchronously can be stored Details Each signal snippet must include parameter tags using the tag root with the following prefixes and suffixes S prefix for the sync parameter d prefix for the data tags that are stored This tag may also include a suffix with a tilde and a number if there are multiple acquisition channels For example dPD 1 dPD 2 sPD 1 and sPD 2 would be used for two channels of associated data using the tag root PD Before the circuit is stored as a compiled circuit file the number of channels is checked by comparing the tilde values to the oxSnippet buffer value The example below shows two channels of snippet data from a FindSpike FindSpike acquires candidate spikes using a threshold level that is compared to the RMS of the background signal Candidate spikes are time stamped timeline below and stored to a buffer Because each channel will have different spike patterns a separate sample position parameter with the s tag prefix is required for each channel Separate data parameters with the d tag prefix are also required No time parameter tag is needed since the data structure contains the time stamp Non Macro Circuit Construct Reference oxSnippet EP Tag Root FA BIk Size 32 Data Form Float Sort Code No Dec Factor 1 Channels 2 1
444. whenever the experiment must be paused In this mode devices are loaded and running but signals are not being acquired and saved to disk gt Idle should only be used when the experiment is completed In this mode devices are not loaded and are not running Idle mode clears all values from the hardware OpenEx Tutorials To run the project 1 Click the Record button At this point the automated plotting function in OpenWorkbench will generate a real time plot displaying each stored data element 2 Clickthe RS Autoscale icon at the top of the plot to scale the display Your project should now appear similar to the illustration below with the timing and sweep number of Onset epoch Tick shown across the top of the plot and the two streaming channels Demo channel 1 and Demo channel 2 displaying their sine and Gaussian noise input waveforms OpenWorkbench File Setup Device Stores Control View Help m elu ele gt gt iso 900e 3 900e 3 900e 3 ex Record 100 A 900e 3 Preview 50 Standby Idle Lees P Time 00 00 19 Device Cycle Usage Condition of ws Tutorial E Sweep 19 f 1 Event Rate 27 s Data Rate 209kb s Status Messages Ready lHardware Loaded Data Storage C TDT OpenEx Tanks TutTank Block 2 Adding the Real Time Control OpenController is a visual interface for designing and implementing custom control sets for OpenWorkbench experi
445. wing you the best possible visualization but limiting the processing power available to the system for other tasks Low load places the least demand on the system by grabbing only a subset of the data for example 3 of 10 acquired snippets to update the plot This leaves more processing power for other tasks 213 OpenEx User s Guide Regardless of the setting selected here all data is retained in the tank and can be used for later analysis Typically users should select the lowest load setting that provides an adequate representation of the data for the user s purposes such as making real time decisions and modifications or monitoring the experiment Scale Parameter Group 214 Knob Scale Parameters Scale Minimum Enter the minimum value for the control Scale Maximum Enter the maximum value for the control Show Labels Show value labels for major tick mark positions Labels can be shown even if tick marks are not shown The number of labels shown is determined by the Major Ticks Count setting Label Precision Enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point for value labels found on the control Label Margin Enter the number of pixels of space desired between labels and the tick arc Show Major Ticks Select the check box to show major ticks Major Ticks Count Enter the number of major tick marks to display on the control The Show Major Ticks check box must be selected before major tick marks become visi
446. within OpenEx s user friendly software environment Bridging the Gap OpenEx represents TDT s latest advancements in software design Traditionally there have been two approaches to developing software for the research environment turn key systems and custom systems Over the years TDT has moved steadily towards bridging the gap between these two approaches We ve overcome many of the limitations of traditional turn key software by developing some of the most flexible software available for many research applications At the same time we ve continued efforts to develop an increasingly more user friendly development environment for custom applications OpenEx builds on the idea of flexible turn key interfaces for experimental control and analysis and accommodates customization through the use of compiled circuit files What are compiled circuit files The foundation for each TDT system is a powerful hardware platform System 3 hardware is built around real time processing modules that include onboard digital signal processors These processors are capable of conditioning processing and storing data in real time and are controlled using circuits designed using TDT s RP visual design studio RPvdsEx Compiled circuit files in either rco or rcx format are files that contain control objects that can be accessed by software applications like the OpenEx applications The rcx format is the standard format for compiled circuit files This file ty
447. within OpenProject the default location will be the UserFiles folder for the current project 8 Type a file name in the File Name box and click Open 9 Modify any other settings as desired 10 Click Export 11 Review the messages in the Export Status dialog box and click OK Single Vs Multi File Export 288 The user can determine if data will be exported to multiple files or a single file using the Multi File check box in the Data Selection Table window Single File Export If the Multi File check box is not checked cell A3 all data is exported to a single file To use this export function the rows do not have to have been configured before the export process begins The Data Export Format Configuration dialog box will be displayed during export giving the user an opportunity to complete configuration If a single row is selected and has been configured the dialog box will show the output format for that row If multiple or all rows have been selected the dialog box will display the output format for the first row Note error messages will occur if a row has no data in it OpenBrowser Reference Multi File Export If the Multi File check box has been selected each row of data will be saved to a separate file Each row can have a unique file format Rows must be configured for export using the Data Export Format Configuration dialog box prior to the export process When the export process begins the selected rows are immedi
448. wn list The available choices are None Init On Run or Init On Load Button Text Type text to be displayed on the button Value when On Type value when on Value when Off Type value when off Value Watch Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server OpenController Reference Source Target Select or type the name of the source target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button 4 to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The source target should be either the Store name from the OpenWorkbench file or the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form ssss for Store name or dddd partag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together the target will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Captio
449. xample to set all tags named iChan 1 iChan 2 to a specific value type iChan in the Tag Name box and type the desired initial value in the value box to the right Incrementing Values A plus sign can be placed after the number sign so that each successive assignment will increment the assigned value by one For example to set tags named iChan 1 iChan 2 iChan 3 and iChan 4 to the values 5 through 8 type iChan in the Tag Name box and type the value 5 in the Value box to the right Editing or Removing a Listed Tag After a tag has been added to the list the user can click the tag to enable the Edit and Remove buttons Edit Opens the Tag Initialization Value dialog box Remove Removes the selected tag from the list Secondary Tags Dialog Box The Secondary Tags dialog box allows the user to add tags to the Store so that data from variables that are not associated with the circuit header can be saved These variables share the same time stamp are of the same data type and have the same number of buffer points as the data identified by the circuit header Secondary tags can be used with Triggered Scalar Type 1 OxScalar Data Buffer Type 2 OxBuffer and Data List Type 3 oxList data constructs Storage Specification a ee IE ET Store Tick Ticker Type 1 Triggered Scalar ONset Strobe single value Store EA_ EA Type 4 Signal Snippet blocks of 32 floats Store PD JPD T
450. y Store Name Tick Data Rate 1525 9 kBytes Sec Test_Spike_MC DSP Aux 1 Stream_Store_MC Store nChan 16 E Store Wave 17 32 Float 24414 1Hz Data Rate 1525 9 kBytes Sec Period 100 gt Demo nChan 16 ChanSel 17 32 channels oiseLvl 000002 Click the File menu and click Save As When the Project folder is created a subfolder named RCOCircuits is created to store compiled circuit files for the project This folder should open by default Type a filename in the file name box and click Save Both the graphical processing chain and the control object are saved into one compiled circuit file in the default directory OpenEx Tutorials Configuring OpenWorkbench In this section we will configure the experiment by loading the compiled circuit file to a device Since we have implemented store pooling the storage specification table should populate only two stores the Tick store provided by the CoreSweepControl macro and our Wave store provided by the pooled Stream Store MC macros To configure the experiment 1 Select the Workbench icon in the OpenProject window 2 Select any one device on which to run this example and click its gray icon in the navigator This will display the device configuration in the main part of the window File Setup Device Stores Control View Help RCO Circuit File PE eon sensns D a Circuit Notes RX8 Multi I O Processor E
451. yed after the decimal point for value labels found on the control 203 OpenEx User s Guide 204 Logarithmic Gauge Common Parameters Server Name Select the server name The default value of Local selects the local server Source Target Select or type the name of the source target When an OpenWorkbench configuration is open available targets can be selected using the Select Target dialog box Click the look up button 4 to open the Select Target dialog box Using the Select Target dialog boxes ensures valid formatting of target name The source target should be either the Store name from the OpenWorkbench file or the device name from the OpenWorkbench file followed by the parameter tag from the RPvdsEx circuit This should follow the form ssss for Store name or dddd partag for device name and parameter tag When linking controls together the target will be a greater than symbol followed by the source control s My Name value followed by the setting name This should follow the form myname settingname e g gt FreqSlider Value Shift Target Channel Enter the channel number Caption Text Type text for a caption if desired The Auto Caption check box must be cleared for the caption text to be used The Caption Visible check box in the Caption Borders parameter group must also be selected The Caption Visible check box is selected by default for the logarithmic gauge Auto Caption When the Auto Caption check box is s
452. ype 5 Cont Waveform il blocks of 256 shorts To display the Secondary Targets dialog 1 Select the desired device in the Device Navigator 101 OpenEx User s Guide 2 Onthe Stores menu click Show All Fields 3 In the Storage Specification table click the button in the Secondary Tag cell for a triggered scalar data buffer or data list Store Secondary Targets x em e IRate 1 Rate Important keep in mind that the secondary tag will share the same time stamp as the selected Store and must be of the same data type To add a tag to the Secondary Tags list 1 In the Secondary Targets dialog click the Add button to the right of the list The Secondary Tags dialog box is displayed Secondary Tags x Tag Name Store Name IRate 1 v Rate Store name must be 4 chars long 2 Inthe Tag Name box choose or type a parameter tag from which secondary data is to be acquired Clicking the Tag Name box displays a drop down list of all the parameter tags included in the compiled circuit file assigned to the selected device 3 Inthe Store Name box type a four character code for the specified tag This name will be used to identify the data in the tank It appears in the Events list of OpenScope and the Stores list of the OpenController Target Select dialog box 4 Click OK to add the new tag name to the secondary targets list Editing or Removing a

OpenEx User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents